Patent Publication Number: US-2023138634-A1

Title: Electronic device and method for sending electronic data

Description:
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION AND CLAIM OF PRIORITY 
     This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 17/836,838, filed on Jun. 9, 2022, which is a continuation application of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/960,662, filed on Jul. 8, 2020, claiming the benefit of the International Patent Application No. PCT/CN2019/073844, filed on Jan. 30, 2019, at the World Intellectual Property Office, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein in their entirety by reference. 
    
    
     TECHNICAL FIELD 
     The present disclosure is related to an electronic device and, more particularly, is related to an electronic device and method for sending electronic data. 
     BACKGROUND 
     An electronic device generally provides a function for sending electronic data to an external device. The electronic device may support a plurality of different message delivery services. The plurality of different message delivery services include an email service, a short-message service, a multimedia-message service and an instant-messaging service. Therefore, the electronic device may need an improved mechanism to effectively implement at least one selected from the plurality of different message delivery services. 
     U.S. Patent Publication No. 2005/0009541 A1 discloses intelligent messaging. U.S. Patent Publication No. 2009/0061825 A1 discloses techniques for group messaging on a mobile computing device. 
     SUMMARY OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS 
     It is an aspect of the present disclosure to provide an electronic device, which effectively sends electronic data to an external device based on a specific application communication protocol. 
     It is therefore an embodiment of the present disclosure to provide an electronic device for a first communication target and a second communication target. The electronic device includes a processor, a sensing unit and a sensing target. The sensing unit is coupled to the processor, and is configured to sense a first variable physical parameter to cause the processor to obtain a sensed data. The sensing target is coupled to the processor, and includes one of a push button and a functional switch. The processor is configured to be caused to receive an interrupt request signal by means of the sensing target, to obtain a first electronic data and a second electronic data being different from the first electronic data based on the sensed data in response to the interrupt request signal, to cause the first electronic data to be sent toward the first communication target based on a first specific application communication protocol, and to cause the second electronic data to be sent toward the second communication target based on a second specific application communication protocol being different from the first specific application communication protocol. 
     It is therefore another embodiment of the present disclosure to provide an electronic device for a first communication target and a second communication target. The electronic device includes a processor, a sensing unit and a timer. The sensing unit is coupled to the processor, and is configured to sense a variable physical parameter to generate a sense signal. The timer is coupled to the processor, and is configured to be controlled by the processor to cause the processor to receive an interrupt request signal. The processor is configured to obtain a sensed data from the sense signal in response to the interrupt request signal, to determine an electronic data being different from the sensed data based on the sensed data, to cause the electronic data to be sent toward the first communication target based on a first specific application communication protocol, and to cause the electronic data to be sent toward the second communication target based on a second specific application communication protocol being different from the first specific application communication protocol. 
     It is therefore still another embodiment of the present disclosure to provide an electronic device for signaling a first communication target and a second communication target. The electronic device includes a processor, an input unit and a timer. The input unit is coupled to the processor, and is configured to cause the processor to obtain an input data. The timer is coupled to the processor, and is configured to be controlled by the processor to cause the processor to receive an interrupt request signal. The processor obtains a first electronic data and a second electronic data being different from the first electronic data based on the input data in response to the interrupt request signal, causes the first electronic data to be sent toward the first communication target based on a first specific application communication protocol, and causes the second electronic data to be sent toward the second communication target based on a second specific application communication protocol being different from the first specific application communication protocol. 
     It is therefore an embodiment of the present disclosure to provide a method for sending electronic data. The method includes the following steps: A first user input operation and a second user input operation occurred later than the first user input operation are received. A first communication protocol identifier configured to denote a first specific application communication protocol is obtained in response to the first user input operation. A first communication target identifier configured to denote a first communication target is obtained based on the first communication protocol identifier. The first communication target identifier and the first specific application communication protocol are used to send the electronic data to the first communication target in response to the second user input operation. 
     It is therefore another embodiment of the present disclosure to provide an electronic device for sending electronic data. The electronic device includes an electricity use target and a processing unit. The processing unit is coupled to the electricity-using target, is configured to obtain a first communication protocol identifier configured to identify a first specific application communication protocol by means of the electricity-using target, obtains a first communication target identifier configured to identify the first communication target based on the first communication protocol identifier, and sends the electronic data toward the first communication target based on the first communication target identifier and the first specific application communication protocol. 
     It is therefore still another embodiment of the present disclosure to provide a method for sending electronic data. The method includes the following steps. An electricity-using target is provided. A first communication protocol identifier configured to identify a first specific application communication protocol is obtained by means of the electricity-using target. A first communication target identifier configured to identify a first communication target is obtained based on the first communication protocol identifier. In addition, the electronic data is sent toward the first communication target based on the first communication target identifier and the first specific application communication protocol. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
       The foregoing and other features and advantages of the present disclosure will be more clearly understood through the following descriptions with reference to the drawings, wherein: 
         FIG.  1    is a schematic diagram showing a communication system according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  2    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  3    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  4    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  5    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  6    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  7    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  8    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  9    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  10    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  11    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  1   ; 
         FIG.  12    is a schematic diagram showing a communication system according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  13    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  12   ; 
         FIG.  14    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  12   ; 
         FIG.  15    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  12   ; 
         FIG.  16    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  12   ; 
         FIG.  17    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  12   ; 
         FIG.  18    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  12   ; 
         FIG.  19    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  12   ; 
         FIG.  20    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  12   ; 
         FIG.  21    is a schematic diagram showing a communication system according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  22    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  21   ; 
         FIG.  23    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  21   ; 
         FIG.  24    is a schematic diagram showing a communication system according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  25    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  24   ; 
         FIG.  26    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  24   ; 
         FIG.  27    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  24   ; 
         FIG.  28    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  24   ; 
         FIG.  29    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  24   ; 
         FIG.  30    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  24   ; 
         FIG.  31    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  24   ; 
         FIG.  32    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  24   ; 
         FIG.  33    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  24   ; 
         FIG.  34    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  24   ; 
         FIG.  35    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  24   ; 
         FIG.  36    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  24   ; 
         FIG.  37    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  24   ; 
         FIG.  38    is a schematic diagram showing a communication system according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  39    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  38   ; 
         FIG.  40    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  38   ; 
         FIG.  41    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  38   ; 
         FIG.  42    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  38   ; 
         FIG.  43    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  38   ; 
         FIG.  44    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  38   ; 
         FIG.  45    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  38   ; 
         FIG.  46    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  38   ; 
         FIG.  47    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  38   ; 
         FIG.  48    is a schematic diagram showing a communication system according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  49    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  48   ; 
         FIG.  50    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  48   ; 
         FIG.  51    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  48   ; 
         FIG.  52    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  48   ; 
         FIG.  53    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  48   ; 
         FIG.  54    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  48   ; 
         FIG.  55    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  48   ; 
         FIG.  56    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  48   ; 
         FIG.  57    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  48   ; 
         FIG.  58    is a schematic diagram showing a communication system according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  59    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  58   ; 
         FIG.  60    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  58   ; 
         FIG.  61    is a schematic diagram showing a communication system according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  62    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  61   ; 
         FIG.  63    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  61   ; 
         FIG.  64    is a schematic diagram showing a communication system according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  65    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  64   ; 
         FIG.  66    is a schematic diagram showing a communication system according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  67    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  66   ; 
         FIG.  68    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  66   ; 
         FIG.  69    is a schematic diagram showing a communication system according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; 
         FIG.  70    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  69   ; 
         FIG.  71    is a schematic diagram showing a communication system according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; and 
         FIG.  72    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure of the communication system shown in  FIG.  71   . 
     
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS 
     Please refer to  FIG.  1   , which is a schematic diagram showing a communication system  871  according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. The communication system  871  includes an electronic device  100  and a first communication target  511 . For example, the electronic device  100  is to communicate with the first communication target  511 . The electronic device  100  for sending electronic data DE 61  includes a storage unit  720  and a processing unit  710 . The storage unit  720  provides a first functional state code CS 81  and a communication target identifier HT 81  configured to identify a first communication target  511  under a first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the first functional state code CS 81  represents a first functional state SD 81  which the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is configured to be in. The first functional state SD 81  is equal to one of a first selected state SH 81  and a first non-selected state SK 81 . 
     The processing unit  710  is coupled to the storage unit  720 , and sends the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  based on the communication target identifier HT 81  and the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the first functional state code CS 81  as a first valid state code CT 81  representing the first selected state SH 81  in a data transmission phase UT 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  100  further includes an electricity application target BV 81  coupled to the processing unit  710 . After the processing unit  710  sends the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , the processing unit  710  receives an operation request message QC 82  by means of the electricity application target BV 81 . The processing unit  710 , in response to the operation request message QC 82 , replaces the first functional state code CS 81  stored by the storage unit  720  with a second functional state code CS 82  representing the first non-selected state SK 81  to stop selecting the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  720  stores the communication target identifier HT 81 , a communication protocol identifier group GH 1  and a protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  configured to identify the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . The communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include a first communication protocol identifier HP 1  configured to identify the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is one selected from a plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The storage unit  720  further stores the first functional state code CS 81  associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . 
     The processing unit  710  is configured to access the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , accesses the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , and accesses the stored first functional state code CS 81  based on the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to cause the storage unit  720  to provide the stored first functional state code CS 81  to the processing unit  710 . Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the provided first functional state code CS 81  as the first valid state code CT 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the provided communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     Please refer to  FIGS.  2  and  3   .  FIG.  2    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8711  of the communication system  871  shown in  FIG.  1   .  FIG.  3    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8712  of the communication system  871  shown in  FIG.  1   . As shown in  FIGS.  2  and  3   , each of the implementation structure  8711  and the implementation structure  8712  includes the electronic device  100 , the first communication target  511  and a second communication target  521 . The electronic device  100  is further to communicate with the second communication target  521 , and includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  710 , an input unit  740  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and a display unit  730  coupled to the processing unit  710 . For example, the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521  are a first external target and a second external target, respectively. 
     In some embodiments, one of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes a first electricity application target BU 81  coupled to the processing unit  710 . One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes a second electricity application target BU 91  coupled to the processing unit  710 . One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes a third electricity application target BV 81  coupled to the processing unit  710 . One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes a fourth electricity application target BV 91  coupled to the processing unit  710 . The second electricity application target BU 91  is the same as or different from the first electricity application target BU 81 . The fourth electricity application target BV 91  is different from the third electricity application target BV 81 . 
     The provided communication target identifier HT 81  is configured to identify a second communication target  521  under a second specific application communication protocol PC 21  being different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , wherein the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is one selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The communication protocol identifier group GH 1  further includes a second communication protocol identifier HP 2  configured to identify the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, each of the first electricity application target BU 81  and the second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     The storage unit  720  further stores a second functional state code CS 91  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the second functional state code CS 91  represents a second functional state SD 91  which the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is configured to be in. The second functional state SD 91  is equal to one of a second selected state SH 91  and a second non-selected state SK 91 . The storage unit  720  has a first application memory location YL 81  identified based on a first application memory address AL 81 , and a second application memory location YL 91  identified based on a second application memory address AL 91 . For example, the first application memory address AL 81  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The second application memory address AL 91  is determined according to the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  receives a first user input operation PU 81 , using the first electricity application target BU 81 , to provide a first operation request message QN 81  to the processing unit  710 . The input unit  740  further receives a second user input operation PU 91  being after the first user input operation PU 81 , and provides a second operation request message QN 91  to the processing unit  710  in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . 
     The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  100  to enter a data preparation phase UP 1  to cause the storage unit  720  to prepare the electronic data DE 61  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . The second electricity application target BU 91  is further associated with the prepared electronic data DE 61  and the stored communication target identifier HT 81 . The processing unit  710  reads the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1 , and, based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , reads the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , which belong to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  further receives a third user input operation PT 81  using the third electricity application target BV 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide a third operation request message QC 81  to the processing unit  710 . The processing unit  710  performs a first data encoding operation EA 81  to determine the first functional state code CS 81  in response to the third operation request message QC 81 . For example, the first data encoding operation EA 81  is one of a first practical encoding operation EC 81  and a second practical encoding operation ED 81 . The first practical encoding operation EC 81  is used to select the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The second practical encoding operation ED 81  is used to stop selecting the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The processing unit  710  uses the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to fetch the first application memory address AL 81  in response to determining the first functional state code CS 81 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the determined first functional state code CS 81  to the first application memory location YL 81  based on the fetched first application memory address AL 81 . 
     The input unit  740  further receives a fourth user input operation PT 91  using the fourth electricity application target BV 91  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide a fourth operation request message QC 91  to the processing unit  710 . The processing unit  710  performs a second data encoding operation EA 91  to determine the second functional state code CS 91  in response to the fourth operation request message QC 91 . For example, the second data encoding operation EA 91  is one of a third practical encoding operation EC 91  and a fourth practical encoding operation ED 91 . The third practical encoding operation EC 91  is used to select the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The fourth practical encoding operation ED 91  is used to stop selecting the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The processing unit  710  uses the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to fetch the second application memory address AL 91  in response to determining the second functional state code CS 91 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the determined second functional state code CS 91  to the second application memory location YL 91  based on the fetched second application memory address AL 91 . 
     The input unit  740  receives a fifth user input operation PV 81  being before the second user input operation PU 91  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide input data DB 21  to the processing unit  710 . The processing unit  710 , in response to obtaining the input data DB 21 , causes the storage unit  720  to store the electronic data DE 61  determined according to the obtained input data DB 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  leaves the data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , and accesses the stored electronic data DE 61  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The processing unit  710  accesses the stored communication target identifier HT 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1  to cause the storage unit  720  to provide the stored communication target identifier HT 81  to the processing unit  710 , and accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1  to cause the storage unit  720  to provide the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to the processing unit  710 . 
     The processing unit  710  accesses the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , which belong to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The processing unit  710  obtains the first application memory address AL 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses the first functional state code CS 81  stored at the first application memory location YL 81  based on the obtained first application memory address AL 81  to cause the storage unit  720  to provide the stored first functional state code CS 81  to the processing unit  710 . 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the provided first functional state code CS 81  as the first valid state code CT 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the provided communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     The processing unit  710  obtains the second application memory address AL 91  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and accesses the second functional state code CS 91  stored at the second application memory location YL 91  based on the obtained second application memory address AL 91 . Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the accessed second functional state code CS 91  as the second valid state code CT 91  representing the second selected state SH 91  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the provided communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     After the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521 , the input unit  740  receives a sixth user input operation PT 92 , using the fourth electricity application target BV 91 , to provide a fifth operation request message QC 92  to the processing unit  710 . The processing unit  710 , in response to the fifth operation request message QC 92 , replaces the second functional state code CS 91  stored by the storage unit  720  with a third functional state code CS 92  representing the second non-selected state SK 91  to stop selecting the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from a group consisting of an email communication protocol, an instant-messaging communication protocol, a short-message service communication protocol and a multimedia-message service communication protocol. The first communication target identifier HT 11  is the same as or different from the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The first communication target  511  is the same as or different from the second communication target  521 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  1   ,  FIG.  2    and  FIG.  3   . A method for sending electronic data DE 61  is disclosed. The method includes the following steps: A first functional state code CS 81  and a communication target identifier HT 81  configured to identify a first communication target  511  under a first specific application communication protocol PC 11  are provided, wherein the first functional state code CS 81  represents a first functional state SD 81  which the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is configured to be in, and the first functional state SD 81  is equal to one of a first selected state SH 81  and a first non-selected state SK 81 . In addition, under a condition that the first functional state code CS 81  is recognized as a first valid state code CT 81  representing the first selected state SH 81  in a data transmission phase UT 1 , the electronic data DE 61  is sent toward the first communication target  511  based on the communication target identifier HT 81  and the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: The first functional state code CS 81  is stored. An electricity application target BV 81  is provided. After the electronic data DE 61  is sent toward the first communication target  511  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , an operation request message QC 82  is received by means of the electricity application target BV 81 . In addition, in response to the operation request message QC 82 , the stored first functional state code CS 81  is replaced with a second functional state code CS 82  representing the first non-selected state SK 81  to stop selecting the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: The communication target identifier HT 81 , a communication protocol identifier group GH 1  and a protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  configured to identify the communication protocol identifier group GH 1  are stored, wherein the communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include a first communication protocol identifier HP 1  configured to identify the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is one selected from a plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The first functional state code CS 81  associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  is stored. The stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  is accessed in the data transmission phase UT 1 . In addition, the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is accessed based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     The step of providing the first functional state code CS 81  includes a sub-step that: the stored first functional state code CS 81  is accessed based on the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to provide the stored first functional state code CS 81 . The step of sending the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  based on the communication target identifier HT 81  and the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  includes a sub-step that: under a condition that the provided functional state code CS 81  is recognized as the first valid state code CT 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is used to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the provided communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     In some embodiments, the provided communication target identifier HT 81  is configured to identify a second communication target  521  under a second specific application communication protocol PC 21  being different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is one selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The communication protocol identifier group GH 1  further includes a second communication protocol identifier HP 2  configured to identify the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     The method further includes a step that: a first electricity application target BU 81 , a second electricity application target BU 91 , a third electricity application target BV 81  and a fourth electricity application target BV 91  are provided. For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is the same as or different from the first electricity application target BU 81 . The fourth electricity application target BV 91  is different from the third electricity application target BV 81 . Each of the first electricity application target BU 81  and the second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     The method further includes a step that: a second functional state code CS 91  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is stored. For example, the second functional state code CS 91  represents a second functional state SD 91  which the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is configured to be in. The second functional state SD 91  is equal to one of a second selected state SH 91  and a second non-selected state SK 91 . 
     The method further includes a step that: a first application memory location YL 81  identified based on a first application memory address AL 81 , and a second application memory location YL 91  identified based on a second application memory address AL 91  are provided. For example, the first application memory address AL 81  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The second application memory address AL 91  is determined according to the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: A first user input operation PU 81  using the first electricity application target BU 81  is received to provide a first operation request message QN 81 . A second user input operation PU 91  being after the first user input operation PU 81  is received. A second operation request message QN 91  is provided in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . In addition, a data preparation phase UP 1  is entered in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: the electronic data DE 61  is prepared in the data preparation phase UP 1 , wherein the second electricity application target BU 91  is further associated with the prepared electronic data DE 61  and the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  is read in the data preparation phase UP 1 . In addition, based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , which belong to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , are read. 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: A third user input operation PT 81  using the third electricity application target BV 81  is received in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide a third operation request message QC 81 . In addition, a first data encoding operation EA 81  is performed to determine the first functional state code CS 81  in response to the third operation request message QC 81 . For example, the first data encoding operation EA 81  is one of a first practical encoding operation EC 81  and a second practical encoding operation ED 81 . The first practical encoding operation EC 81  is used to select the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The second practical encoding operation ED 81  is used to stop selecting the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: A fourth user input operation PT 91  using the fourth electricity application target BV 91  is received in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide a fourth operation request message QC 91 . In addition, a second data encoding operation EA 91  is performed to determine the second functional state code CS 91  in response to the fourth operation request message QC 91 . For example, the second data encoding operation EA 91  is one of a third practical encoding operation EC 91  and a fourth practical encoding operation ED 91 . The third practical encoding operation EC 91  is used to select the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The fourth practical encoding operation ED 91  is used to stop selecting the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     The step of storing the first functional state code CS 81  includes the following sub-steps: The read first communication protocol identifier HP 1  is used to fetch the first application memory address AL 81  in response to determining the first functional state code CS 81 . In addition, the determined first functional state code CS 81  is stored to the first application memory location YL 81  based on the fetched first application memory address AL 81 . The step of storing the second functional state code CS 91  includes the following sub-steps: The read second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is used to fetch the second application memory address AL 91  in response to determining the second functional state code CS 91 . In addition, the determined second functional state code CS 91  is stored to the second application memory location YL 91  based on the fetched second application memory address AL 91 . 
     The step of preparing the electronic data DE 61  includes the following sub-steps: A fifth user input operation PV 81  being before the second user input operation PU 91  is received in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide input data DB 21 . In addition, in response to obtaining the input data DB 21 , the electronic data DE 61  determined according to the obtained input data DB 21  is stored. 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: The data preparation phase UP 1  is left to enter the data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . In addition, the stored electronic data DE 61  is accessed in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The step of providing the communication target identifier HT 81  includes a sub-step that: the stored communication target identifier HT 81  is accessed in the data transmission phase UT 1  to provide the stored communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     The step of accessing the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  includes a sub-step that: the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , which belong to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , are accessed in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The sub-step of accessing the stored first functional state code CS 81  based on the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1  includes the following sub-steps: The first application memory address AL 81  is obtained in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . In addition, the first functional state code CS 81  stored at the first application memory location YL 81  is accessed based on the obtained first application memory address AL 81  to provide the stored first functional state code CS 81 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The second application memory address AL 91  is obtained in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The second functional state code CS 91  stored at the second application memory location YL 91  is accessed based on the obtained second application memory address AL 91 . In addition, under a condition that the accessed second functional state code CS 91  is recognized as the second valid state code CT 91  representing the second selected state SH 91  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is used to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the provided communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: After the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is used to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521 , a sixth user input operation PT 92  using the fourth electricity application target BV 91  is received to provide a fifth operation request message QC 92 . In addition, in response to the fifth operation request message QC 92 , the stored second functional state code CS 91  is replaced with a third functional state code CS 92  representing the second non-selected state SK 91  to stop selecting the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     Under a condition that the provided first functional state code CS 81  is recognized as the first valid state code CT 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the provided communication target identifier HT 81  are used to use the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from a group consisting of an email communication protocol, an instant-messaging communication protocol, a short-message service communication protocol and a multimedia-message service communication protocol. The first communication target identifier HT 11  is the same as or different from the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The first communication target  511  is the same as or different from the second communication target  521 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  1   ,  FIG.  2    and  FIG.  3   . A method for sending electronic data DE 61  is disclosed. The method includes the following steps: The storage unit  720  provides a communication target identifier HT 81 , wherein the communication target identifier HT 81  is configured to identify a first communication target  511  under a first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is configured to identify a second communication target  521  under a second specific application communication protocol PC 21  being different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The processing unit  710  sends the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in a data transmission phase UT 1  based on the communication target identifier HT 81  and the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . In addition, the processing unit  710  sends the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the communication target identifier HT 81  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  provides an electricity-using target BV 71 . In addition, the storage unit  720  provides a first functional state code CS 71 . For example, the first functional state code CS 71  represents a functional state SD 71  which a practical application communication protocol PC 01  is configured to be in. The practical application communication protocol PC 01  is one of the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The functional state SD 71  is equal to one of a selected state SH 71  and a non-selected state SK 71 . 
     One of the step of sending the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  based on the communication target identifier HT 81  and the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and the step of sending the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  based on the communication target identifier HT 81  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  includes a sub-step that: under a condition that the first functional state code CS 71  is recognized by the processing unit  710  as a valid state code CT 71  representing the selected state SH 71  in a data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  sends the electronic data DE 61  toward a practical target  501  based on the communication target identifier HT 81  and the practical application communication protocol PC 01 . The practical target  501  is one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: After the practical application communication protocol PC 01  is used by the processing unit  710  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the practical communication target  501 , the processing unit  710  receives an operation request message QC 72  by means of the electricity-using target BV 71 . In addition, the processing unit  710 , in response to the operation request message QC 72 , replaces the first functional state code CS 71  with a second functional state code CS 72  representing the non-selected state SK 71  to stop selecting the practical application communication protocol PC 01 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The storage unit  720  stores the communication target identifier HT 81 , a communication protocol identifier group GH 1  and a protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  configured to identify the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . For example, the communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include a first communication protocol identifier HP 1  configured to identify the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and a second communication protocol identifier HP 2  configured to identify the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . Each of the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is one selected from a plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The processing unit  710  accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . In addition, the processing unit  710  accesses the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , which belong to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     The step of sending the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  includes a sub-step that: the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the provided communication target identifier HT 81 . The step of sending the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  includes a sub-step that: the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the provided communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     In some embodiments, one of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  provides a first electricity application target BU 81 . One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  provides a second electricity application target BU 91 . One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  provides a third electricity application target BV 81 . One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  provides a fourth electricity application target BV 91 . For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is the same as or different from the first electricity application target BU 81 . The fourth electricity application target BV 91  is different from the third electricity application target BV 81 . Each of the first electricity application target BU 81  and the second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The storage unit  720  stores the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , wherein each of the first electricity application target BU 81  and the second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . In addition, the storage unit  720  stores a first functional state code CS 81  associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . For example, the first functional state code CS 81  represents a first functional state SD 81  which the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is configured to be in. The first functional state SD 81  is equal to one of a first selected state SH 81  and a first non-selected state SK 81 . 
     The method further includes a step that: the storage unit  720  stores a second functional state code CS 91  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the second functional state code CS 91  represents a second functional state SD 91  which the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is configured to be in. The second functional state SD 91  is equal to one of a second selected state SH 91  and a second non-selected state SK 91 . 
     The method further includes a step that: the storage unit  720  provides a first application memory location YL 81  identified based on a first application memory address AL 81 , and a second application memory location YL 91  identified based on a second application memory address AL 91 . For example, the first application memory address AL 81  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The second application memory address AL 91  is determined according to the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: the input unit  740  receives a first user input operation PU 81 , using the first electricity application target BU 81 , to provide a first operation request message QN 81 . The input unit  740  receives a second user input operation PU 91  being after the first user input operation PU 81 . In addition, the input unit  740  provides a second operation request message QN 91  at a provision time TB 11  in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . For example, the data transmission phase UT 1  is determined according to the provision time TB 11 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The processing unit  710  causes the method to enter a data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . The processing unit  710  causes the storage unit  720  to prepare the electronic data DE 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1 , wherein the second electricity application target BU 91  is further associated with the prepared electronic data DE 61  and the stored communication target identifier HT 81 . The processing unit  710  reads the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . In addition, the processing unit  710 , based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , reads the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , which belong to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The input unit  740  receives a third user input operation PT 81  using the third electricity application target BV 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide a third operation request message QC 81 . In addition, the processing unit  710  performs a first data encoding operation EA 81  to determine the first functional state code CS 81  in response to the third operation request message QC 81 . For example, the first data encoding operation EA 81  is one of a first practical encoding operation EC 81  and a second practical encoding operation ED 81 . The first practical encoding operation EC 81  is used to select the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The second practical encoding operation ED 81  is used to stop selecting the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The input unit  740  receives a fourth user input operation PT 91  using the fourth electricity application target BV 91  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide a fourth operation request message QC 91 . In addition, the processing unit  710  performs a second data encoding operation EA 91  to determine the second functional state code CS 91  in response to the fourth operation request message QC 91 . For example, the second data encoding operation EA 91  is one of a third practical encoding operation EC 91  and a fourth practical encoding operation ED 91 . The third practical encoding operation EC 91  is used to select the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The fourth practical encoding operation ED 91  is used to stop selecting the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the step of storing the first functional state code CS 81  includes the following sub-steps: The processing unit  710  uses the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to fetch the first application memory address AL 81  in response to determining the first functional state code CS 81 . In addition, the processing unit  710  causes the storage unit  720  to store the determined first functional state code CS 81  to the first application memory location YL 81  based on the fetched first application memory address AL 81 . The step of storing the second functional state code CS 91  includes the following sub-steps: The processing unit  710  uses the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to fetch the second application memory address AL 91  in response to determining the second functional state code CS 91 . In addition, the processing unit  710  causes the storage unit  720  to store the determined second functional state code CS 91  to the second application memory location YL 91  based on the fetched second application memory address AL 91 . 
     The step of preparing the electronic data DE 61  includes the following sub-steps: The input unit  740  receives a fifth user input operation PV 81  being before the second user input operation PU 91  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide input data DB 21 . In addition, the processing unit  710 , in response to obtaining the input data DB 21 , causes the storage unit  720  to store the electronic data DE 61  determined according to the obtained input data DB 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: The processing unit  710  causes the method to leave the data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . In addition, the processing unit  710  accesses the stored electronic data DE 61  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The step of providing the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  includes a sub-step that: the processing unit  710  accesses the stored communication target identifier HT 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1  to cause the storage unit  720  to provide the stored communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     The step of accessing the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  includes a sub-step that: the processing unit  710  accesses the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , which belong to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: The processing unit  710  obtains the first application memory address AL 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The processing unit  710  accesses the first functional state code CS 81  stored at the first application memory location YL 81  based on the obtained first application memory address AL 81 . The processing unit  710  obtains the second application memory address AL 91  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . In addition, the processing unit  710  accesses the second functional state code CS 91  stored at the second application memory location YL 91  based on the obtained second application memory address AL 91 . 
     The sub-step of using the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  includes a sub-step that: under a condition that the accessed first functional state code CS 81  is recognized by the processing unit  710  as the first valid state code CT 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the provided communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     The sub-step of using the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  includes a sub-step that: under a condition that the accessed second functional state code CS 91  is recognized by the processing unit  710  as the second valid state code CT 91  representing the second selected state SH 91  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the provided communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from a group consisting of an email communication protocol, an instant-messaging communication protocol, a short-message service communication protocol and a multimedia-message service communication protocol. The first communication target identifier HT 11  is the same as or different from the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The first communication target  511  is the same as or different from the second communication target  521 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  4   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8713  of the communication system  871  shown in  FIG.  1   . As shown in  FIG.  4   , the implementation structure  8713  includes the electronic device  100 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  100  is to communicate with at least one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 , and includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  710 , the input unit  740  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and the display unit  730  coupled to the processing unit  710 . Each of the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  is controlled by the processing unit  710 . The storage unit  720  has a nonvolatile memory space SN 51  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and a volatile memory space SV 51  coupled to the processing unit  710 . 
     In some embodiments, each of the first electricity application target BU 81  and the second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  by using the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The storage unit  720  further stores a target identifier set identifier HG 81  and a communication target identifier set WM 81  identified by the target identifier set identifier HG 81 , and further has an application memory location YE 81  associated with the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the target identifier set identifier HG 81  is stored at the application memory location YE 81  based on an application memory address AE 81  determined according to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The storage unit  720  stores the communication target identifier set WM 81  in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  beforehand. 
     The storage unit  720  further stores a target identifier set identifier HG 91  and a communication target identifier set WM 91  identified by the target identifier set identifier HG 91 , and further has an application memory location YE 91  associated with the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the target identifier set identifier HG 91  is stored at the application memory location YE 91  based on an application memory address AE 91  determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The storage unit  720  stores the communication target identifier set WM 91  in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  beforehand. 
     The storage unit  720  further has an application memory location YU 81  identified based on an application memory address AU 81 . For example, the application memory location YU 81  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . For example, the storage unit  720  stores the communication target identifier HT 81  in the volatile memory space SV 51  beforehand. 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  further receives in the data preparation phase UP 1  a user input operation PP 81  being before the second user input operation PU 91 . The processing unit  710  performs a data acquisition operation EF 81  in response to the user input operation PP 81  to obtain the communication target identifier HT 81  to be stored. The data acquisition operation EF 81  is one of a data acquisition action EF 8 A and a data acquisition action EF 8 B. The processing unit  710  fetches the application memory address AU 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the communication target identifier HT 81  at the application memory location YU 81  based on the fetched application memory address AU 81 . 
     Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EF 81  is the data acquisition action EF 8 A: the input unit  740  provides input data DC 81  to the processing unit  710  in response to the user input operation PP 81 ; and the processing unit  710  obtains the communication target identifier HT 81  determined according to the input data DC 81  based on the input data DC 81 . Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EF 81  is the data acquisition action EF 8 B: the processing unit  710  reads the communication target identifier HT 81  from the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to obtain the communication target identifier HT 81  to be stored. 
     The processing unit  710  obtains the application memory address AU 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , and accesses the communication target identifier HT 81  stored at the application memory location YU 81  based on the obtained application memory address AU 81  to cause the storage unit  720  to provide the stored communication target identifier HT 81  to the processing unit  710 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  reads the communication target identifier HT 81  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the user input operation PP 81  to obtain the communication target identifier HT 81  to be stored, and causes the display unit  730  to perform a display operation EL 81  associated with the read communication target identifier HT 81  in response to reading the communication target identifier HT 81  to display communication target identification information MH 81  associated with the read communication target identifier HT 81 . For example, the processing unit  710  selects the read communication target identifier HT 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1 , fetches the application memory address AU 81  in response to selecting the read communication target identifier HT 81 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the selected communication target identifier HT 81  at the application memory location YU 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the fetched application memory address AU 81 . 
     The processing unit  710  uses the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the application memory address AE 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to reading the communication target identifier HT 81  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51 , and accesses the target identifier set identifier HG 81  stored at the application memory location YE 81  based on the obtained application memory address AE 81 . The processing unit  710 , based on the accessed target identifier set identifier HG 81  and the read communication target identifier HT 81 , makes a logical decision RA 81  on whether the communication target identifier HT 81  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  belongs to the communication target identifier set WM 81 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store a decision data code CA 81  representing the logical decision RA 81  in the volatile memory space SV 51  in response to making the logical decision RA 81 . For example, the processing unit  710  makes the logical decision RA 81  in response to selecting the read communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     The processing unit  710  uses the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the application memory address AE 91  in the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to reading the communication target identifier HT 81  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51 , and accesses the target identifier set identifier HG 91  stored at the application memory location YE 91  based on the obtained application memory address AE 91 . The processing unit  710 , based on the accessed target identifier set identifier HG 91  and the read communication target identifier HT 81 , makes a logical decision RA 91  on whether the communication target identifier HT 81  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  belongs to the communication target identifier set WM 91 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store a decision data code CA 91  representing the logical decision RA 91  in the volatile memory space SV 51  in response to making the logical decision RA 91 . For example, the processing unit  710  makes the logical decision RA 91  in response to selecting the read communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     In some embodiments, the communication target identifier HT 81  stored at the application memory location YU 81  is associated with the decision data code CA 81  stored in the volatile memory space SV 51  and the decision data code CA 91  stored in the volatile memory space SV 51 . 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the first functional state code CS 81  as the first valid state code CT 81  representing the first selected state SH 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  accesses the decision data code CA 81  stored in the volatile memory space SV 51 . Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the accessed decision data code CA 81  as a valid data code CR 81  representing a positive decision RT 81 , the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the provided communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the second functional state code CS 91  as the second valid state code CT 91  representing the second selected state SH 91  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  accesses the decision data code CA 91  stored in the volatile memory space SV 51 . Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the accessed decision data code CA 91  as a valid data code CR 91  representing a positive decision RT 91 , the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the provided communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  5   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8714  of the communication system  871  shown in  FIG.  1   . As shown in  FIG.  5   , the implementation structure  8714  includes the electronic device  100 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  100  is to communicate with at least one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 , and includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  710 , the input unit  740  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and the display unit  730  coupled to the processing unit  710 . Each of the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  is controlled by the processing unit  710 . The storage unit  720  has the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and the volatile memory space SV 51  coupled to the processing unit  710 . 
     The storage unit  720  stores the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the communication target identifier HT 81 , the first functional state code CS 81 , the second functional state code CS 91 , the target identifier set identifier HG 81 , the communication target identifier set WM 81  identified by the target identifier set identifier HG 81 , the target identifier set identifier HG 91 , and the communication target identifier set WM 91  identified by the target identifier set identifier HG 91 . The communication target identifier HT 81  is associated with at least one of the first electricity application target BU 81  and the second electricity application target BU 91 . 
     The first functional state code CS 81  is stored based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , or is associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The second functional state code CS 91  is stored based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , or is associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The target identifier set identifier HG 81  is stored based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , or is associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The target identifier set identifier HG 91  is stored based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , or is associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     The first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belong to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . For example, the communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is a communication protocol identifier array. The first communication protocol identifier HP 1  is configured to belong to the communication protocol identifier array based on a first ordinal position represented by a first ordinal number NP 1 . The second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is configured to belong to the communication protocol identifier array based on a second ordinal position represented by a second ordinal number NP 2 . The storage unit  720  has an application memory location YC 81  associated with the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and an application memory location YC 91  associated with the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     The first communication protocol identifier HP 1  is stored at the application memory location YC 81  based on an application memory address AC 81 . For example, the application memory address AC 81  is determined according to the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the first ordinal number NP 1 . The application memory location YC 81  is identified based on the application memory address AC 81 , or is identified by the application memory address AC 81 . The second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is stored at the application memory location YC 91  based on an application memory address AC 91 . For example, the application memory address AC 91  is determined according to the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the second ordinal number NP 2 . The application memory location YC 91  is identified based on the application memory address AC 91 , or is identified by the application memory address AC 91 . 
     For example, the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  is a first numeric identifier. The first functional state code CS 81  is stored at the first application memory location YL 81  based on the first application memory address AL 81 . The first application memory address AL 81  is determined based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 ; therefore, the first functional state code CS 81  is stored based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . For example, the first application memory location YL 81  is identified based on the first application memory address AL 81 , or is identified by the first application memory address AL 81 . 
     For example, the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is a second numeric identifier, and is different from the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The second functional state code CS 91  is stored at the second application memory location YL 91  based on the second application memory address AL 91 . The second application memory address AL 91  is determined based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 ; therefore, the second functional state code CS 91  is stored based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the second application memory location YL 91  is identified based on the second application memory address AL 91 , or is identified by the second application memory address AL 91 . 
     For example, the target identifier set identifier HG 81  is stored at the application memory location YE 81  based on the application memory address AE 81 . The application memory address AE 81  is determined based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 ; therefore, the target identifier set identifier HG 81  is stored based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . For example, the application memory location YE 81  is identified based on the application memory address AE 81 , or is identified by the application memory address AE 81 . 
     For example, the target identifier set identifier HG 91  is stored at the application memory location YE 91  based on the application memory address AE 91 . The application memory address AE 91  is determined based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 ; therefore, the target identifier set identifier HG 91  is stored based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the application memory location YE 91  is identified based on the application memory address AE 91 , or is identified by the application memory address AE 91 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  receives the first user input operation PU 81  that is occurred earlier than the second user input operation PU 91 , and provides the first operation request message QN 81  to the processing unit  710  in response to the first user input operation PU 81  using the first electricity application target BU 81 . The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  100  to enter the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . In the data preparation phase UP 1 , the input unit  740  receives one selected from a group consisting of the third user input operation PT 81 , the user input operation PP 81 , the fourth user input operation PU 91 , the fifth user input operation PV 81 , and any combination thereof. For example, the processing unit  710  reads at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  in response to the first operation request message QN 81  to store at least one of the first functional state code CS 81  and the second functional state code CS 91 . 
     The input unit  740  receives the second user input operation PU 91  at an end time of the data preparation phase UP 1 , and provides the second operation request message QN 91  to the processing unit  710  in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  100  to leave the data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     The processing unit  710  accesses first application data stored by the storage unit  720  in the data transmission phase UT 1  to provide the first application data to the processing unit  710 . For example, the first application data includes at least one selected from a group consisting of the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the communication target identifier HT 81 , the first functional state code CS 81  and the second functional state code CS 91 . The processing unit  710  uses at least one of the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  based on the accessed first application data to send the electronic data DE 61  toward at least one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . 
     For example, the processing unit  710  accesses the electronic data DE 61 , the communication target identifier HT 81 , the first functional state code CS 81  and the second functional state code CS 91 , which are stored by the storage unit  720 , in response to the second operation request message QN 91  to cause the storage unit  720  to provide the stored electronic data DE 61 , the stored communication target identifier HT 81 , the stored first functional state code CS 81  and the stored second functional state code CS 91  to the processing unit  710 . 
     For example, the processing unit  710  accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored electronic data DE 61  and the stored communication target identifier HT 81  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , accesses the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , accesses the stored first functional state code CS 81  based on the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses the stored second functional state code CS 91  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  receives the third user input operation PT 81  using the third electricity application target BV 81  to provide the third operation request message QC 81  to the processing unit  710 . The processing unit  710  performs the first data encoding operation EA 81  to determine the first functional state code CS 81  in response to the third operation request message QC 81 , and uses the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to cause the storage unit  720  to store the determined first functional state code CS 81  to the first application memory location YL 81  in response to determining the first functional state code CS 81 . For example, the first data encoding operation EA 81  is one of the first practical encoding operation EC 81  and the second practical encoding operation ED 81 . The first practical encoding operation EC 81  is used to select the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The second practical encoding operation ED 81  is used to stop selecting the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     The input unit  740  receives the user input operation PP 81  to provide an operation request message QP 81  to the processing unit  710 . The processing unit  710  performs the data acquisition operation EF 81  in response to the operation request message QP 81  to obtain the communication target identifier HT 81  to be stored, and causes the storage unit  720  to store the obtained communication target identifier HT 81  in the volatile memory space SV 51  in response to obtaining the to-be-stored communication target identifier HT 81 . For example, the data acquisition operation EF 81  reads the communication target identifier HT 81  from the nonvolatile memory space SN 51 . The processing unit  710  is configured to select the read communication target identifier HT 81 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the selected communication target identifier HT 81  at the application memory location YU 81  in response to selecting the read communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     The input unit  740  receives the fourth user input operation PT 91  using the fourth electricity application target BV 91  to provide the fourth operation request message QC 91  to the processing unit  710 . The processing unit  710  performs the second data encoding operation EA 91  to determine the second functional state code CS 91  in response to the fourth operation request message QC 91 , and uses the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to cause the storage unit  720  to store the determined second functional state code CS 91  to the second application memory location YL 91  in response to determining the second functional state code CS 91 . For example, the second data encoding operation EA 91  is one of the third practical encoding operation EC 91  and the forth practical encoding operation ED 91 . The third practical encoding operation EC 91  is used to select the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The fourth practical encoding operation ED 91  is used to stop selecting the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  is one of a third numeric identifier and an alphanumeric identifier. The third electricity application target BV 81  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The processing unit  710  reads or accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in response to the third operation request message QC 81 , and reads the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the first ordinal number NP 1 . The fourth electricity application target BV 91  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The processing unit  710  reads or accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in response to the fourth operation request message QC 91 , and reads the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belonging to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the second ordinal number NP 2 . 
     The input unit  740  receives the fifth user input operation PV 81  to provide the input data DB 21  to the processing unit  710 . The processing unit  710 , in response to obtaining the input data DB 21 , causes the storage unit  720  to store the electronic data DE 61  determined according to the obtained input data DB 21 , and accesses the stored electronic data DE 61  to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     After the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521 , the input unit  740  can receive the sixth user input operation PT 92 , using the fourth electricity application target BV 91 , to provide the fifth operation request message QC 92  to the processing unit  710 . The processing unit  710 , in response to the fifth operation request message QC 92 , replaces the second functional state code CS 91  stored by the storage unit  720  with the third functional state code CS 92  representing the second non-selected state SK 91  to stop selecting the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the processing unit  710  performs a data encoding operation EA 92  to determine the third functional state code CS 92  based on the second functional state code CS 91 . 
     After the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511 , the input unit  740  can receive a user input operation PT 82 , using the third electricity application target BV 81 , to provide the operation request message QC 82  to the processing unit  710 . The processing unit  710 , in response to the operation request message QC 82 , replaces the first functional state code CS 81  stored by the storage unit  720  with the second functional state code CS 82  representing the second non-selected state SK 81  to stop selecting the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the processing unit  710  performs a data encoding operation EA 82  to determine the second functional state code CS 82  based on the first functional state code CS 81 . 
     Please additionally refer to  FIG.  2    and  FIG.  3   . In some embodiments, one of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  provides the electricity-using target BV 71 . The storage unit  720  stores the first functional state code CS 71 . The processing unit  710  causes the storage unit  720  to provide the first functional state code CS 71  to the processing unit  710 . For example, the first functional state code CS 71  represents the functional state SD 71  which the practical application communication protocol PC 01  is configured to be in. The practical application communication protocol PC 01  is one of the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The functional state SD 71  is equal to one of the selected state SH 71  and the non-selected state SK 71 . 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the provided first functional state code CS 71  as the valid state code CT 71  representing the selected state SH 71 , the processing unit  710  sends the electronic data DE 61  toward the practical target  501  based on the provided communication target identifier HT 81  and the practical application communication protocol PC 01 . The practical target  501  is one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . 
     After the processing unit  710  uses the practical application communication protocol PC 01  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the practical communication target  501 , the processing unit  710  receives the operation request message QC 72  by means of the electricity-using target BV 71 . The processing unit  710 , in response to the operation request message QC 72 , replaces the first functional state code CS 71  with the second functional state code CS 72  representing the non-selected state SK 71  to stop selecting the practical application communication protocol PC 01 . For example, the processing unit  710  performs a data encoding operation EA 72  to determine the second functional state code CS 72  based on the provided first functional state code CS 71 . 
     In some embodiments, the first functional state code CS 71  is one of the first functional state code CS 81  and the second functional state code CS 91 , which are stored in the storage unit  720 . Under a condition that the first functional state code CS 71  is the first functional state code CS 81 , the electricity-using target BV 71 , the practical application communication protocol PC 01 , the functional state SD 71 , the selected state SH 71 , the non-selected state SK 71 , the valid state code CT 71 , the practical communication target  501 , the operation request message QC 72 , the second functional state code CS 72  and the data encoding operation EA 72  are the third electricity application target BV 81 , the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , the first functional state SD 81 , the first selected state SH 81 , the first non-selected state SK 81 , the first valid state code CT 81 , the first communication target  511 , the operation request message QC 82 , the second functional state code CS 82  and the data encoding operation EA 82 , respectively. 
     Under a condition that the first functional state code CS 71  is the second functional state code CS 91 , the electricity-using target BV 71 , the practical application communication protocol PC 01 , the functional state SD 71 , the selected state SH 71 , the non-selected state SK 71 , the valid state code CT 71 , the practical communication target  501 , the operation request message QC 72 , the second functional state code CS 72  and the data encoding operation EA 72  are the fourth electricity application target BV 91 , the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , the second functional state SD 91 , the second selected state SH 91 , the second non-selected state SK 91 , the second valid state code CT 91 , the second communication target  521 , the fifth operation request message QC 92 , the third functional state code CS 92  and the data encoding operation EA 92 , respectively. 
     For example, the first electricity application target BU 81  is one of a first display target and a first sensing target. The second electricity application target BU 91  is one of a second display target and a second sensing target. The third electricity application target BV 81  is one of a third display target and a third sensing target. The fourth electricity application target BV 91  is one of a fourth display target and a fourth sensing target. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  6   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8715  of the communication system  871  shown in  FIG.  1   . As shown in  FIG.  6   , the implementation structure  8715  includes the electronic device  100 , a message service system  650 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  100  includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  710 , the input unit  740  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and the display unit  730  coupled to the processing unit  710 . The message service system  650  includes a first message service device  660  and a second message service device  670 . The processing unit  710  is coupled to the first message service device  660  and the second message service device  670 . The first message service device  660  supports the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The second message service device  670  supports the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and is the same or different from the first message service device  660 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  accesses or reads the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the communication target identifier HT 81 , which are stored in the storage unit  720 , in response to the second operation request message QN 91  to obtain the stored electronic data DE 61 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored communication target identifier HT 81 , and uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to transmit an electronic message QE 31  toward the first message service device  660  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained electronic data DE 61 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the obtained communication target identifier HT 81 . The electronic message QE 31  includes the electronic data DE 61 . 
     For example, the electronic message QE 31  is or serves as an instruction message used to instruct the first message service device  660 . The first message service device  660  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to transmit an electronic message QE 41  toward the first communication target  511  in response to the electronic message QE 31 , so that the first communication target  511  receives the electronic message QE 41  in a specific application communication protocol PC 51  being matched with or equal to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The electronic message QE 41  includes the electronic data DE 61 . 
     The processing unit  710  accesses or reads the electronic data DE 61 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the communication target identifier HT 81 , which are stored in the storage unit  720 , in response to the second operation request message QN 91  to obtain the stored electronic data DE 61 , the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the stored communication target identifier HT 81 , and uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to transmit an electronic message QE 91  toward the second message service device  670  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained electronic data DE 61 , the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the obtained communication target identifier HT 81 . The electronic message QE 91  includes the electronic data DE 61 . 
     For example, the electronic message QE 91  is or serves as an instruction message used to instruct the second message service device  670 . The second message service device  670  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to transmit an electronic message QEA 1  toward the second communication target  521  in response to the electronic message QE 91 , so that the second communication target  521  receives the electronic message QEA 1  in a specific application communication protocol PC 81  being matched with or equal to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The electronic message QEA 1  includes the electronic data DE 61 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  720  further stores a user account NB 91  associated with the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the stored communication target identifier HT 81 . For example, the stored communication target identifier HT 81  and the user account NB 91  have a data chaining EE 91  therebetween. Under a condition that the stored communication target identifier HT 81  belongs to the second communication target identifier set WM 91 , the stored communication target identifier HT 81  is configured to correspond to the user account NB 91  configured to indicate the second communication target  521 . 
     In a specific situation associated with the user account NB 91 , under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the accessed decision data code CA 91  as the valid data code CR 91  representing the positive decision RT 91  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  accesses the user account NB 91 , used to send the electronic data DE 61 , based on the provided communication target identifier HT 81  and the data chaining EE 91 . The processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the accessed user account NB 91 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  accesses or reads the electronic data DE 61 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the user account NB 91 , which are stored in the storage unit  720 , in response to the second operation request message QN 91  to obtain the stored electronic data DE 61 , the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the stored user account NB 91 , and uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to transmit an electronic message QE 91  toward the second message service device  670  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained electronic data DE 61 , the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the obtained user account NB 91 . The electronic message QE 91  includes the electronic data DE 61 . 
     For example, the data transmission phase UT 1  immediately follows the provision time TB 11 , and has a time length. For example, the time length is equal to one selected from a group consisting of 10 minutes, 5 minutes, 3 minutes, 2 minutes, 1 minute, 50 seconds, 40 seconds, 30 seconds, 20 seconds, 10 seconds, 5 seconds, 3 seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second and 0.5 second. In some embodiments, when the processing unit  710  is configured to cause the data transmission phase UT 1  to end, the processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  100  to enter a data preparation phase UP 2  being after the data transmission phase UT 1 . For example, the processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  100  to enter the data preparation phase UP 2  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  100  is used by a user  910 . The input unit  740  receives from the user  910  at least one selected from a plurality of user input operations. The plurality of user input operations include the first user input operation PU 81 , the second user input operation PU 91 , the third user input operation PT 81 , the user input operation PP 81 , the fourth user input operation PT 91 , the fifth user input operation PV 81 , the sixth user input operation PT 92  and the user input operation PT 82 . In some embodiments, the electronic device  100  is used by a plurality of users including the user  910 . The input unit  740  is operated by the plurality of users to receive the plurality of user input operations. For example, the plurality of users are different. 
     In some embodiments, each of the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from a group consisting of the email communication protocol, the instant-messaging communication protocol, the short-message service communication protocol and the multimedia-message service communication protocol. For example, the first operation request message QN 81 , the second operation request message QN 91 , the third operation request message QC 81 , the operation request message QP 81 , the fourth operation request message QC 91 , the operation request message QC 81  and the fifth operation request message QC 92  are a plurality of user request messages, respectively. For example, the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . constitute an application communication protocol group GP 1 . The communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is configured to identify the application communication protocol group GP 1 . 
     For example, the processing unit  710  reads at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . For example, the processing unit  710  accesses at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  receives the electronic data DE 61  from an external device  505  in the data preparation phase UP 1 , and stores the received electronic data DE 61  into the storage unit  720  in response to receiving the electronic data DE 61 . For example, the external device  505  is coupled to the processing unit  710 . In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  accesses the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , and accesses the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  stored at the application memory location YC 81  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the first ordinal number NP 1 . The processing unit  710  accesses the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  stored at the application memory location YC 91  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the second ordinal number NP 2 . For example, the external device  505  is one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  7   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8716  of the communication system  871  shown in  FIG.  1   . As shown in  FIG.  7   , the implementation structure  8716  includes the electronic device  100 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  100  includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  710 , the input unit  740  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and the display unit  730  coupled to the processing unit  710 . Each of the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  is controlled by the processing unit  710 . One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes an electricity application target BW 81  coupled to the processing unit  710 . The electricity application target BW 81  is associated with the application memory location YU 81  disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  receives in the data preparation phase UP 1  the user input operation PP 81  using or selecting the electricity application target BW 81 , and provides the operation request message QP 81  to the processing unit  710  in response to the user input operation PP 81 . The processing unit  710  reads the communication target identifier HT 81  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  in response to the operation request message QP 81  to obtain the communication target identifier HT 81  to be stored, and causes the display unit  730  to perform a display operation EL 81  associated with the read communication target identifier HT 81  in response to reading the stored communication target identifier HT 81 . The display operation EL 81  is used to display communication target identification information MH 81  associated with the read communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     The processing unit  710  selects the read communication target identifier HT 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the operation request message QP 81 , fetches the application memory address AU 81  in response to selecting the read communication target identifier HT 81 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the selected communication target identifier HT 81  at the application memory location YU 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the fetched application memory address AU 81 . 
     The display unit  730  includes a display area KD 81  located at a display representative location UK 81 , a display area KD 82  located at a display representative location UK 82 , and a display area BD 81  located at a display representative location UB 81 . The display representative location UK 81 , the display representative location UK 82  and the display representative location UB 81  are different. The processing unit  710 , in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the obtained communication target identifier HT 81 , causes the display unit  730  to display on the display area KD 81  communication target identification information MH 81  representing the obtained communication target identifier HT 81 . The processing unit  710 , in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the accessed user account NB 91 , causes the display unit  730  to display on the display area KD 82  user account information MN 91  representing the user account NB 91 . In addition, the processing unit  710 , in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the input data DB 21  provided by the input unit  740 , causes the display unit  730  to display on the display area BD 81  the electronic data DE 61  derived from the provided input data DB 21 . 
     In some embodiments, before the input unit  740  receives the third user input operation PT 81 , the storage unit  720  stores a functional state code CS 83  stored based on the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The functional state code CS 83  is stored at the first application memory location YL 81 , and represents one of the first selected state SH 81  and the first non-selected state SK 81 . The processing unit  710  performs the first data encoding operation EA 81  to determine the first functional state code CS 81  being different from the functional state code CS 83  in response to the third user input operation PT 81 , and uses the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to cause the storage unit  720  to store the determined first functional state code CS 81  to the first application memory location YL 81  in response to determining the first functional state code CS 81 . In some embodiments, the input unit  740  receives the third user input operation PT 81  occurred earlier than the first user input operation PU 81  to cause the processing unit  710  to determine the first functional state code CS 81 . 
     For example, the first data encoding operation EA 81  is performed to determine the first functional state code CS 81  based on the functional state code CS 83 , and is one of the first practical encoding operation EC 81  and the second practical encoding operation ED 81 . The first practical encoding operation EC 81  is used to select the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The second practical encoding operation ED 81  is used to stop selecting the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the processing unit  710  reads the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in response to determining the first functional state code CS 81 , reads the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the first ordinal number NP 1 , fetches the first application memory address AL 81  based on the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and replaces the functional state code CS 83  stored at the first application memory location YL 81  with the determined first functional state code CS 81  based on the fetched first application memory address AL 81 . 
     In some embodiments, before the input unit  740  receives the fourth user input operation PT 91 , the storage unit  720  stores a functional state code CS 93  stored based on the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The functional state code CS 93  is stored at the second application memory location YL 91 , and represents one of the second selected state SH 91  and the second non-selected state SK 91 . The processing unit  710  performs the second data encoding operation EA 91  to determine the second functional state code CS 91  being different from the functional state code CS 93  in response to the fourth user input operation PT 91 , and uses the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to cause the storage unit  720  to store the determined second functional state code CS 91  to the second application memory location YL 91  in response to determining the second functional state code CS 91 . In some embodiments, the input unit  740  receives the fourth user input operation PT 91  occurred earlier than the first user input operation PU 81  to cause the processing unit  710  to determine the second functional state code CS 91 . 
     For example, the second data encoding operation EA 91  is performed to determine the second functional state code CS 91  based on the functional state code CS 93 , and is one of the third practical encoding operation EC 91  and the fourth practical encoding operation ED 91 . The third practical encoding operation EC 91  is used to select the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The fourth practical encoding operation ED 91  is used to stop selecting the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the processing unit  710  reads the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in response to determining the second functional state code CS 91 , reads the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the second ordinal number NP 2 , fetches the second application memory address AL 91  based on the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and replaces the functional state code CS 93  stored at the second application memory location YL 91  with the determined second functional state code CS 91  based on the fetched second application memory address AL 91 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  8   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8717  of the communication system  871  shown in  FIG.  1   . As shown in  FIG.  8   , the implementation structure  8717  includes the electronic device  100 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  100  includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  710 , the input unit  740  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and the display unit  730  coupled to the processing unit  710 . Each of the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  is controlled by the processing unit  710 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  100  includes the first electricity application target BU 81 , the second electricity application target BU 91 , the third electricity application target BV 81 , the fourth electricity application target BV 91  and the electricity application target BW 81 , each of which is coupled to the processing unit  710 . The first, the second, the third and the fourth electricity application targets BU 81 , BU 91 , BV 81  and BV 91  and the electricity application target BW 81  are respectively located at a spatial location EU 81 , a spatial location EU 91 , a spatial location EV 81 , a spatial location EV 91  and a spatial location EW 81 . 
     For example, the spatial locations EU 81 , EU 91 , EV 81 , EV 91  and EW 81  are different. For example, two selected from a group consisting of the spatial locations EU 81 , EU 91 , EV 81 , EV 91  and EW 81  are the same. The first, the second, the third and the fourth electricity application targets BU 81 , BU 91 , BV 81  and BV 91  and the electricity application target BW 81  respectively have a plurality of electricity application areas, or are respectively formed by the plurality of electricity application areas. 
     For example, the input unit  740  includes one selected from a group consisting of the first, the second, the third and the fourth electricity application targets BU 81 , BU 91 , BV 81  and BV 91 , the electricity application target BW 81 , and any combination thereof. For example, the first electricity application target BU 81  is a first sensing target, wherein the first sensing target includes one selected from a group consisting of a first sensing area, a first push button and a first touch point. The second electricity application target BU 91  is a second sensing target, wherein the second sensing target includes one selected from a group consisting of a second sensing area, a second push button and a second touch point. The third electricity application target BV 81  is a third sensing target, wherein the third sensing target includes one selected from a group consisting of a third sensing area, a third push button and a third touch point. The fourth electricity application target BV 91  is a fourth sensing target, wherein the fourth sensing target includes one selected from a group consisting of a fourth sensing area, a fourth push button and a fourth touch point. 
     The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  100  to enter the data preparation phase UP 1  by means of the first electricity application target BU 81 . The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  100  to leave the data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the data transmission phase UT 1  by means of the second electricity application target BU 91 . The processing unit  710  determines the first functional state code CS 81  by means of the third electricity application target BV 81 . The processing unit  710  determines the second functional state code CS 91  by means of the fourth electricity application target BV 91 . The processing unit  710  obtains the communication target identifier HT 81  to be stored to the volatile memory space SV 51  by means of the electricity application target BW 81 . 
     For example, the display unit  730  includes one selected from a group consisting of the first, the second, the third and the fourth electricity application targets BU 81 , BU 91 , BV 81  and BV 91 , the electricity application target BW 81 , and any combination thereof. For example, the processing unit  710  is configured to cause the display unit  730  to display the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91  at the same time or for different times. For example, the processing unit  710  is configured to cause the display unit  730  to display the third and the fourth electricity application targets BV 81  and BV 91  at the same time or for different times. 
     For example, the first electricity application target BU 81  is a first display target, wherein the first display target includes one selected from a group consisting of a first display area, a first icon and a first display action item. The second electricity application target BU 91  is a second display target, wherein the second display target includes one selected from a group consisting of a second display area, a second icon and a second display action item. The third electricity application target BV 81  is a third display target, wherein the third display target includes one selected from a group consisting of a third display area, a third icon and a third display action item. The fourth electricity application target BV 91  is a fourth display target, wherein the fourth display target includes one selected from a group consisting of a fourth display area, a fourth icon and a fourth display action item. 
     The first electricity application target BU 81  is associated with at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the stored communication target identifier HT 81 , the stored target identifier set identifier HG 81  and the stored target identifier set identifier HG 91 . The second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the stored electronic data DE 61  and the stored communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     The third electricity application target BV 81  is associated with at least one of the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the first application memory address AL 81 . The fourth electricity application target BV 91  is associated with at least one of the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the second application memory address AL 91 . The electricity application target BV 81  is associated with the stored communication target identifier HT 81 , and is used to select the stored communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  is configured to cause the display unit  730  to display a selection tool TK 11 . The first user input operation PU 81  uses or selects the first electricity application target BU 81  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  740  to provide the first operation request message QN 81  to the processing unit  710 . The second user input operation PU 91  uses or selects the second electricity application target BU 91  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  740  to provide the second operation request message QN 91  to the processing unit  710 . The third user input operation PT 81  uses or selects the third electricity application target BV 81  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  740  to provide the third operation request message QC 81  to the processing unit  710 . The fourth user input operation PT 91  uses or selects the fourth electricity application target BV 91  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  740  to provide the fourth operation request message QC 91  to the processing unit  710 . 
     The user input operation PP 81  uses or selects the electricity application target BW 81  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  740  to provide the operation request message QP 81  to the processing unit  710 . The sixth user input operation PT 92  uses or selects the fourth electricity application target BV 91  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  740  to provide the fifth operation request message QC 92  to the processing unit  710 . The user input operation PT 82  uses or selects the third electricity application target BV 81  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  740  to provide the operation request message QC 82  to the processing unit  710 . For example, the selection tool TK 11  is a cursor. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  9   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8718  of the communication system  871  shown in  FIG.  1   . As shown in  FIG.  9   , the implementation structure  8718  includes the electronic device  100 , the message service system  650 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  100  includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  710 , the input unit  740  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and the display unit  730  coupled to the processing unit  710 . The message service system  650  includes the first message service device  660  and the second message service device  670 . The processing unit  710  is coupled to the first message service device  660  and the second message service device  670 . The first message service device  660  supports the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The second message service device  670  supports the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and is the same or different from the first message service device  660 . 
     In some embodiments, the communication target identifier HT 81  is an email address; the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is the email communication protocol; and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is the instant-messaging communication protocol. The second message service device  670  supports the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, under a condition that the second communication target  521  is linked (or coupled) to the second message service device  670  by using the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  (or the instant-messaging communication protocol), the processing unit  710  uses the provided communication target identifier HT 81  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , so that the second communication target  521  instantly receives the electronic data DE 61  from the electronic device  100  through the second message service device  670 . 
     For example, the second communication target  521  has at least one of the communication target identifier HT 81  and the user account NB 91 , and is linked (or coupled) to one of the message service system  650  and the second message service device  670  based on the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  and at least one of the communication target identifier HT 81  and the user account NB 91 . 
     The first message service device  660  supports the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, under a condition that the second communication target  521  is linked (or coupled) to the second message service device  670  by using the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  (or the instant-messaging communication protocol), the processing unit  710  uses the provided communication target identifier HT 81  and the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  (or the email communication protocol) to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first message service device  660  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , so that the first communication target  511  receives the electronic data DE 61  from the electronic device  100  through the first message service device  660  after the data transmission phase UT 1 . 
     For example, the second communication target  521  is the same or different from the first communication target  511 . For example, the first communication target  511  has the communication target identifier HT 81 , and is linked (or coupled) to one of the message service system  650  and the first message service device  660  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  and the communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     In some embodiments, the second message service device  670  receives the electronic message QE 91  including the electronic data DE 61  from the electronic device  100 , obtains a uniform resource locator (abbreviated to URL) LK 91  used to temporarily store the electronic data DE 61  in response to receiving the electronic message QE 91 . The uniform resource locator LK 91  is configured to identify a web page FU 91 . The second message service device  670  causes the web page FU 91  to temporarily include the electronic data DE 61  based on the uniform resource locator LK 91 , transmits the uniform resource locator LK 91  to the second communication target  521 , and transmits the electronic message QEA 1  including the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  from the web page FU 91  under a condition that the second communication target  521  uses the uniform resource locator LK 91 . 
     In some embodiments, the message service system  650  includes the first message service device  660  and the second message service device  670 . The electronic device  100  is identified by a first source communication target identifier HS 11  under the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is identified by a second source communication target identifier HS 21  under the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the first source communication target identifier HS 11  is the same as or different from the second source communication target identifier HS 21 . The electronic device  100  has the first source communication target identifier HS 11  and the second source communication target identifier HS 21 , and is linked (or coupled) to one of the message service system  650  and the second message service device  670  based on the second source communication target identifier HS 21  under the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The electronic device  100  inquires of one of the message service system  650  and the second message service device  670  about an addressable location of the second communication target  521  under the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and thereby receives a response message associated with the addressable location from the message service system  650 . 
     The electronic device  100  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  and one of the provided communication target identifier HT 81  and the accessed user account NB 91  to directly send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the response message, and thereby sends the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  without going through the second message service device  670 . Therefore, the second communication target  521  instantly directly receives the electronic data DE 61  from the electronic device  100 . 
     In some embodiments, the communication target identifier HT 81  is a first telephone number; the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is the short-message service communication protocol; and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is the multimedia-message service communication protocol. For example, the communication target identifier HT 81  (or the first telephone number) is a first mobile telephone number, so that the first communication target  511  is a first mobile device. The first message service device  660  supports the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  (or the short-message service communication protocol). For example, under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the first functional state code CS 81  as the first valid state code CT 81  representing the first selected state SH 81  in response to the second operation request signal QN 91 , the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  (or the short-message service communication protocol) to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained communication target identifier HT 81  (or the first telephone number) and the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . 
     The second message service device  670  supports the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  (or the multimedia-message service communication protocol). For example, under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the second functional state code CS 91  as the second valid state code CT 91  representing the second selected state SH 91  in response to the second operation request signal QN 91 , the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  (or the multimedia-message service communication protocol) to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained communication target identifier HT 81  (or the first telephone number) and the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     In some embodiments, the communication target identifier HT 81  is a second telephone number; the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is the short-message service communication protocol; and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is the instant-messaging communication protocol. For example, the communication target identifier HT 81  (or the second telephone number) is a second mobile telephone number, and is configured to correspond to the user account NB 91 , so that the first communication target  511  is a second mobile device. The first message service device  660  supports the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  (or the short-message service communication protocol). For example, under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the first functional state code CS 81  as the first valid state code CT 81  representing the first selected state SH 81  in response to the second operation request signal QN 91 , the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  (or the short-message service communication protocol) to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained communication target identifier HT 81  (or the telephone number) and the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . 
     The second message service device  670  supports the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  (or the instant-messaging communication protocol). For example, under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the second functional state code CS 91  as the second valid state code CT 91  representing the second selected state SH 91  in response to the second operation request signal QN 91 , the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  (or the instant-messaging communication protocol) to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained user account NB 91  and the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  10   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8719  of the communication system  871  shown in  FIG.  1   . As shown in  FIG.  10   , the implementation structure  8719  includes the electronic device  100 , the first communication target  511 , the second communication target  521 , a communication target  512  and a communication target  522 . The electronic device  100  includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740  and the display unit  730 . The processing unit  710  includes a processor  712  and a communication interface unit  714  coupled to the processor  712 . The communication interface unit  714  is coupled or linked to the message service system  650 . Each of the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740 , the display unit  730  and the communication interface unit  714  is coupled to the processor  712 , and is controlled by the processor  712 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  720  has a storage block BS 81 , and stores the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , a user account group GN 1 , and a plurality of communication target identifiers HT 81 , HT 82 , HT 83 , . . . including the communication target identifier HT 81 . The communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is a communication protocol identifier array. Before the second user input operation PU 91 , the storage unit  720  is configured to store the electronic data DE 61  in the storage block BS 81 . The processing unit  710  obtains the electronic data DE 61  from the storage block BS 81  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . For example, the storage block BS 81  is located at an application memory location YG 81 . The application memory location YG 81  is identified based on an application memory address AG 81 , or is identified by the application memory address AG 81 ; therefore, the storage block BS 81  is identified based on the application memory address AG 81 , or is identified by the application memory address AG 81 . 
     For example, each of the storage block BS 81  and the application memory location YG 81  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The application memory address AG 81  is determined according to a selected protocol identifier being one of the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The processing unit  710  obtains the application memory address AG 81  based on the selected protocol identifier, causes the storage unit  720  to store the electronic data DE 61  at the application memory location YG 81  based on the obtained application memory address AG 81 , and causes the storage unit  720  to read or access the electronic data DE 61  stored at the application memory location YG 8  based on the obtained application memory address AG 81 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  720  stores the plurality of communication target identifiers HT 81 , HT 82 , HT 83 , . . . in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  beforehand. For example, the storage unit  720  stores the communication target identifier set WM 81 , the communication target identifier set WM 91  and a communication target identifier group GM 1  in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  beforehand. 
     In some embodiments, the communication target identifier HT 81  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  is configured to belong to the communication target identifier set WM 81 , is configured to belong to the communication target identifier set WM 91 , and is further configured to belong to the communication target identifier group GM 1 . The communication target identifier sets WM 81  and WM 91  are configured to respectively correspond to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The communication target identifier set WM 81  includes the communication target identifier HT 81  and a communication target identifier HT 82 . The communication target identifier set WM 91  includes the communication target identifier HT 81  and a communication target identifier HT 83 . The communication target identifier group GM 1  includes the communication target identifier HT 81 , the communication target identifier HT 82  and the communication target identifier HT 83 . The communication target identifier HT 82  is configured to identify the communication target  512  under the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The communication target identifier HT 83  is configured to identify the communication target  522  under the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     The user account group GN 1  is associated the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and includes the user account NB 91  and a user account NB 93 . Under a condition that each of the communication target identifiers HT 81  and HT 83  belongs to the communication target identifier set WM 91 , the stored communication target identifiers HT 81  and HT 83  are configured to respectively correspond to the user accounts NB 91  and NB 93 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  receives in the data preparation phase UP 1  a user input operation PY 81  occurred earlier than the second user input operation PU 91  to provide an operation request message QY 81  to the processing unit  710 . The processing unit  710  causes the communication target identifier HT 81  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  to join the communication target identifier group GM 1  in response to the operation request message QY 81 . For example, the processing unit  710  further causes at least one of the communication target identifiers HT 82  and HT 83  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  to join the communication target identifier group GM 1  in response to the operation request message QY 81 . 
     The processing unit  710  causes the communication target identifiers HT 81  and HT 82  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  to join the communication target identifier group WM 81  in response to the operation request message QY 81 . The processing unit  710  causes the communication target identifiers HT 81  and HT 83  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  to join the communication target identifier group WM 91  in response to the operation request message QY 81 . 
     For example, the input unit  740  receives the user input operation PP 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide the operation request message QP 81  to the processing unit  710 . The processing unit  710  performs the data acquisition operation EF 81  in response to the operation request message QP 81  to obtain the communication target identifier HT 81  to be stored, and causes the storage unit  720  to store the obtained communication target identifier HT 81  at the application memory location YU 81  in response to obtaining the communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     For example, the data acquisition operation EF 81  is used to select the communication target identifier HT 81  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51 . The processing unit  710 , in response to reading the communication target identifier HT 81 , causes the display unit  730  to perform the display operation EL 81  associated with the read communication target identifier HT 81  to display the communication target identification information MH 81  associated with the read communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     For example, the processing unit  710  performs the data acquisition operation EF 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to obtain communication target identification data HT 8 A to be stored, and causes the storage unit  720  to store the obtained communication target identification data HT 8 A in the volatile memory space SV 51  in response to obtaining the communication target identification data HT 8 A. For example, the communication target identification data HT 8 A includes the communication target identifiers HT 81 , HT 82  and HT 83 . For example, the processing unit  710  is configured to causes the storage unit  720  to store a communication target identifier set WV 81  in the volatile memory space SV 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The communication target identifier set WV 81  includes the communication target identification data HT 8 A. For example, the data acquisition operation EF 81  is used to select the communication target identification data HT 8 A stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51 . 
     The processing unit  710  uses the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the application memory address AE 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to reading the communication target identifier HT 81  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51 , and accesses the target identifier set identifier HG 81  stored at the application memory location YE 81  based on the obtained application memory address AE 81 . The processing unit  710 , based on the accessed target identifier set identifier HG 81  and the read communication target identifier HT 81 , makes the logical decision RA 81  on whether the communication target identifier HT 81  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  belongs to the communication target identifier set WM 81 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the decision data code CA 81  representing the logical decision RA 81  in the volatile memory space SV 51  in response to making the logical decision RA 81 . For example, the processing unit  710  makes the logical decision RA 81  in response to selecting the read communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     The processing unit  710  uses the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the application memory address AE 91  in the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to reading the communication target identifier HT 81  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51 , and accesses the target identifier set identifier HG 91  stored at the application memory location YE 91  based on the obtained application memory address AE 91 . The processing unit  710 , based on the accessed target identifier set identifier HG 91  and the read communication target identifier HT 81 , makes the logical decision RA 91  on whether the communication target identifier HT 81  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  belongs to the communication target identifier set WM 91 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the decision data code CA 91  representing the logical decision RA 91  in the volatile memory space SV 51  in response to making the logical decision RA 91 . For example, the processing unit  710  makes the logical decision RA 91  in response to selecting the read communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     The processing unit  710 , in the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to reading the communication target identifier HT 82  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51 , uses the accessed target identifier set identifier HG 81  and the read communication target identifier HT 82  to make a logical decision RA 82  on whether the communication target identifier HT 82  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  belongs to the communication target identifier set WM 81 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store a decision data code CA 82  representing the logical decision RA 82  in the volatile memory space SV 51  in response to making the logical decision RA 82 . For example, the processing unit  710  makes the logical decision RA 82  in response to selecting the read communication target identifier HT 82 . 
     The processing unit  710 , in the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to reading the communication target identifier HT 82  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51 , uses the accessed target identifier set identifier HG 91  and the read communication target identifier HT 82  to make a logical decision RA 92  on whether the communication target identifier HT 82  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  belongs to the communication target identifier set WM 91 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store a decision data code CA 92  representing the logical decision RA 92  in the volatile memory space SV 51  in response to making the logical decision RA 92 . For example, the processing unit  710  makes the logical decision RA 92  in response to selecting the read communication target identifier HT 82 . 
     The processing unit  710 , in the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to reading the communication target identifier HT 83  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51 , uses the accessed target identifier set identifier HG 81  and the read communication target identifier HT 83  to make a logical decision RA 83  on whether the communication target identifier HT 83  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  belongs to the communication target identifier set WM 81 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store a decision data code CA 83  representing the logical decision RA 83  in the volatile memory space SV 51  in response to making the logical decision RA 83 . For example, the processing unit  710  makes the logical decision RA 83  in response to selecting the read communication target identifier HT 83 . 
     The processing unit  710 , in the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to reading the communication target identifier HT 83  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51 , uses the accessed target identifier set identifier HG 91  and the read communication target identifier HT 83  to make a logical decision RA 93  on whether the communication target identifier HT 83  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  belongs to the communication target identifier set WM 91 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store a decision data code CA 93  representing the logical decision RA 93  in the volatile memory space SV 51  in response to making the logical decision RA 93 . For example, the processing unit  710  makes the logical decision RA 93  in response to selecting the read communication target identifier HT 83 . 
     The processing unit  710  causes the storage unit  720  to provide the stored first functional state code CS 81  to the processing unit  710  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the provided first functional state code CS 81  as the first valid state code CT 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  accesses the decision data code CA 81  stored in the volatile memory space SV 51 . Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the accessed decision data code CA 81  as the valid data code CR 81  representing the positive decision RT 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the accessed communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     The processing unit  710  accesses the communication target identifier HT 82  stored in the volatile memory space SV 51  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the provided first functional state code CS 81  as the first valid state code CT 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  accesses the decision data code CA 82  stored in the volatile memory space SV 51 . Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the accessed decision data code CA 82  as a valid data code CR 82  representing a positive decision RT 82  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the communication target  512  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the accessed communication target identifier HT 82 . 
     The processing unit  710  accesses the second functional state code CS 91  stored at the second application memory location YL 91  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes in the data transmission phase UT 1  the accessed second functional state code CS 91  as the second valid state code CT 91  representing the second selected state SH 91 , the processing unit  710  accesses the decision data code CA 91  stored in the volatile memory space SV 51 . Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the accessed decision data code CA 91  as the valid data code CR 91  representing the positive decision RT 91  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the provided communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     The processing unit  710  accesses the communication target identifier HT 83  stored in the volatile memory space SV 51  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes in the data transmission phase UT 1  the accessed second functional state code CS 91  as the second valid state code CT 91 , the processing unit  710  accesses the decision data code CA 93  stored in the volatile memory space SV 51 . Under a condition that the processing unit  710  recognizes the accessed decision data code CA 93  as a valid data code CR 93  representing a positive decision RT 93  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the accessed communication target identifier HT 83 . 
     The processing unit  710 , in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , makes a logical decision RB 81  on whether the provided first functional state code CS 81  represents the first selected state SH 81 . Under a condition that the logical decision RB 81  is positive, the processing unit  710  recognizes the provided first functional state code CS 81  as the first valid state code CT 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The processing unit  710 , in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , makes a logical decision RB 91  on whether the provided second functional state code CS 91  represents the second selected state SH 91 . Under a condition that the logical decision RB 91  is positive, the processing unit  710  recognizes the provided first functional state code CS 91  as the second valid state code CT 91  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . 
     The processing unit  710 , in response to accessing the stored decision data code CA 81 , makes a logical decision RC 81  on whether the accessed decision data code CA 81  represents the positive decision RT 81 . Under a condition that the logical decision RC 81  is positive, the processing unit  710  recognizes the accessed decision data code CA 81  as the valid data code CR 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The processing unit  710 , in response to accessing the stored decision data code CA 91 , makes a logical decision RC 91  on whether the accessed decision data code CA 91  represents the positive decision RT 91 . Under a condition that the logical decision RC 91  is positive, the processing unit  710  recognizes the accessed decision data code CA 91  as the valid data code CR 91  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . 
     For example, the processing unit  710  is configured to cause the storage unit  720  to store one selected from a group consisting of the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , the first functional state code CS 81 , the second functional state code CS 91 , the communication target identifier set WV 81 , the target identifier set identifier HG 81 , the communication target identifier set WM 81 , the target identifier set identifier HG 81 , the communication target identifier set WM 81  and any combination thereof in at least one of the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  and the volatile memory space SV 51 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  11   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  871 A of the communication system  871  shown in  FIG.  1   . As shown in  FIG.  11   , the implementation structure  871 A includes the electronic device  100 , the message service system  650 , the first communication target  511 , the second communication target  521 , and a server  620  coupled to the electronic device  100 . The electronic device  100  includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740  and the display unit  730 . The processing unit  710  includes a processor  712  and a communication interface unit  714  coupled to the processor  712 . The communication interface unit  714  is coupled or linked to the message service system  650 . Each of the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740 , the display unit  730  and the communication interface unit  714  is coupled to the processor  712 , and is controlled by the processor  712 . 
     In some embodiments, the server  620  includes a processing unit  622 , a storage unit  624  coupled to the processing unit  622 , and a communication interface unit  626  coupled to the processing unit  622 . The communication interface unit  626  is coupled to the communication interface unit  714 . The storage unit  624  stores the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the communication target identifier HT 81 , the first functional state code CS 81 , the second functional state code CS 91  and the user account NB 91 . 
     The input unit  740  provides the first operation request message QN 81  to the processor  712  in response to the first user input operation PU 81  using the first electricity application target BU 81 . The processor  712  causes the electronic device  100  to enter the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . The processor  712  accesses or reads second application data through the communication interface unit  714 , the communication interface unit  626  and the processing unit  622  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The second application data includes at least one of the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , which are stored in the storage unit  624 . 
     The processor  712  determines the first functional state code CS 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1 , and uses the read second application data to fetch the first application memory address AL 81 , determined according to the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , in response to determining the first functional state code CS 81 . The processor  712  stores the determined first functional state code CS 81  to the first application memory location YL 81 , located in the storage unit  624 , through the communication interface unit  714 , the communication interface unit  626  and the processing unit  622  based on the fetched first application memory address AL 81 . 
     The processor  712  determines the second functional state code CS 91  in the data preparation phase UP 1 , and uses the read second application data to fetch the second application memory address AL 91 , determined according to the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , in response to determining the second functional state code CS 91 . The processor  712  stores the determined second functional state code CS 91  to the second application memory location YL 91 , located in the storage unit  624 , through the communication interface unit  714 , the communication interface unit  626  and the processing unit  622  based on the fetched second application memory address AL 91 . 
     The processor  712  is configured to read the communication target identifier HT 81 , stored by the storage unit  624 , through the communication interface unit  714 , the communication interface unit  626  and the processing unit  622  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processor  712 , in response to reading the stored communication target identifier HT 81 , causes the display unit  730  to perform the display operation EL 81  associated with the read communication target identifier HT 81  to display the communication target identification information MH 81  associated with the read communication target identifier HT 81 . The processor  712 , in response to the user input operation PP 81 , performs the data acquisition operation EF 81  to obtain the communication target identifier HT 81  to be stored into the volatile memory space SV 51 , and stores the obtained communication target identifier HT 81  in the volatile memory space SV 51 . For example, the data acquisition operation EF 81  is configured to select the communication target identifier HT 81  stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  provides the second operation request message QN 91  to the processing unit  710  in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . The processor  712  causes the electronic device  100  to leave the data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . The processor  712  accesses or reads third application data through the communication interface unit  714 , the communication interface unit  626  and the processing unit  622  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The third application data includes at least one selected from a group consisting of the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the communication target identifier HT 81 , the first functional state code CS 81  and the second functional state code CS 91 , which are stored in the storage unit  624 . 
     The processor  712  causes the communication interface unit  714  to uses at least one of the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward at least one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521  based on the accessed third application data. 
     In some embodiments, the processor  712  uses in the data transmission phase UT 1  the accessed third application data to obtain the first application memory address AL 81  determined according to the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses the first functional state code CS 81 , stored at the first application memory location YL 81  located in the storage unit  624 , through the communication interface unit  714 , the communication interface unit  626  and the processing unit  622  based on the obtained first application memory address AL 81 . The processor  712  uses in the data transmission phase UT 1  the accessed third application data to obtain the second application memory address AL 91  determined according to the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and accesses the second functional state code CS 91 , stored at the second application memory location YL 91  located in the storage unit  624 , through the communication interface unit  714 , the communication interface unit  626  and the processing unit  622  based on the obtained second application memory address AL 91 . 
     For example, the processor  712  accesses or obtains the first functional state code CS 81 , the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the communication target identifier HT 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . Under a condition that the processor  712  recognizes the obtained first functional state code CS 81  as the first valid state code CT 81  representing the first selected state SH 81 , the processor  712  causes the communication interface unit  714  to use the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  based on the obtained electronic data DE 61 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the obtained communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     The processor  712  further accesses or obtains the second functional state code CS 91  and the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . Under a condition that the processor  712  recognizes the obtained second functional state code CS 91  as the second valid state code CT 91  representing the second selected state SH 91 , the processor  712  causes the communication interface unit  714  to use the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  based on the obtained electronic data DE 61 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the obtained communication target identifier HT 81 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  12   , which is a schematic diagram showing a communication system  821  according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. The communication system  821  includes an electronic device  200  and a first communication target  511 . For example, the electronic device  200  is to communicate with the first communication target  511 . The electronic device  200  for sending electronic data DE 61  includes an electricity-using target BU 71  and a processing unit  710 . The processing unit  710  is coupled to the electricity-using target BU 71 , is configured to obtain a first communication protocol identifier HP 1  configured to identify a first specific application communication protocol PC 11  by means of the electricity-using target BU 71 , obtains a first communication target identifier HT 11  configured to identify the first communication target  511  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and sends the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  based on the first communication target identifier HT 11  and the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  200  further includes a storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  710 . The storage unit  720  has a volatile memory space SV 51  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and an application memory location YK 51  identified based on an application memory address AK 51 . For example, the application memory address AK 51  is determined according to a first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The storage unit  720  further stores a target identifier set identifier HE 51  and a communication target identifier set WV 51  identified by the target identifier set identifier HE 51 . For example, the target identifier set identifier HE 51  is stored at the application memory location YK 51  based on the application memory address AK 51 . The communication target identifier set WV 51  is stored in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The processing unit  710  obtains the application memory address AK 51  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses the target identifier set identifier HE 51  stored at the application memory location YK 51  based on the obtained application memory address AK 51 . 
     Under a condition that the communication target identifier set WV 51  consists of a plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . including the stored first communication target identifier HT 11  and the plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . are configured to respectively identify a plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . , the processing unit  710  accesses the plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . based on the accessed target identifier set identifier HE 51 . The processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward each of the plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the accessed plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . . 
     In some embodiments, the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is one selected from a plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belongs to a communication protocol identifier group GH 1  identified by a protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The storage unit  720  stores the communication protocol identifier group GH 1  and the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  associated with the electricity-using target BU 71 . The processing unit  710  is configured to access the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  by means of the electricity-using target BU 71 , and obtains the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  from the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  13    and  FIG.  14   .  FIG.  13    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8211  of the communication system  821  shown in  FIG.  12   .  FIG.  14    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8212  of the communication system  821  shown in  FIG.  12   . As shown in  FIGS.  13  and  14   , each of the implementation structures  8211  and  8212  includes the electronic device  200 , the first communication target  511  and a second communication target  521 . The electronic device  200  is further to communicate with the second communication target  521 , and includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  710 , an input unit  740  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and a display unit  730  coupled to the processing unit  710 . 
     In some embodiments, one of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes a first electricity application target BU 81  coupled to the processing unit  710 . One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes a second electricity application target BU 91  coupled to the processing unit  710 . For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is the same as or different from the first electricity application target BU 81 . The electricity-using target BU 71  is one of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 . The stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include a second communication protocol identifier HP 2  configured to identify a second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . 
     The storage unit  720  further stores a second communication target identifier HT 21  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the second communication target identifier HT 21  is configured to identify a second communication target  521 . The storage unit  720  has a first application memory location YU 51  identified based on a first application memory address AU 51 , and a second application memory location YU 61  identified based on a second application memory address AU 61 . For example, each of the first and the second application memory locations YU 51  and YU 61  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The first application memory address AU 51  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The second application memory address AU 61  is determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     In some embodiments, each of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belongs to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . The input unit  740  receives a first user input operation PU 81  using the first electricity application target BU 81  to provide a first operation request message QN 81  to the processing unit  710 . The input unit  740  receives a second user input operation PU 91  being after the first user input operation PU 81 , and provides a second operation request message QN 91  to the processing unit  710  in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . 
     The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  200  to enter a data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 , and causes the storage unit  720  to prepare the electronic data DE 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  710  reads the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1 , and reads the stored first and the stored second communication protocol identifiers HP 1  and HP 2  that belong to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  receives a third user input operation PK 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  710  performs a first data acquisition operation EF 51  in response to the third user input operation PK 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. The processing unit  710  fetches the first application memory address AU 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11  at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the fetched first application memory address AU 51 . 
     The input unit  740  receives a fourth user input operation PK 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  710  performs a second data acquisition operation EF 61  in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. The processing unit  710  fetches the second application memory address AU 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21  at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the fetched second application memory address AU 61 . 
     The input unit  740  receives a fifth user input operation PV 81  being before the second user input operation PU 91  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide an input data DB 21  to the processing unit  710 . The processing unit  710 , in response to obtaining the input data DB 21 , causes the storage unit  720  to store the electronic data DE 61  determined according to the obtained input data DB 21 . For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is further associated with the stored electronic data DE 61 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  leaves the data preparation phase UP 1  to enter a data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , and accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The processing unit  710  accesses the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  from the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . The processing unit  710  accesses the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  that belongs to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The processing unit  710  accesses the stored electronic data DE 61  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . 
     The processing unit  710  obtains the first application memory address AU 51  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses the first communication target identifier HT 11  stored at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the obtained first application memory address AU 51 . The processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the accessed first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     The processing unit  710  obtains the second application memory address AU 61  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and accesses the second communication target identifier HT 21  stored at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the obtained second application memory address AU 61 . The processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the accessed second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from a group consisting of an email communication protocol, an instant-messaging communication protocol, a short-message service communication protocol and a multimedia-message service communication protocol. The first communication target identifier HT 11  is the same as or different from the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The first communication target  511  is the same as or different from the second communication target  521 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  12   ,  FIG.  13    and  FIG.  14   . A method for sending electronic data DE 61  is disclosed. The method includes the following steps: An electricity-using target BU 71  is provided. A first communication protocol identifier HP 1  configured to identify a first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is obtained by means of the electricity-using target BU 71 . A first communication target identifier HT 11  configured to identify a first communication target  511  is obtained based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . In addition, the electronic data DE 61  is sent toward the first communication target  511  based on the first communication target identifier HT 11  and the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: A volatile memory space SV 51  is provided. An application memory location YK 51  identified based on an application memory address AK 51  is provided, wherein the application memory address AK 51  is determined according to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . In addition, a target identifier set identifier HE 51  and a communication target identifier set WV 51  identified by the target identifier set identifier HE 51  are stored. For example, the target identifier set identifier HE 51  is stored at the application memory location YK 51  based on the application memory address AK 51 . The communication target identifier set WV 51  is stored in the volatile memory space SV 51 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The application memory address AK 51  is obtained based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The target identifier set identifier HE 51  stored at the application memory location YK 51  is accessed based on the obtained application memory address AK 51 . In addition, under a condition that the communication target identifier set WV 51  consists of a plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . including the stored first communication target identifier HT 11  and the plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . are configured to respectively identify a plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . , the plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . are accessed based on the accessed target identifier set identifier HE 51 . 
     The step of sending the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  is included in a step, included in the method, that: the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is used to send the electronic data DE 61  toward each of the plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the accessed plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . . 
     In some embodiments, the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is one selected from a plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belongs to a communication protocol identifier group GH 1  identified by a protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The method further includes the following steps: The communication protocol identifier group GH 1  and the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  associated with the electricity-using target BU 71  are stored. The stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  is accessed by means of the electricity-using target BU 71 . In addition, the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  is obtained from the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     The stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include a second communication protocol identifier HP 2  configured to identify a second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The method further includes the following steps: A volatile memory space SV 51  is provided. In addition, a first electricity application target BU 81  and a second electricity application target BU 91  are provided. For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is the same as or different from the first electricity application target BU 81 . The electricity-using target BU 71  is one of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: A second communication target identifier HT 21  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is stored, wherein the second communication target identifier HT 21  is configured to identify a second communication target  521 . In addition, a first application memory location YU 51  identified based on a first application memory address AU 51 , and a second application memory location YU 61  identified based on a second application memory address AU 61  are provided. For example, each of the first and the second application memory locations YU 51  and YU 61  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The first application memory address AU 51  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The second application memory address AU 61  is determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     In some embodiments, each of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The method further includes the following steps: A first user input operation PU 81  using the first electricity application target BU 81  is received to provide a first operation request message QN 81 . A second user input operation PU 91  being after the first user input operation PU 81  is received. In addition, a second operation request message QN 91  is provided in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: A data preparation phase UP 1  is entered in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . The electronic data DE 61  is prepared in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  is read in the data preparation phase UP 1 . In addition, the stored first and the stored second communication protocol identifiers HP 1  and HP 2  that belong to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  are read based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: A third user input operation PK 51  is received in the data preparation phase UP 1 . A first data acquisition operation EF 51  is performed in response to the third user input operation PK 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. The first application memory address AU 51  is fetched in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . In addition, the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11  is stored at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the fetched first application memory address AU 51 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: A fourth user input operation PK 61  is received in the data preparation phase UP 1 . A second data acquisition operation EF 61  is performed in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. The second application memory address AU 61  is fetched in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The obtained second communication target identifier HT 21  is stored at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the fetched second application memory address AU 61 . In addition, the data preparation phase UP 1  is left to enter a data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     The step of accessing the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  by means of the electricity-using target BU 71  includes a sub-step that: the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  is accessed in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The step of obtaining the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  from the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include a sub-step that: the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  that belongs to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is accessed based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  from the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . 
     The step of preparing the electronic data DE 61  includes the following sub-steps: A fifth user input operation PV 81  being before the second user input operation PU 91  is received in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide an input data DB 21 . In addition, in response to obtaining the input data DB 21 , the electronic data DE 61  determined according to the obtained input data DB 21  is stored. For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is further associated with the stored electronic data DE 61 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: The stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is accessed based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The stored electronic data DE 61  is accessed in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The first application memory address AU 51  is obtained in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . In addition, the first communication target identifier HT 11  stored at the first application memory location YU 51  is accessed based on the obtained first application memory address AU 51 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The second application memory address AU 61  is obtained in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The second communication target identifier HT 21  stored at the second application memory location YU 61  is accessed based on the obtained second application memory address AU 61 . In addition, the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is used to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the accessed second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     The step of sending the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  includes a sub-step that: the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is used to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the accessed first communication target identifier HT 11 . The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from a group consisting of an email communication protocol, an instant-messaging communication protocol, a short-message service communication protocol and a multimedia-message service communication protocol. The first communication target identifier HT 11  is the same as or different from the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The first communication target  511  is the same as or different from the second communication target  521 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  12   ,  FIG.  13    and  FIG.  14   . A method for sending electronic data DE 61  is disclosed. The method includes the following steps: The input unit  740  receives a first user input operation PU 81  and a second user input operation PU 91  occurred later than the first user input operation PU 81 . The processing unit  710  obtains a first communication protocol identifier HP 1  configured to denote a first specific application communication protocol PC 11  in response to the first user input operation PU 81 . The processing unit  710  obtains a first communication target identifier HT 11  configured to denote a first communication target  511  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . In addition, the processing unit  710  uses the first communication target identifier HT 11  and the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  to the first communication target  511  in response to the second user input operation PU 91 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: The storage unit  720  provides a nonvolatile memory space SN 51 . The storage unit  720  stores a target identifier set identifier HG 51  and a communication target identifier set WM 51  denoted by the target identifier set identifier HG 51 , wherein the communication target identifier set WM 51  includes the first communication target identifier HT 11 , and is stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51 . In addition, the storage unit  720  provides an application memory location YE 51  associated with the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the target identifier set identifier HG 51  is stored at the application memory location YE 51  indicated based on an application memory address AE 51 . 
     The step of obtaining the first communication target identifier HT 11  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  includes the following sub-steps: The processing unit  710  obtains the application memory address AE 51  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The processing unit  710  accesses the target identifier set identifier HG 51  stored at the application memory location YE 51  based on the obtained application memory address AE 51 . In addition, the processing unit  710  obtains the first communication target identifier HT 11  from the communication target identifier set WM 51  based on the accessed target identifier set identifier HG 51 . 
     In some embodiments, the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is one selected from a plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The method further includes the following steps: The storage unit  720  provides a volatile memory space SV 51 . The storage unit  720  provides a first application memory location YU 51  indicated based on a first application memory address AU 51 , wherein the first application memory location YU 51  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The processing unit  710  fetches the first application memory address AU 51  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . In addition, the processing unit  710  causes the storage unit  720  to store the first communication target identifier HT 11  at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the fetched first application memory address AU 51 . 
     The step of sending the electronic data DE 61  to the first communication target  511  includes the following sub-steps: The processing unit  710  accesses the first communication target identifier HT 11  stored at the first application memory location YU 51  in response to the second user input operation PU 91 . In addition, the processing unit  710  sends the electronic data DE 61  to the first communication target  511  based on the accessed first communication target identifier HT 11  and the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belongs to a communication protocol identifier group GH 1  denoted by a protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include a second communication protocol identifier HP 2  configured to denote a second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  provides a first electricity application target BU 81  associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . In addition, one of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  provides a second electricity application target BU 91 . For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is the same as or different from the first electricity application target BU 81 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The storage unit  720  stores the communication protocol identifier group GH 1  and the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  associated with the first electricity application target BU 81 . The storage unit  720  stores a second communication target identifier HT 21  associated with the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , wherein the second communication target identifier HT 21  is configured to denote a second communication target  521 . In addition, the storage unit  720  provides a second application memory location YU 61  indicated based on a second application memory address AU 61 . For example, the second application memory location YU 61  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The first application memory address AU 51  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The second application memory address AU 61  is determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The input unit  740  provides a first operation request message QN 81  in response to the first user input operation PU 81  using the first electricity application target BU 81 . The input unit  740  provides a second operation request message QN 91  in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . The processing unit  710  causes the method to enter a data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . The processing unit  710  causes the storage unit  720  to prepare the electronic data DE 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . In addition, the processing unit  710  accesses the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  stored by the storage unit  720  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The processing unit  710  accesses the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  that belongs to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  from the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . The processing unit  710  accesses the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  that belongs to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . In addition, the input unit  740  receives a third user input operation PK 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     The step of obtaining the first communication target identifier HT 11  includes a sub-step that: the processing unit  710  performs a first data acquisition action EF 5 B in the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the third user input operation PK 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. For example, the first data acquisition action EF 5 B uses the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . For example, the first data acquisition operation EF 51  is the first data acquisition action EF 5 B. 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: The input unit  740  receives a fourth user input operation PK 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . In addition, the processing unit  710  performs a second data acquisition action EF 6 B in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. For example, the second data acquisition action EF 6 B uses the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the second data acquisition operation EF 61  is the second data acquisition action EF 6 B. 
     The method further includes the following steps: The processing unit  710  fetches the second application memory address AU 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The processing unit  710  causes the storage unit  720  to store the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21  at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the fetched second application memory address AU 61 . In addition, the processing unit  710  causes the method to leave the data preparation phase UP 1  to enter a data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     The step of accessing the first communication target identifier HT 11  includes the following sub-steps: The processing unit  710  obtains the first application memory address AU 51  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . In addition, the processing unit  710  accesses the first communication target identifier HT 11  stored at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the obtained first application memory address AU 51 . 
     The step of preparing the electronic data DE 61  includes the following sub-steps: The input unit  740  receives a fifth user input operation PV 81  being before the second user input operation PU 91  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide an input data DB 21 . In addition, the processing unit  710 , in response to obtaining the input data DB 21 , stores the electronic data DE 61  determined according to the obtained input data DB 21 . For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is further associated with the stored electronic data DE 61 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: The processing unit  710  accesses the stored electronic data DE 61  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The processing unit  710  obtains the second application memory address AU 61  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The processing unit  710  accesses the second communication target identifier HT 21  stored at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the obtained second application memory address AU 61 . In addition, the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  to the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the accessed second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     The step of sending the electronic data DE 61  to the first communication target  511  based on the accessed first communication target identifier HT 11  and the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  includes a sub-step that: the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  to the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the accessed first communication target identifier HT 11 . The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from a group consisting of an email communication protocol, an instant-messaging communication protocol, a short-message service communication protocol and a multimedia-message service communication protocol. The first communication target identifier HT 11  is the same as or different from the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The first communication target  511  is the same as or different from the second communication target  521 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  15   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8213  of the communication system  821  shown in  FIG.  12   .  FIG.  16    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8214  of the communication system  821  shown in  FIG.  12   . As shown in  FIG.  15   , the implementation structure  8213  includes the electronic device  200 , the first communication target  511 , the second communication target  521 , a communication target  512  and a communication target  522 . The electronic device  200  is to communicate with at least one of the first communication target  511 , the second communication target  521 , the communication target  512  and the communication target  522 , and includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  710 , the input unit  740  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and the display unit  730  coupled to the processing unit  710 . Each of the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  is controlled by the processing unit  710 . The storage unit  720  has a volatile memory space SV 51  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and a nonvolatile memory space SN 51  coupled to the processing unit  710 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  720  further has an application memory location YK 61  identified based on an application memory address AK 61 . For example, the application memory address AK 61  is determined according to the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The storage unit  720  further stores a target identifier set identifier HE 61  and a communication target identifier set WV 61  identified by the target identifier set identifier HE 61 . For example, the target identifier set identifier HE 61  is stored at the application memory location YK 61  based on the application memory address AK 61 . The processing unit  710  causes the storage unit  720  to store the communication target identifier set WV 61  in the volatile memory space SV 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  710  obtains the application memory address AK 61  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and accesses the target identifier set identifier HE 61  stored at the application memory location YK 61  based on the obtained application memory address AK 61 . 
     Under a condition that the communication target identifier set WV 61  consists of a plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . including the stored second communication target identifier HT 21  and the plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . are configured to respectively identify a plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . , the processing unit  710  accesses the plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed target identifier set identifier HE 61 . The processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward each of the plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the accessed plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . . 
     For example, the plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . constitute a first communication target set  510 . The plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . constitute a second communication target set  520 . The communication target identifier set WV 51  is configured to identify the first communication target set  510 . The processing unit  710  causes the storage unit  720  to store the communication target identifier set WV 51  in the volatile memory space SV 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The communication target identifier set WV 61  is configured to identify the second communication target set  520 . 
     For example, the prepared first communication target identifier HT 11  is stored at the first application memory location YU 51 . The first application memory location YU 51  is identified by the first application memory address AU 51 , or is identified based on the first application memory address AU 51 . The first application memory address AU 51  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored target identifier set identifier HE 51 . The prepared second communication target identifier HT 21  is stored at the second application memory location YU 61 . The second application memory location YU 61  is identified by the second application memory address AU 61 , or is identified based on the second application memory address AU 61 . The second application memory address AU 61  is determined according to the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the stored target identifier set identifier HE 61 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  16    and  FIG.  17   .  FIG.  16    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8214  of the communication system  821  shown in  FIG.  12   .  FIG.  17    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8215  of the communication system  821  shown in  FIG.  12   . As shown in  FIG.  16    and  FIG.  17   , each of the implementation structures  8214  and  8215  includes the electronic device  200 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  200  is to communicate with at least one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 , and includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  710 , the input unit  740  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and the display unit  730  coupled to the processing unit  710 . Each of the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  is controlled by the processing unit  710 . The storage unit  720  has a volatile memory space SV 51  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and a nonvolatile memory space SN 51  coupled to the processing unit  710 . 
     One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes an electricity application target BX 51  coupled to the processing unit  710 . One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes an electricity application target BX 61  coupled to the processing unit  710 . One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes an electricity application target BY 51  coupled to the processing unit  710 . For example, the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 51  are respectively located at different spatial locations. 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  720  further stores a target identifier set identifier HG 51  and a communication target identifier set WM 51  identified by the target identifier set identifier HG 51 , and further has an application memory location YE 51  associated with the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the communication target identifier set WM 51  includes the first communication target identifier HT 11 , and is stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  beforehand. The target identifier set identifier HG 51  is stored at the application memory location YE 51  based on an application memory address AE 51  determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . 
     The input unit  740  receives the third user input operation PK 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  710  performs the first data acquisition operation EF 51  in response to the third user input operation PK 51  using the electricity application target BX 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. The first data acquisition operation EF 51  is one of a data acquisition action EF 5 A and a first data acquisition action EF 5 B. The processing unit  710  fetches the first application memory address AU 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11  at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the fetched first application memory address AU 51 . 
     Under a condition that the first data acquisition operation EF 51  is the data acquisition action EF 5 A: the input unit  740  provides an input data DC 51  to the processing unit  710  in response to the third user input operation PK 51 ; and the processing unit  710 , based on the input data DC 51 , obtains the first communication target identifier HT 11  determined according to the input data DC 51 . 
     Under a condition that the first data acquisition operation EF 51  is the first data acquisition action EF 5 B: the processing unit  710  is configured to use the read or accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the application memory address AE 51 ; the processing unit  710  reads the target identifier set identifier HG 51  stored at the application memory location YE 51  based on the obtained application memory address AE 51 ; and the processing unit  710  reads communication target identifier data DH 51  belonging to the communication target identifier set WM 51  based on the read target identifier set identifier HG 51 , wherein the communication target identifier data DH 51  includes the first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     Under a condition that the first data acquisition operation EF 51  is the first data acquisition action EF 5 B, the processing unit  710  performs a data selection operation ES 51  in response to the third user input operation PK 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  from the communication target identifier data DH 51 . For example, the processing unit  710  causes the display unit  730  to perform a display operation EL 51  associated with the read first communication target identifier HT 11  in response to reading the communication target identifier data DH 51  to display communication target identification information MH 51  associated with the read first communication target identifier HT 11 . Under a condition that the display unit  730  displays the communication target identification information MH 51 , the processing unit  710  performs the data selection operation ES 51  in response to the third user input operation PK 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  720  further stores a target identifier set identifier HG 61  and a communication target identifier set WM 61  identified by the target identifier set identifier HG 61 , and further has an application memory location YE 61  associated with the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the communication target identifier set WM 61  includes the second communication target identifier HT 21 , and is stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  beforehand. The target identifier set identifier HG 61  is stored at the application memory location YE 61  based on an application memory address AE 61  determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     The input unit  740  receives the fourth user input operation PK 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  710  performs the second data acquisition operation EF 61  in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  using the electricity application target BX 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. The second data acquisition operation EF 61  is one of a data acquisition action EF 6 A and a second data acquisition action EF 6 B. The processing unit  710  fetches the second application memory address AU 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21  at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the fetched second application memory address AU 61 . For example, each of the first and the second application memory locations YU 51  and YU 61  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . 
     Under a condition that the second data acquisition operation EF 61  is the data acquisition action EF 6 A: the input unit  740  provides an input data DC 61  to the processing unit  710  in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61 ; and the processing unit  710 , based on the input data DC 61 , obtains the second communication target identifier HT 21  determined according to the input data DC 61 . 
     Under a condition that the second data acquisition operation EF 61  is the second data acquisition action EF 6 B: the processing unit  710  is configured to use the read or accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the application memory address AE 61 ; the processing unit  710  reads the target identifier set identifier HG 61  stored at the application memory location YE 61  based on the obtained application memory address AE 61 ; and the processing unit  710  reads communication target identifier data DH 61  belonging to the communication target identifier set WM 61  based on the read target identifier set identifier HG 61 , wherein the communication target identifier data DH 61  includes the second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     Under a condition that the second data acquisition operation EF 61  is the second data acquisition action EF 6 B, the processing unit  710  performs a data selection operation ES 61  in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  from the communication target identifier data DH 61 . For example, the processing unit  710  causes the display unit  730  to perform a display operation EL 61  associated with the read second communication target identifier HT 21  in response to reading the communication target identifier data DH 61  to display communication target identification information MH 61  associated with the read second communication target identifier HT 21 . Under a condition that the display unit  730  displays the communication target identification information MH 61 , the processing unit  710  performs the data selection operation ES 61  in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     For example, the first communication target identifier HT 11  belonging to the communication target identifier set WM 51  is stored at a first practical memory location. The first practical memory location is identified by a first practical memory address, or is identified based on the first practical memory address. The first practical memory address is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored target identifier set identifier HG 51 . The second communication target identifier HT 21  belonging to the communication target identifier set WM 61  is stored at a second practical memory location. The second practical memory location is identified by a second practical memory address, or is identified based on the second practical memory address. The second practical memory address is determined according to the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the stored target identifier set identifier HG 61 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  720  further has an application memory location YG 51  identified based on an application memory address AG 51 . For example, the application memory address AG 51  is identified by the application memory address AG 51 . The electricity application target BY 51  is associated with the application memory address AG 51 . The input unit  740  receives the fifth user input operation PV 81  using the electricity application target BY 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide the input data DB 21  to the processing unit  710 . The processing unit  710 , in response to obtaining the input data DB 21 , obtains the electronic data DE 61  determined according to the obtained input data DB 21 . The processing unit  710  obtains the application memory address AG 51 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the obtained electronic data DE 61  at the application memory location YG 51  based on the obtained application memory address AG 51 . 
     For example, the application memory address AG 51  is determined according to a selected protocol identifier being one of the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The processing unit  710  obtains the application memory address AG 51  based on the selected protocol identifier, and causes the storage unit  720  to read or access the electronic data DE 61  stored at the application memory location YG 51  based on the obtained application memory address AG 51 . For example, the application memory location YG 51  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . 
     For example, the processing unit  710  is configured to cause the storage unit  720  to store, in at least one of the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  and the volatile memory space SV 51 , one selected from a group consisting of the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , the target identifier set identifier HE 51 , the communication target identifier set WV 51 , the target identifier set identifier HE 61 , the communication target identifier set WV 61 , the target identifier set identifier HG 51 , the communication target identifier set WM 51 , the target identifier set identifier HG 61 , the communication target identifier set WM 61  and any combination thereof. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  18   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8216  of the communication system  821  shown in  FIG.  12   . As shown in  FIG.  18   , the implementation structure  8216  includes the electronic device  200 , a message service system  650 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  200  includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  710 , the input unit  740  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and the display unit  730  coupled to the processing unit  710 . The message service system  650  includes a first message service device  660  and a second message service device  670 . The processing unit  710  is coupled to the first message service device  660  and the second message service device  670 . The first message service device  660  supports the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The second message service device  670  supports the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and is the same or different from the first message service device  660 . 
     The processing unit  710  is configured to support the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The storage unit  720  stores the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the first communication target identifier HT 11 , the second communication target identifier HT 21 , the target identifier set identifier HE 51 , the communication target identifier set WV 51  identified by the target identifier set identifier HE 51 , the target identifier set identifier HE 61 , the communication target identifier set WV 61  identified by the target identifier set identifier HE 61 , the target identifier set identifier HG 51 , the communication target identifier set WM 51  identified by the target identifier set identifier HG 51 , the target identifier set identifier HG 61 , and the communication target identifier set WM 61  identified by the target identifier set identifier HG 61 . 
     The first electricity application target BU 81  is associated with the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the target identifier set identifier HG 51  and the target identifier set identifier HG 61 . The second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the target identifier set identifier HE 51  and the target identifier set identifier HE 61 . 
     The target identifier set identifier HE 51  is stored based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , or is associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The target identifier set identifier HE 61  is stored based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , or is associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The target identifier set identifier HG 51  is stored based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , or is associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The target identifier set identifier HG 61  is stored based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , or is associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     The first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belong to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . For example, the communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is a communication protocol identifier array. The first communication protocol identifier HP 1  is configured to belong to the communication protocol identifier array based on a first ordinal position represented by a first ordinal number NP 1 . The second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is configured to belong to the communication protocol identifier array based on a second ordinal position represented by a second ordinal number NP 2 . The storage unit  720  has an application memory location YC 81  associated with the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and an application memory location YC 91  associated with the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     The first communication protocol identifier HP 1  is stored at the application memory location YC 81  based on an application memory address AC 81 . For example, the application memory address AC 81  is determined according to the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the first ordinal number NP 1 . The application memory location YC 81  is identified based on the application memory address AC 81 , or is identified by the application memory address AC 81 . The second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is stored at the application memory location YC 91  based on an application memory address AC 91 . For example, the application memory address AC 91  is determined according to the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the second ordinal number NP 2 . The application memory location YC 91  is identified based on the application memory address AC 91 , or is identified by the application memory address AC 91 . 
     For example, the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  is a first numeric identifier. The target identifier set identifier HE 51  is stored at the application memory location YK 51  based on the application memory address AK 51 . The application memory address AK 51  is determined according to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 ; therefore, the target identifier set identifier HE 51  is stored based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . For example, the application memory location YK 51  is identified based on the application memory address AK 51 , or is identified by the application memory address AK 51 . 
     For example, the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is a second numeric identifier, and is different from the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The target identifier set identifier HE 61  is stored at the application memory location YK 61  based on the application memory address AK 61 . The application memory address AK 61  is determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 ; therefore, the target identifier set identifier HE 61  is stored based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the application memory location YK 61  is identified based on the application memory address AK 61 , or is identified by the application memory address AK 61 . 
     For example, the target identifier set identifier HG 51  is stored at the application memory location YE 51  based on the application memory address AE 51 . The application memory address AE 51  is determined according to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 ; therefore, the target identifier set identifier HG 51  is stored based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . For example, the application memory location YE 51  is identified based on the application memory address AE 51 , or is identified by the application memory address AE 51 . 
     For example, the target identifier set identifier HG 61  is stored at the application memory location YE 61  based on the application memory address AE 61 . The application memory address AE 61  is determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 ; therefore, the target identifier set identifier HG 61  is stored based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the application memory location YE 61  is identified based on the application memory address AE 61 , or is identified by the application memory address AE 61 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  receives the first user input operation PU 81  occurred earlier than the second user input operation PU 91 , and provides the first operation request message QN 81  to the processing unit  710  in response to the first user input operation PU 81  using the first electricity application target BU 81 . The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  200  to enter the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . In the data preparation phase UP 1 , the input unit  740  receives one selected from a group consisting of the third user input operation PK 51 , the fourth user input operation PK 61 , the fifth user input operation PV 81 , and any combination thereof. 
     For example, the processing unit  710  reads at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  in response to the first operation request message QN 81  to store at least one of the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11  and the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21 . For example, the processing unit  710  reads the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1 , and reads the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     The input unit  740  receives the second user input operation PU 91  at an end time of the data preparation phase UP 1 , and provides the second operation request message QN 91  to the processing unit  710  in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  200  to leave the data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     The processing unit  710  accesses fourth application data stored by the storage unit  720  in the data transmission phase UT 1  to cause the storage unit  720  to provide the fourth application data to the processing unit  710 . For example, the fourth application data includes at least one selected from a group consisting of the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the first communication target identifier HT 11  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The processing unit  710  uses at least one of the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  based on the accessed fourth application data to send the electronic data DE 61  toward at least one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  accesses fifth application data stored by the storage unit  720  in the data transmission phase UT 1  to cause the storage unit  720  to provide the fifth application data to the processing unit  710 . For example, the fifth application data includes at least one selected from a group consisting of the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the target identifier set identifier HE 51  and the target identifier set identifier HE 61 . The processing unit  710  uses at least one of the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  based on the accessed fifth application data to send the electronic data DE 61  toward at least one of the plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . and the plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . . 
     For example, the processing unit  710 , in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , accesses the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the first communication target identifier HT 11  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 , which are stored by the storage unit  720 , to cause the storage unit  720  to provide the stored electronic data DE 61 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the stored first communication target identifier HT 11  and the stored second communication target identifier HT 21  to the processing unit  710 . 
     For example, the processing unit  710 , in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored electronic data DE 61  and a stored communication target identifier HM 81 , and accesses the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The processing unit  710  accesses the stored first communication target identifier HT 11  based on the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses the stored second communication target identifier HT 21  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the processing unit  710  accesses the stored target identifier set identifier HE 51  based on the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses the stored target identifier set identifier HE 61  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  receives the third user input operation PK 51  using the electricity application target BX 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  710  performs the first data acquisition operation EF 51  in response to the third user input operation PK 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. The processing unit  710  fetches the first application memory address AU 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11  at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the fetched first application memory address AU 51 . 
     The input unit  740  receives the fourth user input operation PK 61  using the electricity application target BX 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  710  performs the second data acquisition operation EF 61  in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. The processing unit  710  fetches the second application memory address AU 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21  at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the fetched second application memory address AU 61 . 
     In some embodiments, the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  is one of a third numeric identifier and an alphanumeric identifier. The electricity application target BX 51  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The input unit  740  provides an operation request message QK 51  to the processing unit  710  in response to the third user input operation PK 51  using the electricity application target BX 51 . The processing unit  710  reads or accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in response to the operation request message QK 51 , and reads the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the first ordinal number NP 1 . For example, the processing unit  710  further performs the first data acquisition operation EF 51  in response to the operation request message QK 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. 
     The electricity application target BX 61  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The input unit  740  provides an operation request message QK 61  to the processing unit  710  in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  using the electricity application target BX 61 . The processing unit  710  reads or accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in response to the operation request message QK 61 , and reads the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belonging to the communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the second ordinal number NP 2 . For example, the processing unit  710  further performs the second data acquisition operation EF 61  in response to the operation request message QK 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. 
     At least one of the electricity application target BY 51  and the first electricity application target BU 81  is associated with the application memory address AG 51 . The second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with the application memory address AG 51 . The processing unit  710  fetches the application memory address AG 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The input unit  740  receives the fifth user input operation PV 81  using the electricity application target BY 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide the input data DB 21  to the processing unit  710 . 
     The processing unit  710 , in response to obtaining the input data DB 21 , uses the fetched application memory address AG 51  to cause the storage unit  720  to store the electronic data DE 61  determined according to the obtained input data DB 21  at the application memory location YG 51 . The processing unit  710  obtains the application memory address AG 51  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , and accesses the electronic data DE 61  stored at the application memory location YG 51  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained application memory address AG 51  to send the accessed electronic data DE 61 . 
     For example, the first electricity application target BU 81  is one of a first display target and a first sensing target. The second electricity application target BU 91  is one of a second display target and a second sensing target. The electricity application target BX 51  is one of a display area and a sensing area. The electricity application target BX 61  is one of a display area and a sensing area. The electricity application target BY 51  is one of a display area and a sensing area. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  accesses or reads the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the first communication target identifier HT 11 , which are stored in the storage unit  720 , in response to the second operation request message QN 91  to obtain the stored electronic data DE 61 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored first communication target identifier HT 11 , and uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to transmit an electronic message QE 31  toward the first message service device  660  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained electronic data DE 61 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11 . The electronic message QE 31  includes the electronic data DE 61 . 
     For example, the electronic message QE 31  is or serves as an instruction message used to instruct the first message service device  660 . The first message service device  660  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to transmit an electronic message QE 41  toward the first communication target  511  in response to the electronic message QE 31 , so that the first communication target  511  receives the electronic message QE 41  in a specific application communication protocol PC 51  being matched with or equal to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The electronic message QE 41  includes the electronic data DE 61 . 
     The processing unit  710  accesses or reads the electronic data DE 61 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 , which are stored in the storage unit  720 , in response to the second operation request message QN 91  to obtain the stored electronic data DE 61 , the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the stored second communication target identifier HT 21 , and uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to transmit an electronic message QE 91  toward the second message service device  670  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained electronic data DE 61 , the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21 . The electronic message QE 91  includes the electronic data DE 61 . 
     For example, the electronic message QE 91  is or serves as an instruction message used to instruct the second message service device  670 . The second message service device  670  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to transmit an electronic message QEA 1  toward the second communication target  521  in response to the electronic message QE 91 , so that the second communication target  521  receives the electronic message QEA 1  in a specific application communication protocol PC 81  being matched with or equal to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The electronic message QEA 1  includes the electronic data DE 61 . 
     The input unit  740  provides the second operation request message QN 91  at a provision time TB 11  in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . For example, the data transmission phase UT 1  immediately follows the provision time TB 11 , and has a time length. For example, the time length is equal to one selected from a group consisting of 10 minutes, 5 minutes, 3 minutes, 2 minutes, 1 minute, 50 seconds, 40 seconds, 30 seconds, 20 seconds, 10 seconds, 5 seconds, 3 seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second and 0.5 second. In some embodiments, when the processing unit  710  is configured to cause the data transmission phase UT 1  to end, the processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  200  to enter a data preparation phase UP 2  being after the data transmission phase UT 1 . For example, the processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  200  to enter the data preparation phase UP 2  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  200  is used by a user  910 . The input unit  740  receives from the user  910  at least one selected from a plurality of user input operations. The plurality of user input operations include the first user input operation PU 81 , the second user input operation PU 91 , the third user input operation PK 51 , the fourth user input operation PK 61  and the fifth user input operation PV 81 . In some embodiments, the electronic device  200  is used by a plurality of users including the user  910 . The input unit  740  is operated by the plurality of users to receive the plurality of user input operations. For example, the plurality of users are different. 
     In some embodiments, each of the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from a group consisting of the email communication protocol, the instant-messaging communication protocol, the short-message service communication protocol and the multimedia-message service communication protocol. For example, the first operation request message QN 81  and the second operation request message QN 91  are a plurality of user request messages, respectively. For example, the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . constitute an application communication protocol group GP 1 . The communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is configured to identify the application communication protocol group GP 1 . 
     For example, the processing unit  710  reads at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . For example, the processing unit  710  accesses at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  receives the electronic data DE 61  from an external device  505  in the data preparation phase UP 1 , and stores the received electronic data DE 61  into the storage unit  720  in response to receiving the electronic data DE 61 . For example, the external device  505  is coupled to the processing unit  710 . Please additionally refer to  FIG.  5   . In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  accesses the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , and accesses the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  stored at the application memory location YC 81  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the first ordinal number NP 1 . The processing unit  710  accesses the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  stored at the application memory location YC 91  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the second ordinal number NP 2 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  19   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8217  of the communication system  821  shown in  FIG.  12   . As shown in  FIG.  19   , the implementation structure  8217  includes the electronic device  200 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  200  includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  710 , the input unit  740  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and the display unit  730  coupled to the processing unit  710 . Each of the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  is controlled by the processing unit  710 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  200  includes the first electricity application target BU 81 , the second electricity application target BU 91 , the electricity application target BX 51 , the electricity application target BX 61  and the electricity application target BY 51 , each of which is coupled to the processing unit  710 . The first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , and the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 51  are respectively located at a spatial location EU 81 , a spatial location EU 91 , a spatial location EX 51 , a spatial location EX 61  and a spatial location EY 51 . 
     For example, the spatial locations EU 81 , EU 91 , EX 51 , EX 61  and EY 51  are different. For example, two selected from a group consisting of the spatial locations EU 81 , EU 91 , EX 51 , EX 61  and EY 51  are the same. The first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , and the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 51  respectively have a plurality of electricity application areas, or are respectively formed by the plurality of electricity application areas. 
     For example, the input unit  740  includes one selected from a group consisting of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 51 , and any combination thereof. Any of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , and the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 51  is a sensing target, wherein the sensing target includes one selected from a group consisting of a sensing area, a push button and a touch point. 
     The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  200  to enter the data preparation phase UP 1  by means of the first electricity application target BU 81 . The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  200  to leave the data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the data transmission phase UT 1  by means of the second electricity application target BU 91 . The processing unit  710  obtains the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored by means of the electricity application target BX 51 . The processing unit  710  obtains the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored by means of the electricity application target BX 61 . The processing unit  710  obtains the input data DB 21  by means of the electricity application target BY 51 . 
     For example, the display unit  730  includes one selected from a group consisting of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 51 , and any combination thereof. For example, the processing unit  710  is configured to cause the display unit  730  to display the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91  at the same time or for different times. For example, the processing unit  710  is configured to cause the display unit  730  to display the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 51  at the same time or for different times. Any of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , and the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 51  is a display target, wherein the display target includes one selected from a group consisting of a display area, an icon and a display action item. 
     The first electricity application target BU 81  is associated with at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the stored first communication target identifier HT 11 , the stored second communication target identifier HT 21 , the stored target identifier set identifier HE 51 , the stored target identifier set identifier HE 61 , the stored target identifier set identifier HG 51  and the stored target identifier set identifier HG 61 . The second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the stored electronic data DE 61 , the stored target identifier set identifier HE 51  and the stored target identifier set identifier HE 61 . 
     The electricity application target BX 51  is associated with at least one of the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the first application memory address AU 51 . The electricity application target BX 61  is associated with at least one of the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the second application memory address AU 61 . The electricity application target BY 51  is associated with the application memory address AG 51 , and is used to obtain the input data DB 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  is configured to cause the display unit  730  to display a selection tool TK 11 . The first user input operation PU 81  uses or selects the first electricity application target BU 81  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  740  to provide the first operation request message QN 81  to the processing unit  710 . The second user input operation PU 91  uses or selects the second electricity application target BU 91  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  740  to provide the second operation request message QN 91  to the processing unit  710 . 
     The third user input operation PK 51  uses the electricity application target BX 51  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the processing unit  710  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. The fourth user input operation PK 61  uses the electricity application target BX 61  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the processing unit  710  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. The fifth user input operation PV 81  uses the electricity application target BY 51  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the processing unit  710  to obtain the input data DB 21 . For example, the selection tool TK 11  is a cursor. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  20   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8218  of the communication system  821  shown in  FIG.  12   . As shown in  FIG.  20   , the implementation structure  8218  includes the electronic device  200 , the message service system  650 , the first communication target  511 , the second communication target  521 , and a server  620  coupled to the electronic device  200 . The electronic device  100  includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740  and the display unit  730 . The processing unit  710  includes a processor  712  and a communication interface unit  714  coupled to the processor  712 . The communication interface unit  714  is coupled or linked to the message service system  650 . Each of the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740 , the display unit  730  and the communication interface unit  714  is coupled to the processor  712 , and is controlled by the processor  712 . 
     In some embodiments, the server  620  includes a processing unit  622 , a storage unit  624  coupled to the processing unit  622 , and a communication interface unit  626  coupled to the processing unit  622 . The communication interface unit  626  is coupled to the communication interface unit  714 . The storage unit  624  stores the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the first communication target identifier HT 11 , the second communication target identifier HT 21 , the target identifier set identifier HE 51 , the communication target identifier set WV 51 , the target identifier set identifier HE 61 , the communication target identifier set WV 61 , the target identifier set identifier HG 51 , the communication target identifier set WM 51 , the target identifier set identifier HG 61  and the communication target identifier set WM 61 . 
     The input unit  740  provides the first operation request message QN 81  to the processor  712  in response to the first user input operation PU 81  using the first electricity application target BU 81 . The processor  712  causes the electronic device  200  to enter the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . The processor  712  accesses or reads sixth application data through the communication interface unit  714 , the communication interface unit  626  and the processing unit  622  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The sixth application data includes at least one selected from a group consisting of the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , which are stored in the storage unit  624 . 
     The processor  712 , in the data preparation phase UP 1 , obtains the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored, and uses the read sixth application data to fetch the first application memory address AU 51 , determined according to the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , in response to obtaining the first communication target identifier HT 11 . The processor  712  stores the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11  to the first application memory location YU 51 , located in the storage unit  624 , through the communication interface unit  714 , the communication interface unit  626  and the processing unit  622  based on the fetched first application memory address AU 51 . 
     The processor  712 , in the data preparation phase UP 1 , obtains the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored, and uses the read sixth application data to fetch the second application memory address AU 61 , determined according to the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , in response to obtaining the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The processor  712  stores the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21  to the second application memory location YU 61 , located in the storage unit  624 , through the communication interface unit  714 , the communication interface unit  626  and the processing unit  622  based on the fetched second application memory address AU 61 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  provides the second operation request message QN 91  to the processor  712  in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . The processor  712  causes the electronic device  200  to leave the data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . The processor  712  accesses or reads seventh application data through the communication interface unit  714 , the communication interface unit  626  and the processing unit  622  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The seventh application data includes at least one selected from a group consisting of the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the first communication target identifier HT 11 , the second communication target identifier HT 21 , the target identifier set identifier HE 51  and the target identifier set identifier HE 61 , which are stored in the storage unit  624 . 
     The processor  712  causes the communication interface unit  714  to uses at least one of the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward at least one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521  based on the accessed seventh application data. 
     In some embodiments, the processor  712  uses in the data transmission phase UT 1  the accessed seventh application data to obtain the first application memory address AU 51  determined according to the accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses the first communication target identifier HT 11 , stored at the first application memory location YU 51  located in the storage unit  624 , through the communication interface unit  714 , the communication interface unit  626  and the processing unit  622  based on the obtained first application memory address AU 51 . The processor  712  uses in the data transmission phase UT 1  the accessed seventh application data to obtain the second application memory address AU 61  determined according to the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and accesses the second communication target identifier HT 21 , stored at the second application memory location YU 61  located in the storage unit  624 , through the communication interface unit  714 , the communication interface unit  626  and the processing unit  622  based on the obtained second application memory address AU 61 . 
     For example, the processor  712  accesses or obtains the first functional state code CS 81 , the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the communication target identifier HM 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . Under a condition that the processor  712  recognizes the obtained first functional state code CS 81  as the first valid state code CT 81  representing the first selected state SH 81 , the processor  712  causes the communication interface unit  714  to use the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  based on the obtained electronic data DE 61 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the obtained communication target identifier HM 81 . 
     The processor  712  further accesses or obtains the second functional state code CS 91  and the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . Under a condition that the processor  712  recognizes the obtained second functional state code CS 91  as the second valid state code CT 91  representing the second selected state SH 91 , the processor  712  causes the communication interface unit  714  to use the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  based on the obtained electronic data DE 61 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the obtained communication target identifier HM 81 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  21   , which is a schematic diagram showing a communication system  831  according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. The communication system  831  includes an electronic device  201 , a message service system  650 , a first communication target  511  and a second communication target  521 . The electronic device  201  includes a processing unit  719 , a storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  719 , and an electricity-using target BU 71  coupled to the processing unit  719 . The processing unit  719  includes a processor  712 , a communication interface unit  714  coupled to the processor  712 , and a volatile memory unit  716  coupled to the processor  712 . For example, the storage unit  720  is a nonvolatile storage unit. The communication interface unit  714  is coupled or linked to the message service system  650 . Each of the storage unit  720 , the communication interface unit  714  and the volatile memory unit  716  is coupled to the processor  712 , and is controlled by the processor  712 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  22    and  FIG.  23   .  FIG.  22    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8311  of the communication system  831  shown in  FIG.  21   .  FIG.  23    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8312  of the communication system  831  shown in  FIG.  21   . As shown in  FIGS.  22  and  23   , each of the implementation structures  8311  and  8312  includes the electronic device  201 , the first communication target  511  and a second communication target  521 . The electronic device  201  is further to communicate with the second communication target  521 , and includes the processing unit  719 , the storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  719 , an input unit  740  coupled to the processing unit  719 , and a display unit  730  coupled to the processing unit  719 . The processing unit  719  includes a processor  712 , a communication interface unit  714  coupled to the processor  712 , and a volatile memory unit  716  coupled to the processor  712 . For example, each of the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740 , the display unit  730 , the communication interface unit  714  and the volatile memory unit  716  is coupled to the processor  712 , and is controlled by the processor  712 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  receives a first user input operation PU 81  and a second user input operation PU 91  occurred later than the first user input operation PU 81 . The processing unit  719  obtains a first communication protocol identifier HP 1  configured to identify a first specific application communication protocol PC 11  in response to the first user input operation PU 81 . The processing unit  719  obtains a first communication target identifier HT 11  configured to identify the first communication target  511  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The processing unit  719  uses the first communication target identifier HT 11  and the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in response to the second user input operation PU 91 . 
     In some embodiments, the volatile memory unit  716  has a volatile memory space SV 51  coupled to the processor  712 . The storage unit  720  has an application memory location YK 51  identified based on an application memory address AK 51 , and stores a target identifier set identifier HE 51 . For example, the application memory address AK 51  is determined according to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The volatile memory unit  716  stores a communication target identifier set WV 51  identified by the target identifier set identifier HE 51 . For example, the target identifier set identifier HE 51  is stored at the application memory location YK 51  based on the application memory address AK 51 . The communication target identifier set WV 51  is stored in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The processing unit  719  obtains the application memory address AK 51  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses the target identifier set identifier HE 51  stored at the application memory location YK 51  based on the obtained application memory address AK 51 . 
     Under a condition that the communication target identifier set WV 51  consists of a plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . including the stored first communication target identifier HT 11  and the plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . are configured to respectively identify a plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . , the processing unit  719  accesses the plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . based on the accessed target identifier set identifier HE 51 . The processing unit  719  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward each of the plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the accessed plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  720  has a nonvolatile memory space SN 51  coupled to the processor  712 . The storage unit  720  stores a target identifier set identifier HG 51  and a communication target identifier set WM 51  identified by the target identifier set identifier HG 51 . For example, the communication target identifier set WM 51  includes the first communication target identifier HT 11 , and is stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51 . The storage unit  720  has an application memory location YE 51  associated with the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the target identifier set identifier HG 51  is stored at the application memory location YE 51  identified based on an application memory address AE 51 . 
     The processor  712  obtains the application memory address AE 51  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The processor  712  accesses the target identifier set identifier HG 51  stored at the application memory location YE 51  based on the obtained application memory address AE 51 . The processor  712  obtains the first communication target identifier HT 11  from the communication target identifier set WM 51  based on the accessed target identifier set identifier HG 51 . 
     In some embodiments, the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is selected from a plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The volatile memory unit  716  has the volatile memory space SV 51 . The volatile memory unit  716  has a first application memory location YU 51  identified based on a first application memory address AU 51 . For example, the first application memory location YU 51  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The processor  712  fetches the first application memory address AU 51  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The processor  712  causes the volatile memory unit  716  to store the first communication target identifier HT 11  at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the fetched first application memory address AU 51 . 
     The processor  712  accesses the first communication target identifier HT 11  stored at the first application memory location YU 51  in response to the second user input operation PU 91 . The processor  712  causes the communication interface unit  714  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  based on the accessed first communication target identifier HT 11  and the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belongs to a communication protocol identifier group GH 1  identified by a protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include a second communication protocol identifier HP 2  configured to identify a second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . 
     One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes a first electricity application target BU 81  coupled to the processor  712 . For example, the first electricity application target BU 81  is associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes a second electricity application target BU 91  coupled to the processor  712 . For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is the same as or different from the first electricity application target BU 81 . The electricity-using target BU 71  is one of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  720  stores the communication protocol identifier group GH 1  and the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  associated with the first electricity application target BU 81 . The volatile memory unit  716  stores a second communication target identifier HT 21  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the second communication target identifier HT 21  is configured to identify a second communication target  521 . 
     The volatile memory unit  716  provides a second application memory location YU 61  identified based on a second application memory address AU 61 . For example, the second application memory location YU 61  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The first application memory address AU 51  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The second application memory address AU 61  is determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     The input unit  740  provides a first operation request message QN 81  to the processor  712  in response to the first user input operation PU 81  using the first electricity application target BU 81 . The input unit  740  provides a second operation request message QN 91  to the processor  712  in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . The processor  712  causes the electronic device  201  to enter a data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . The processor  712  causes the volatile memory unit  716  to prepare the electronic data DE 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     The processor  712  accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processor  712  accesses the first communication protocol identifiers HP 1  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored first communication protocol identifiers HP 1  from the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . The processor  712  accesses the second communication protocol identifiers HP 2  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  receives a third user input operation PK 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processor  712  performs a first data acquisition action EF 5 B in the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the third user input operation PK 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. For example, the first data acquisition action EF 5 B uses the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . 
     The input unit  740  receives a fourth user input operation PK 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processor  712  performs a second data acquisition action EF 6 B in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. For example, the second data acquisition action EF 6 B uses the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The processor  712  fetches the second application memory address AU 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The processor  712  causes the volatile memory unit  716  to store the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21  at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the fetched second application memory address AU 61 . 
     The input unit  740  receives a fifth user input operation PV 81  occurred earlier than the second user input operation PU 91  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide input data DB 21 . The processor  712 , in response to obtaining the input data DB 21 , causes the volatile memory unit  716  to store the electronic data DE 61 , determined according to the obtained input data DB 21 , in the volatile memory space SV 51 . For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with the stored electronic data DE 61 . 
     In some embodiments, the processor  712  causes the electronic device  201  to leave the data preparation phase UP 1  to enter a data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , and obtains the first application memory address AU 51  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The processor  712  accesses the first communication target identifier HT 11  stored at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the obtained first application memory address AU 51 . 
     The processor  712 , in the data transmission phase UT 1 , accesses the electronic data DE 61  stored in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The processor  712  obtains the second application memory address AU 61  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The processor  712  accesses the second communication target identifier HT 21  stored at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the obtained second application memory address AU 61 . 
     The processor  712  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the accessed first communication target identifier HT 11 . The processor  712  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the accessed electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed electronic data DE 61 , the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the accessed second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from a group consisting of an email communication protocol, an instant-messaging communication protocol, a short-message service communication protocol and a multimedia-message service communication protocol. The first communication target identifier HT 11  is the same as or different from the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The first communication target  511  is the same as or different from the second communication target  521 . For example, each of the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , the target identifier set identifier HE 51 , the target identifier set identifier HG 51  and the communication target identifier set WV 51  is stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  beforehand. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  24   , which is a schematic diagram showing a communication system  861  according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. The communication system  861  includes an electronic device  400  and a first communication target  511 . For example, the electronic device  400  is to communicate with the first communication target  511 . The electronic device  400  for sending a first electronic data DE 11  includes a storage unit  320 , an electricity-using target BU 21  and a processing unit  310 . The storage unit  320  stores the first electronic data DE 11 . The processing unit  310  is coupled to the storage unit  320  and the electricity-using target BU 21 , is configured to obtain a first communication protocol identifier HP 1  configured to identify a first specific application communication protocol PC 11  by means of the electricity-using target BU 21 , accesses the stored first electronic data DE 11  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and sends the accessed first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  400  further includes an electricity application target BR 11  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and an input unit  340  coupled to the processing unit  310 . The storage unit  320  has a volatile memory space SV 51  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and further stores a second electronic data DE 21 , a first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 , and a first data derivation rule RY 11  identified by the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . For example, each of the first electronic data DE 11  and the second electronic data DE 21  is stored in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The electricity application target BR 11  is associated with the second electronic data DE 21  and the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . 
     Before the processing unit  310  accesses the first electronic data DE 11  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the processing unit  310  reads the stored second electronic data DE 21  and the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  by means of the electricity application target BR 11 , reads the first data derivation rule RY 11  based on the read first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 , and processes the read second electronic data DE 21  to form the stored first electronic data DE 11  based on the read first data derivation rule RY 11 . 
     After the processing unit  310  sends the accessed first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , the input unit  340  receives a user input operation PZ 82  to provide an operation request message QZ 82  to the processing unit  310 . The processing unit  310 , in response to the operation request message QZ 82 , replaces the stored first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  with a second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  being different from the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . For example, the second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  is configured to identify a second data derivation rule RY 12  being different from the first data derivation rule RY 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is selected from a plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belongs to a communication protocol identifier group GH 1  identified by a protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The storage unit  320  further stores the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , and a first address pointer LP 11  associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the first electronic data DE 11 . 
     The processing unit  310  is configured to access the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , and accesses the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  from the storage unit  320 . The processing unit  310  uses the stored first address pointer LP 11  to access the stored first electronic data DE 11  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  25   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8611  of the communication system  861  shown in  FIG.  24   . As shown in  FIG.  25   , the implementation structure  8611  includes the electronic device  400 , the first communication target  511  and a second communication target  521 . The electronic device  400  is further to communicate with the second communication target  521 , and includes the processing unit  310  and the storage unit  320  coupled to the processing unit  310 . The storage unit  320  has a volatile memory space SV 51  coupled to the processing unit  310 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  26    and  FIG.  27   .  FIG.  26    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8612  of the communication system  861  shown in  FIG.  24   .  FIG.  27    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8613  of the communication system  861  shown in  FIG.  24   . As shown in  FIGS.  26  and  27   , any of the implementation structures  8612  and  8613  includes the electronic device  400 , the first communication target  511  and a second communication target  521 . The electronic device  400  is further to communicate with the second communication target  521 , and includes the processing unit  310 , the storage unit  320  coupled to the processing unit  310 , an input unit  340  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and a display unit  330  coupled to the processing unit  310 . The storage unit  320  has the volatile memory space SV 51  coupled to the processing unit  310 . 
     In some embodiments, one of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes a first electricity application target BU 81  coupled to the processing unit  310 . One of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes a second electricity application target BU 91  coupled to the processing unit  310 . For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is the same as or different from the first electricity application target BU 81 . The electricity-using target BU 21  is the second electricity application target BU 91 . One of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes a third electricity application target BC 11  coupled to the processing unit  310 . For example, the third electricity application target BC 11  is the electricity application target BR 11 . The stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include a second communication protocol identifier HP 2  configured to identify a second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . 
     The storage unit  320  further stores a first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  associated with the third electricity application target BC 11 , and a first data derivation rule RY 11  identified by the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . The storage unit  320  further stores a first communication target identifier HT 11  associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and a second communication target identifier HT 21  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the first communication target identifier HT 11  is configured to identify the first communication target  511 . The second communication target identifier HT 21  is configured to identify a second communication target  521 . 
     The storage unit  320  has a first application memory location YU 51  identified based on a first application memory address AU 51 , and a second application memory location YU 61  identified based on a second application memory address AU 61 . For example, each of the first and the second application memory locations YU 51  and YU 61  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The first application memory address AU 51  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The second application memory address AU 61  is determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     The storage unit  320  further has a third application memory location YG 11  identified by a third application memory address AG 11 , and a fourth application memory location YG 21  identified by a fourth application memory address AG 21 . For example, each of the third and the fourth application memory locations YG 11  and YG 21  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The first electronic data DE 11  is configured to be stored at the third application memory location YG 11 . The second electronic data DE 21  is configured to be stored at the fourth application memory location YG 21 . The storage unit  320  further stores a second address pointer LP 21  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the first address pointer LP 11  points to the third application memory address AG 11 . The second address pointer LP 21  points to the fourth application memory address AG 21 . 
     The storage unit  320  further has a fifth application memory location YB 11  identified by a fifth application memory address AB 11 , and a sixth application memory location YB 21  identified by a sixth application memory address AB 21 . For example, the fifth application memory address AB 11  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The sixth application memory address AB 21  is determined according to the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The first address pointer LP 11  is configured to be stored at the fifth application memory location YB 11 . The second address pointer LP 21  is configured to be stored at the sixth application memory location YB 21 . 
     The storage unit  320  further has a seventh application memory location YH 11  identified by a seventh application memory address AH 11 . For example, the seventh application memory address AH 11  is determined according to a designated protocol identifier HPA being one of the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The third electricity application target BC 11  is associated with the seventh application memory address AH 11 . The first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  is stored at the seventh application memory location YH 11  based on the seventh application memory address AH 11 . 
     In some embodiments, each of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The input unit  340  receives a first user input operation PU 81  using the first electricity application target BU 81  to provide a first operation request message QN 81  to the processing unit  310 . The input unit  340  receives a second user input operation PU 91  being after the first user input operation PU 81 , and provides a second operation request message QN 91  to the processing unit  310  in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . 
     The processing unit  310  enters a data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 , and causes the storage unit  320  to prepare second electronic data DE 21  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310  reads the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310 , in the data preparation phase UP 1 , reads the stored first communication protocol identifiers HP 1  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored first communication protocol identifiers HP 1 . The processing unit  310  reads the stored second communication protocol identifiers HP 2  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  340  receives a third user input operation PK 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310  performs a first data acquisition operation EF 51  in response to the third user input operation PK 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. The processing unit  310  fetches the first application memory address AU 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11  at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the fetched first application memory address AU 51 . 
     The input unit  340  receives a fourth user input operation PK 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310  performs a second data acquisition operation EF 61  in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. The processing unit  310  fetches the second application memory address AU 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21  at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the fetched second application memory address AU 61 . 
     The input unit  340  receives a fifth user input operation PV 11  being before the second user input operation PU 91  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide an input data DB 11  to the processing unit  310 . The processing unit  310 , in response to obtaining the input data DB 11 , performs a third data acquisition operation EH 11  to fetch the second electronic data DE 21  determined according to the obtained input data DB 11 . The processing unit  310  fetches the sixth application memory address AB 21  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , reads the second address pointer LP 21  to fetch the fourth application memory address AG 21  based on the fetched sixth application memory address AB 21 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the fetched second electronic data DE 21  at the fourth application memory location YG 21  based on the fetched fourth application memory address AG 21 . For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with the stored second electronic data DE 21 . For example, the processing unit  310  performs the third data acquisition operation EH 11  to the obtained input data DB 11  to derive the second electronic data DE 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the third electricity application target BC 11  is associated with the stored second address pointer LP 21 , the seventh application memory address AH 11 , the stored first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  and the first address pointer LP 11 . The input unit  340 , in the data preparation phase UP 1 , receives a sixth user input operation PV 21  between the fifth user input operation PV 11  and the second user input operation PU 91 , and provides a third operation request message QV 11  to the processing unit  310  in response to the sixth user input operation PV 21  using the third electricity application target BC 11 . 
     The processing unit  310  uses the designated protocol identifier HPA to fetch the seventh application memory address AH 11  in response to the third operation request message QV 11 , reads the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  stored at the seventh application memory location YH 11  based on the fetched seventh application memory address AH 11 , and reads the stored first data derivation rule RY 11  based on the read first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . The processing unit  310  reads the second electronic data DE 21  stored at the fourth application memory location YG 21  in response to the third operation request message QV 11  to obtain the stored second electronic data DE 21  from the storage unit  320 . 
     The processing unit  310  processes the read second electronic data DE 21  to form a third electronic data DE 1 A based on the read first data derivation rule RY 11 . For example, the third electronic data DE 1 A is equal to one of the obtained second electronic data DE 21  and a portion of the read second electronic data DE 21 . The processing unit  310  applies the read first data derivation rule RY 11  to the read second electronic data DE 21  to form the third electronic data DE 1 A derived from the read second electronic data DE 21 . Under a condition that the processing unit  310  forms the third electronic data DE 1 A, the processing unit  310  performs a data derivation operation EK 11  to form the first electronic data DE 11  derived from the third electronic data DE 1 A. For example, the first electronic data DE 11  is the same as or different from the third electronic data DE 1 A. The data derivation operation EK 11  is one of a null derivation operation and a practical derivation operation. 
     The processing unit  310  fetches the fifth application memory address AB 11  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , reads the first address pointer LP 11  based on the fetched fifth application memory address AB 11  to fetch the third application memory address AG 11 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the formed first electronic data DE 11  at the third application memory location YG 11  based on the fetched third application memory address AG 11 . For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is further associated with the stored first electronic data DE 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  leaves the data preparation phase UP 1  to enter a data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , and accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The processing unit  310  accesses the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . In addition, the processing unit  310  accesses the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     The processing unit  310  uses the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the first application memory address AU 51  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , and accesses the first communication target identifier HT 11  stored at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the obtained first application memory address AU 51 . The processing unit  310  uses the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the second application memory address AU 61  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , and accesses the second communication target identifier HT 21  stored at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the obtained second application memory address AU 61 . 
     The processing unit  310  uses the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the fifth application memory address AB 11  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , accesses the first address pointer LP 11  based on the obtained fifth application memory address AB 11  to obtain the third application memory address AG 11 , and accesses the first electronic data DE 11  stored at the third application memory location YG 11  based on the obtained third application memory address AG 11 . The processing unit  310  uses the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the sixth application memory address AB 21  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , accesses the second address pointer LP 21  based on the obtained sixth application memory address AB 21  to obtain the fourth application memory address AG 21 , and accesses the second electronic data DE 21  stored at the fourth application memory location YG 21  based on the obtained fourth application memory address AG 21 . 
     The processing unit  310  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the accessed first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed first electronic data DE 11 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the accessed first communication target identifier HT 11 . The processing unit  310  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the accessed second electronic data DE 21  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed second electronic data DE 21 , the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the accessed second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from a group consisting of an email communication protocol, an instant-messaging communication protocol, a short-message service communication protocol and a multimedia-message service communication protocol. The first communication target identifier HT 11  is the same as or different from the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The first communication target  511  is the same as or different from the second communication target  521 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  24   ,  FIG.  25   ,  FIG.  26    and  FIG.  27   . A method for sending electronic data DE 11  toward a first communication target  511  is disclosed. The method includes the following steps: First electronic data DE 11  is stored. An electricity-using target BU 21  is provided. A first communication protocol identifier HP 1  configured to identify a first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is obtained by means of the electricity-using target BU 21 . The stored first electronic data DE 11  is accessed based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . In addition, the accessed first electronic data DE 11  is sent toward the first communication target  511  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: A volatile memory space SV 51  is provided. Second electronic data DE 21 , a first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 , and a first data derivation rule RY 11  identified by the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  are stored, wherein each of the first electronic data DE 11  and the second electronic data DE 21  is stored in the volatile memory space SV 51 . An electricity application target BR 11  is provided, wherein the electricity application target BR 11  is associated with the second electronic data DE 21  and the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . Before the first electronic data DE 11  is accessed based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the stored second electronic data DE 21  and the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  are read by means of the electricity application target BR 11 . In addition, the first data derivation rule RY 11  is read based on the read first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The read second electronic data DE 21  is processed to form the stored first electronic data DE 11  based on the read first data derivation rule RY 11 . After the accessed first electronic data DE 11  is sent toward the first communication target  511  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , a user input operation PZ 82  is received to provide an operation request message QZ 82 . In addition, in response to the operation request message QZ 82 , the stored first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  is replaced with a second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  being different from the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . For example, the second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  is configured to identify a second data derivation rule RY 12  being different from the first data derivation rule RY 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is selected from a plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belongs to a communication protocol identifier group GH 1  identified by a protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The method further includes the following steps: A volatile memory space SV 51  is provided. In addition, the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , and a first address pointer LP 11  associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the first electronic data DE 11  are stored. 
     The method further includes the following steps: The stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  is accessed. In addition, the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is accessed based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The step of accessing the stored first electronic data DE 11  includes a step that: the stored first address pointer LP 11  is used to access the stored first electronic data DE 11  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include a second communication protocol identifier HP 2  configured to identify a second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The method further includes the following steps: A first electricity application target BU 81  is provided. In addition, a second electricity application target BU 91  is provided. For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is the same as or different from the first electricity application target BU 81 . Each of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The electricity-using target BU 21  is the second electricity application target BU 91 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: A third electricity application target BC 11  is provided. In addition, a first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  associated with the third electricity application target BC 11 , and a first data derivation rule RY 11  identified by the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  are stored. For example, the electricity application target BR 11  is the third electricity application target BC 11 . 
     The method further includes a step that: a first communication target identifier HT 11  associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and a second communication target identifier HT 21  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  are stored. For example, the first communication target identifier HT 11  is configured to identify the second communication target  511 . The second communication target identifier HT 21  is configured to identify a second communication target  521 . 
     The method further includes a step that: a first application memory location YU 51  identified based on a first application memory address AU 51 , and a second application memory location YU 61  identified based on a second application memory address AU 61  are provided. For example, each of the first and the second application memory locations YU 51  and YU 61  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The first application memory address AU 51  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The second application memory address AU 61  is determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     The method further includes a step that: a third application memory location YG 11  identified by a third application memory address AG 11 , and a fourth application memory location YG 21  identified by a fourth application memory address AG 21  are provided. For example, each of the third and the fourth application memory locations YG 11  and YG 21  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The first electronic data DE 11  is configured to be stored at the third application memory location YG 11 . The second electronic data DE 21  is configured to be stored at the fourth application memory location YG 21 . 
     The method further includes a step that: a second address pointer LP 21  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is stored. For example, the first address pointer LP 11  points to the third application memory address AG 11 . The second address pointer LP 21  points to the fourth application memory address AG 21 . 
     The method further includes a step that: a fifth application memory location YB 11  identified by a fifth application memory address AB 11 , and a sixth application memory location YB 21  identified by a sixth application memory address AB 21  are provided. For example, the fifth application memory address AB 11  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The sixth application memory address AB 21  is determined according to the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The first address pointer LP 11  is configured to be stored at the fifth application memory location YB 11 . The second address pointer LP 21  is configured to be stored at the sixth application memory location YB 21 . 
     The method further includes a step that: a seventh application memory location YH 11  identified by a seventh application memory address AH 11  is provided. For example, the seventh application memory address AH 11  is determined according to a designated protocol identifier being one of the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The third electricity application target BC 11  is associated with the seventh application memory address AH 11 . The first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  is stored at the seventh application memory location YH 11  based on the seventh application memory address AH 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: A first user input operation PU 81  using the first electricity application target BU 81  is received to provide a first operation request message QN 81 . A second user input operation PU 91  being after the first user input operation PU 81  is received. A second operation request message QN 91  is provided in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . A data preparation phase UP 1  is entered in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . In addition, second electronic data DE 21  is prepared in the data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  is read in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The stored first communication protocol identifiers HP 1  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is read in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored first communication protocol identifiers HP 1 . In addition, the stored second communication protocol identifiers HP 2  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is read in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: A third user input operation PK 51  is received in the data preparation phase UP 1 . A first data acquisition operation EF 51  is performed in response to the third user input operation PK 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. The first application memory address AU 51  is fetched in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The obtained first communication target identifier HT 11  is stored at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the fetched first application memory address AU 51 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: A fourth user input operation PK 61  is received in the data preparation phase UP 1 . A second data acquisition operation EF 61  is performed in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. The second application memory address AU 61  is fetched in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . In addition, the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21  is stored at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the fetched second application memory address AU 61 . 
     The step of preparing the second electronic data DE 21  includes the following sub-steps: A fifth user input operation PV 11  being before the second user input operation PU 91  is received in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide input data DB 11 . In response to obtaining the input data DB 11 , a third data acquisition operation EH 11  is performed to fetch the second electronic data DE 21  determined according to the obtained input data DB 11 . The sixth application memory address AB 21  is fetched in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The second address pointer LP 21  is read to fetch the fourth application memory address AG 21  based on the fetched sixth application memory address AB 21 . In addition, the fetched second electronic data DE 21  is stored at the fourth application memory location YG 21  based on the fetched fourth application memory address AG 21 . For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with the stored second electronic data DE 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: In the data preparation phase UP 1 , a sixth user input operation PV 21  is received between the fifth user input operation PV 11  and the second user input operation PU 91 . In addition, a third operation request message QV 11  is provided in response to the sixth user input operation PV 21  using the third electricity application target BC 11 . For example, the third electricity application target BC 11  is associated with the stored second address pointer LP 21 , the seventh application memory address AH 11 , the stored first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  and the first address pointer LP 11 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The designated protocol identifier HPA is used to fetch the seventh application memory address AH 11  in response to the third operation request message QV 11 . The first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  stored at the seventh application memory location YH 11  is read based on the fetched seventh application memory address AH 11 . The stored first data derivation rule RY 11  is read based on the read first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . In addition, the second electronic data DE 21  stored at the fourth application memory location YG 21  is read in response to the third operation request message QV 11  to obtain the second electronic data DE 21 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The read second electronic data DE 21  is processed to form third electronic data DE 1 A based on the read first data derivation rule RY 11 , wherein the third electronic data DE 1 A is equal to one of the obtained second electronic data DE 21  and a portion of the read second electronic data DE 21 . In addition, under a condition that the third electronic data DE 1 A is formed, a data derivation operation EK 11  is performed to form the first electronic data DE 11  derived from the third electronic data DE 1 A. For example, the first electronic data DE 11  is the same as or different from the third electronic data DE 1 A. The data derivation operation EK 11  is one of a null derivation operation and a practical derivation operation. 
     The method further includes the following steps: The fifth application memory address AB 11  is fetched in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The first address pointer LP 11  is read based on the fetched fifth application memory address AB 11  to fetch the third application memory address AG 11 . In addition, the formed first electronic data DE 11  is stored at the third application memory location YG 11  based on the fetched third application memory address AG 11 . For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is further associated with the stored first electronic data DE 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the method further includes the following steps: the data preparation phase UP 1  is left to enter a data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , wherein the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  is accessed in the data transmission phase UT 1 , and the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is accessed in the data transmission phase UT 1  to obtain the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . In addition, the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is accessed in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  is used to obtain the first application memory address AU 51  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The first communication target identifier HT 11  stored at the first application memory location YU 51  is accessed based on the obtained first application memory address AU 51 . The accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is used to obtain the second application memory address AU 61  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . In addition, the second communication target identifier HT 21  stored at the second application memory location YU 61  is accessed based on the obtained second application memory address AU 61 . 
     The method further includes the following steps: The accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is used to obtain the sixth application memory address AB 21  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The second address pointer LP 21  is accessed based on the obtained sixth application memory address AB 21  to obtain the fourth application memory address AG 21 . The second electronic data DE 21  stored at the fourth application memory location YG 21  is accessed based on the obtained fourth application memory address AG 21 . In addition, the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is used to send the accessed second electronic data DE 21  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed second electronic data DE 21 , the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the accessed second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the sub-step of using the stored first address pointer LP 11  to access the stored first electronic data DE 11  includes the following sub-steps: The obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  is used to obtain the fifth application memory address AB 11  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The first address pointer LP 11  is accessed based on the obtained fifth application memory address AB 11  to obtain the third application memory address AG 11 . In addition, the first electronic data DE 11  stored at the third application memory location YG 11  is accessed based on the obtained third application memory address AG 11 . 
     The step of sending the accessed first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  includes a sub-step that: the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is used to send the accessed first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed first electronic data DE 11 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the accessed first communication target identifier HT 11 . The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from a group consisting of an email communication protocol, an instant-messaging communication protocol, a short-message service communication protocol and a multimedia-message service communication protocol. The first communication target identifier HT 11  is the same as or different from the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The first communication target  511  is the same as or different from the second communication target  521 . 
     Please refer to  FIGS.  24 ,  25 ,  26  and  27   . An electronic device  400  for sending first electronic data DE 11  toward a first communication target  511  is disclosed. The electronic device  400  includes a storage unit  320 , an input unit  340  and a processing unit  310 . The input unit  340  receives a first user input operation PU 81  and a second user input operation PU 91  occurred later than the first user input operation PU 81 . 
     The processing unit  310  is coupled to the storage unit  320  and the input unit  340 , obtains a first communication protocol identifier HP 1  configured to identify a first specific application communication protocol PC 11  in response to the first user input operation PU 81 , causes the storage unit  320  to store the first electronic data DE 11  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , accesses the stored first electronic data DE 11  in response to the second user input operation PU 91 , and sends the accessed first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  400  further includes an electricity application target BR 11  coupled to the processing unit  310 . The storage unit  320  has a volatile memory space SV 51  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and stores second electronic data DE 21 , a first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 , and a first data derivation rule RY 11  identified by the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . For example, each of the first electronic data DE 11  and the second electronic data DE 21  is stored in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The electricity application target BR 11  is associated with the second electronic data DE 21  and the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . 
     At an acquisition time TE 11  occurring between the first and the second user input operations PU 81  and PU 91 , the processing unit  310  reads the stored second electronic data DE 21  and the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  by means of the electricity application target BR 11 . The processing unit  310  reads the first data derivation rule RY 11  based on the read first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 , and processes the read second electronic data DE 21  to form the stored first electronic data DE 11  based on the read first data derivation rule RY 11 . 
     After the processing unit  310  sends the accessed first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , the input unit  340  receives a third user input operation PZ 82  to provide an operation request message QZ 82  to the processing unit  310 . The processing unit  310 , in response to the operation request message QZ 82 , replaces the stored first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  with a second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  being different from the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . For example, the second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  is configured to identify a second data derivation rule RY 12  being different from the first data derivation rule RY 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  320  has a volatile memory space SV 51  coupled to the processing unit  310 . The first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is selected from a plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The processing unit  310  further obtains a second communication protocol identifier HP 2  configured to identify a second specific application communication protocol PC 21  in response to the first user input operation PU 81 , accesses second electronic data DE 21  stored in the volatile memory space SV 51  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and sends the accessed second electronic data DE 21  toward a second communication target  521  based on the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  400  further includes an input unit  340  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and a display unit  330  coupled to the processing unit  310 . One of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes a first electricity application target BU 81  coupled to the processing unit  310 . One of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes a second electricity application target BU 91  coupled to the processing unit  310 . For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is the same as or different from the first electricity application target BU 81 . One of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes a third electricity application target BC 11  coupled to the processing unit  310 . For example, the electricity application target BR 11  is the third electricity application target BC 11 . 
     Each of the first and the second communication protocol identifiers HP 1  and HP 2  belongs to a communication protocol identifier group GH 1  identified by a protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The storage unit  320  stores the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  associated with the first electricity application target BU 81 , a first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  associated with the third electricity application target BC 11 , and a first data derivation rule RY 11  identified by the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . 
     The storage unit  320  further stores a first communication target identifier HT 11  associated with the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and a second communication target identifier HT 21  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the first communication target identifier HT 11  is configured to identify the second communication target  511 . The second communication target identifier HT 21  is configured to identify a second communication target  521 . 
     The storage unit  320  has a first application memory location YU 51  identified based on a first application memory address AU 51 , and a second application memory location YU 61  identified based on a second application memory address AU 61 . For example, each of the first and the second application memory locations YU 51  and YU 61  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The first application memory address AU 51  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The second application memory address AU 61  is determined according to the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     The storage unit  320  further has a third application memory location YG 11  identified by a third application memory address AG 11 , and a fourth application memory location YG 21  identified by a fourth application memory address AG 21 . For example, each of the third and the fourth application memory locations YG 11  and YG 21  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . The first electronic data DE 11  is configured to be stored at the third application memory location YG 11 . The second electronic data DE 21  is configured to be stored at the fourth application memory location YG 21 . 
     The storage unit  320  further stores a first address pointer LP 11  associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and a second address pointer LP 21  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the first address pointer LP 11  points to the third application memory address AG 11 . The second address pointer LP 21  points to the fourth application memory address AG 21 . 
     The storage unit  320  further has a fifth application memory location YB 11  identified by a fifth application memory address AB 11 , and a sixth application memory location YB 21  identified by a sixth application memory address AB 21 . For example, the fifth application memory address AB 11  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The sixth application memory address AB 21  is determined according to the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The first address pointer LP 11  is configured to be stored at the fifth application memory location YB 11 . The second address pointer LP 21  is configured to be stored at the sixth application memory location YB 21 . 
     The storage unit  320  further has a seventh application memory location YH 11  identified by a seventh application memory address AH 11 . For example, the seventh application memory address AH 11  is determined according to a designated protocol identifier HPA being one of the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The third electricity application target BC 11  is associated with the seventh application memory address AH 11 . The first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  is stored at the seventh application memory location YH 11  based on the seventh application memory address AH 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  340  receives a first user input operation PU 81  using the first electricity application target BU 81  to provide a first operation request message QN 81  to the processing unit  310 . The input unit  340  receives a second user input operation PU 91  occurred later than the first user input operation PU 81 , and provides a second operation request message QN 91  to the processing unit  310  in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . The processing unit  310  enters a data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 , and causes the storage unit  320  to prepare second electronic data DE 21  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     The processing unit  310  accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310 , in the data preparation phase UP 1 , accesses the stored first communication protocol identifiers HP 1  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored first communication protocol identifiers HP 1 . The processing unit  310  accesses the stored second communication protocol identifiers HP 2  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored second communication protocol identifiers HP 2 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  340  receives a third user input operation PK 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310  performs a first data acquisition operation EF 51  in response to the third user input operation PK 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. The processing unit  310  fetches the first application memory address AU 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11  at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the fetched first application memory address AU 51 . 
     The input unit  340  receives a fourth user input operation PK 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310  performs a second data acquisition operation EF 61  in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. The processing unit  310  fetches the second application memory address AU 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21  at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the fetched second application memory address AU 61 . 
     The input unit  340  receives a fifth user input operation PV 11  occurred earlier than the second user input operation PU 91  in the data preparation phase UP 1  to provide input data DB 11  to the processing unit  310 . The processing unit  310 , in response to obtaining the input data DB 11 , performs a third data acquisition operation EH 11  to fetch the second electronic data DE 21  determined according to the obtained input data DB 11 . 
     The processing unit  310  fetches the sixth application memory address AB 21  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , reads the second address pointer LP 21  to fetch the fourth application memory address AG 21  based on the fetched sixth application memory address AB 21 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the fetched second electronic data DE 21  at the fourth application memory location YG 21  based on the fetched fourth application memory address AG 21 . For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with the stored second electronic data DE 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the third electricity application target BC 11  is associated with the stored second address pointer LP 21 , the seventh application memory address AH 11 , the stored first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  and the first address pointer LP 11 . The input unit  340 , in the data preparation phase UP 1 , receives a sixth user input operation PV 21  between the fifth user input operation PV 11  and the second user input operation PU 91 , and provides a third operation request message QV 11  to the processing unit  310  in response to the sixth user input operation PV 21  using the third electricity application target BC 11 . 
     The processing unit  310  uses the designated protocol identifier HPA to fetch the seventh application memory address AH 11  in response to the third operation request message QV 11 , reads the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  stored at the seventh application memory location YH 11  based on the fetched seventh application memory address AH 11 , and reads the stored first data derivation rule RY 11  based on the read first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . The processing unit  310  uses the read fourth application memory address AG 21  to read the second electronic data DE 21  stored at the fourth application memory location YG 21  in response to the third operation request message QV 11  to obtain the stored second electronic data DE 21  from the storage unit  320 . 
     The processing unit  310  processes the obtained second electronic data DE 21  to form third electronic data DE 1 A based on the read first data derivation rule RY 11 . For example, the third electronic data DE 1 A is equal to one of the obtained second electronic data DE 21  and a portion of the obtained second electronic data DE 21 . The processing unit  310  applies the read first data derivation rule RY 11  to the obtained second electronic data DE 21  to form the third electronic data DE 1 A derived from the obtained second electronic data DE 21 . 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  310  forms the third electronic data DE 1 A, the processing unit  310  performs a data derivation operation EK 11  to form the first electronic data DE 11  derived from the third electronic data DE 1 A. For example, the first electronic data DE 11  is the same as or different from the third electronic data DE 1 A. The data derivation operation EK 11  is one of a null derivation operation and a practical derivation operation. 
     The processing unit  310  fetches the fifth application memory address AB 11  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , reads the first address pointer LP 11  based on the fetched fifth application memory address AB 11  to fetch the third application memory address AG 11 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the formed first electronic data DE 11  at the third application memory location YG 11  based on the fetched third application memory address AG 11 . For example, the second user input operation PU 91  is further associated with the stored first electronic data DE 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  leaves the data preparation phase UP 1  to enter a data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . The processing unit  310  uses the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the first application memory address AU 51  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , and accesses the first communication target identifier HT 11  stored at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the obtained first application memory address AU 51 . The processing unit  310  uses the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the second application memory address AU 61  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , and accesses the second communication target identifier HT 21  stored at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the obtained second application memory address AU 61 . 
     The processing unit  310  uses the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the fifth application memory address AB 11  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , accesses the first address pointer LP 11  based on the obtained fifth application memory address AB 11  to obtain the third application memory address AG 11 , and accesses the first electronic data DE 11  stored at the third application memory location YG 11  based on the obtained third application memory address AG 11 . 
     The processing unit  310  uses the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the sixth application memory address AB 21  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , accesses the second address pointer LP 21  based on the obtained sixth application memory address AB 21  to obtain the fourth application memory address AG 21 , and accesses the second electronic data DE 21  stored at the fourth application memory location YG 21  based on the obtained fourth application memory address AG 21 . 
     The processing unit  310  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the accessed first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed first electronic data DE 11 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the accessed first communication target identifier HT 11 . The processing unit  310  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the accessed second electronic data DE 21  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed second electronic data DE 21 , the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the accessed second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from a group consisting of an email communication protocol, an instant-messaging communication protocol, a short-message service communication protocol and a multimedia-message service communication protocol. The first communication target identifier HT 11  is the same as or different from the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The first communication target  511  is the same as or different from the second communication target  521 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  28   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8614  of the communication system  861  shown in  FIG.  24   . As shown in  FIG.  28   , the implementation structures  8614  includes the electronic device  400 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  400  is to communicate with at least one of the first and the second communication targets  511  and  521 , and includes the processing unit  310 , the storage unit  320  coupled to the processing unit  310 , the input unit  340  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and the display unit  330  coupled to the processing unit  310 . Each of the storage unit  320 , the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  is controlled by the processing unit  310 . The storage unit  320  has the volatile memory space SV 51  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  coupled to the processing unit  310 . 
     In some embodiments, one of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes an electricity application target BZ 82  coupled to the processing unit  310 . The electricity application target BZ 82  is associated with the seventh application memory address AH 11 . After the processing unit  310  sends the accessed first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , the input unit  340  receives the user input operation PZ 82  using the electricity application target BZ 82  to provide the operation request message QZ 82  to the processing unit  310 . The processing unit  310 , in response to the operation request message QZ 82 , performs a data acquisition operation EM 12  to obtain the second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  being different from the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 , and uses the designated protocol identifier HPA to obtain the seventh application memory address AH 11  in response to the operation request message QZ 82 . 
     The storage unit  320  further stores the second data derivation rule RY 12  identified by the second data derivation rule identifier HH 12 . The processing unit  310  replaces the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  stored at the seventh application memory location YH 11  with the second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  based on the obtained seventh application memory address AH 11 . 
     Therefore, the third electricity application target BC 11  becomes to be associated with the second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  and the second data derivation rule RY 12 . For example, the data acquisition operation EM 12  is one of a data encoding operation and a data access operation. Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EM 12  is the data encoding operation, the data encoding operation uses the stored first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  to obtain the second data derivation rule identifier HH 12 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  320  further has an application memory location YH 32  identified based on an application memory address AH 32 . For example, the application memory address AH 32  is determined according to the designated protocol identifier HPA. The second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  is stored at the application memory location YH 32  based on the application memory address AH 32 . Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EM 12  is the data access operation, the data access operation uses the designated protocol identifier HPA to obtain the application memory address AH 32 , and accesses the second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  stored at the application memory location YH 32  based on the obtained application memory address AH 32  to obtain the second data derivation rule identifier HH 12 . 
     For example, the electricity application target BZ 82  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored designated protocol identifier HPA, the application memory address AH 32 , and the second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  stored at the application memory location YH 32 . For example, the processing unit  310  reads the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in response to the operation request message QZ 82 , and reads the stored designated protocol identifier HPA belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored designated protocol identifier HPA. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  29   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8615  of the communication system  861  shown in  FIG.  24   . As shown in  FIG.  29   , the implementation structure  8615  includes the electronic device  400 , the first communication target  511 , the second communication target  521 , a communication target  512  and a communication target  522 . The electronic device  400  is to communicate with at least one of the first communication target  511 , the second communication target  521 , the communication target  512  and the communication target  522 , and includes the processing unit  310 , the storage unit  320  coupled to the processing unit  310 , the input unit  340  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and the display unit  330  coupled to the processing unit  30 . Each of the storage unit  320 , the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  is controlled by the processing unit  310 . The storage unit  320  has a volatile memory space SV 51  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and a nonvolatile memory space SN 51  coupled to the processing unit  310 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  320  further has an application memory location YK 51  identified based on an application memory address AK 51 . For example, the application memory address AK 51  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The storage unit  320  further stores a target identifier set identifier HE 51  and a communication target identifier set WV 51  identified by the target identifier set identifier HE 51 . For example, the target identifier set identifier HE 51  is stored at the application memory location YK 51  based on the application memory address AK 51 . The processing unit  310  causes the storage unit  320  to store the communication target identifier set WV 51  in the volatile memory space SV 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310  obtains the application memory address AK 51  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses the target identifier set identifier HE 51  stored at the application memory location YK 51  based on the obtained application memory address AK 51 . 
     Under a condition that the communication target identifier set WV 51  consists of a plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . and the plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . are configured to respectively identify a plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . , the processing unit  310  accesses the plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . based on the accessed target identifier set identifier HE 51 . The processing unit  310  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the accessed first electronic data DE 11  toward each of the plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . based on the accessed first electronic data DE 11 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the accessed plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  320  further has an application memory location YK 61  identified based on an application memory address AK 61 . For example, the application memory address AK 61  is determined according to the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The storage unit  320  further stores a target identifier set identifier HE 61  and a communication target identifier set WV 61  identified by the target identifier set identifier HE 61 . For example, the target identifier set identifier HE 61  is stored at the application memory location YK 61  based on the application memory address AK 61 . The processing unit  310  causes the storage unit  320  to store the communication target identifier set WV 61  in the volatile memory space SV 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310  obtains the application memory address AK 61  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and accesses the target identifier set identifier HE 61  stored at the application memory location YK 61  based on the obtained application memory address AK 61 . 
     Under a condition that the communication target identifier set WV 61  consists of a plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . and the plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . are configured to respectively identify a plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . , the processing unit  310  accesses the plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . based on the accessed target identifier set identifier HE 61 . The processing unit  310  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the accessed second electronic data DE 21  toward each of the plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . based on the accessed second electronic data DE 21 , the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the accessed plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . . 
     For example, the plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . constitutes a first communication target set  510 . The plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . constitutes a second communication target set  520 . The communication target identifier set WV 51  is configured to identify the first communication target set  510 . The communication target identifier set WV 61  is configured to identify the second communication target set  520 . 
     For example, the prepared first communication target identifier HT 11  is stored at the application memory location YU 51 . The application memory location YU 51  is identified by the application memory address AU 51 , or is identified based on the application memory address AU 51 . The application memory address AU 51  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored target identifier set identifier HE 51 . The prepared second communication target identifier HT 21  is stored at the application memory location YU 61 . The application memory location YU 61  is identified by the application memory address AU 61 , or is identified based on the application memory address AU 61 . The application memory address AU 61  is determined according to the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the stored target identifier set identifier HE 61 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  30    and  FIG.  31   .  FIG.  30    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8616  of the communication system  861  shown in  FIG.  24   .  FIG.  31    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8617  of the communication system  861  shown in  FIG.  24   . As shown in  FIGS.  30  and  31   , any of the implementation structures  8616  and  8617  includes the electronic device  400 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  400  is to communicate with at least one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 , and includes the processing unit  310 , the storage unit  320  coupled to the processing unit  310 , the input unit  340  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and the display unit  330  coupled to the processing unit  310 . Each of the storage unit  320 , the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  is controlled by the processing unit  310 . 
     One of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes an electricity application target BX 51  coupled to the processing unit  310 . One of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes an electricity application target BX 61  coupled to the processing unit  310 . One of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes an electricity application target BY 21  coupled to the processing unit  310 . For example, the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 21  are respectively located at different spatial locations. 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  320  further stores a target identifier set identifier HG 51  and a communication target identifier set WM 51  identified by the target identifier set identifier HG 51 , and further has an application memory location YE 51  associated with the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the communication target identifier set WM 51  includes the first communication target identifier HT 11 , and is stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  beforehand. The target identifier set identifier HG 51  is stored at the application memory location YE 51  based on an application memory address AE 51  determined according to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . 
     The input unit  340  receives the third user input operation PK 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310  performs the first data acquisition operation EF 51  in response to the third user input operation PK 51  using the electricity application target BX 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. The first data acquisition operation EF 51  is one of a data acquisition action EF 5 A and a first data acquisition action EF 5 B. The processing unit  310  fetches the first application memory address AU 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11  at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the fetched first application memory address AU 51 . 
     Under a condition that the first data acquisition operation EF 51  is the data acquisition action EF 5 A: the input unit  340  provides input data DC 51  to the processing unit  310  in response to the third user input operation PK 51 ; and the processing unit  310 , based on the input data DC 51 , obtains the first communication target identifier HT 11  determined according to the input data DC 51 . 
     Under a condition that the first data acquisition operation EF 51  is the first data acquisition action EF 5 B: the processing unit  310  is configured to use the read or accessed first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the application memory address AE 51 ; the processing unit  310  reads the target identifier set identifier HG 51  stored at the application memory location YE 51  based on the obtained application memory address AE 51 ; and the processing unit  310  reads communication target identifier data DH 51  belonging to the communication target identifier set WM 51  based on the read target identifier set identifier HG 51 , wherein the communication target identifier data DH 51  includes the first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     Under a condition that the first data acquisition operation EF 51  is the first data acquisition action EF 5 B, the processing unit  310  performs a data selection operation ES 51  in response to the third user input operation PK 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  from the communication target identifier data DH 51 . For example, the processing unit  310  causes the display unit  330  to perform a display operation EL 51  associated with the read first communication target identifier HT 11  in response to reading the communication target identifier data DH 51  to display a communication target identification information MH 51  associated with the read first communication target identifier HT 11 . Under a condition that the display unit  330  displays the communication target identification information MH 51 , the processing unit  310  performs the data selection operation ES 51  in response to the third user input operation PK 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  320  further stores a target identifier set identifier HG 61  and a communication target identifier set WM 61  identified by the target identifier set identifier HG 61 , and further has an application memory location YE 61  associated with the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the communication target identifier set WM 61  includes the second communication target identifier HT 21 , and is stored in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  beforehand. The target identifier set identifier HG 61  is stored at the application memory location YE 61  based on an application memory address AE 61  determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     The input unit  340  receives the fourth user input operation PK 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310  performs the second data acquisition operation EF 61  in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  using the electricity application target BX 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. The second data acquisition operation EF 61  is one of a data acquisition action EF 6 A and a second data acquisition action EF 6 B. The processing unit  310  fetches the second application memory address AU 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21  at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the fetched second application memory address AU 61 . 
     The processing unit  310  performs the second data acquisition operation EF 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. The second data acquisition operation EF 61  is one of a data acquisition action EF 6 A and a second data acquisition action EF 6 B. The processing unit  310  fetches the second application memory address AU 61  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21  at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the fetched second application memory address AU 61 . For example, each of the first and the second application memory locations YU 51  and YU 61  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . 
     Under a condition that the second data acquisition operation EF 61  is the data acquisition action EF 6 A: the input unit  340  provides input data DC 61  to the processing unit  310  in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61 ; and the processing unit  310 , based on the input data DC 61 , obtains the second communication target identifier HT 21  determined according to the input data DC 61 . 
     Under a condition that the second data acquisition operation EF 61  is the second data acquisition action EF 6 B: the processing unit  310  is configured to use the read or accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the application memory address AE 61 ; the processing unit  310  reads the target identifier set identifier HG 61  stored at the application memory location YE 61  based on the obtained application memory address AE 61 ; and the processing unit  310  reads communication target identifier data DH 61  belonging to the communication target identifier set WM 61  based on the read target identifier set identifier HG 61 , wherein the communication target identifier data DH 61  includes the second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     Under a condition that the second data acquisition operation EF 61  is the second data acquisition action EF 6 B, the processing unit  310  performs a data selection operation ES 61  in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  from the communication target identifier data DH 61 . For example, the processing unit  310  causes the display unit  330  to perform a display operation EL 61  associated with the read second communication target identifier HT 21  in response to reading the communication target identifier data DH 61  to display a communication target identification information MH 61  associated with the read second communication target identifier HT 21 . Under a condition that the display unit  330  displays the communication target identification information MH 61 , the processing unit  310  performs the data selection operation ES 61  in response to the fourth user input operation PK 61  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     For example, the first communication target identifier HT 11  belonging to the communication target identifier set WM 51  is stored at a first practical memory location. The first practical memory location is identified by a first practical memory address, or is identified based on the first practical memory address. The first practical memory address is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored target identifier set identifier HG 51 . The second communication target identifier HT 21  belonging to the communication target identifier set WM 61  is stored at a second practical memory location. The second practical memory location is identified by a second practical memory address, or is identified based on the second practical memory address. The second practical memory address is determined according to the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the stored target identifier set identifier HG 61 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  340  provides the input data DB 11  to the processing unit  310  in response to the fifth user input operation PV 11  using the electricity application target BY 21 . The electricity application target BY 21  is associated with the sixth application memory address AB 21  and the second address pointer LP 21 . The processing unit  310  fetches the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2  in the data preparation phase UP 1  by means of the electricity application target BY 21 , fetches the sixth application memory address AB 21  based on the fetched second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and reads the second address pointer LP 21  based on the fetched sixth application memory address AB 21  to fetch the fourth application memory address AG 21 . 
     The processing unit  310 , in response to obtaining the input data DB 11 , fetches the second electronic data DE 21  determined according to the obtained input data DB 11 . The processing unit  310  fetches the fourth application memory address AG 21 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the fetched second electronic data DE 21  at the fourth application memory location YG 21  based on the fetched fourth application memory address AG 21 . For example, each of the third and the fourth application memory locations YG 11  and YG 21  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51 . 
     For example, the processing unit  310  is configured to cause the storage unit  320  to store, in at least one of the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  and the volatile memory space SV 51 , one selected from a group consisting of the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , the target identifier set identifier HE 51 , the communication target identifier set WV 51 , the target identifier set identifier HE 61 , the communication target identifier set WV 61 , the target identifier set identifier HG 51 , the communication target identifier set WM 51 , the target identifier set identifier HG 61 , the communication target identifier set WM 61  and any combination thereof. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  32   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8619  of the communication system  861  shown in  FIG.  24   . As shown in  FIG.  32   , the implementation structures  8619  includes the electronic device  400 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  400  includes the processing unit  310 , the storage unit  320  coupled to the processing unit  310 , the input unit  340  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and the display unit  330  coupled to the processing unit  310 . Each of the storage unit  320 , the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  is controlled by the processing unit  310 . For example, the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  stored at the seventh application memory location YH 11  is a first active derivation rule identifier or a first current derivation rule identifier. The second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  stored at the seventh application memory location YH 11  is a second active derivation rule identifier or a second current derivation rule identifier. 
     In some embodiments, one of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes an electricity application target BZ 81  coupled to the processing unit  310 . The storage unit  320  stores at the seventh application memory location YH 11  a third data derivation rule identifier HH 13  being different from the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  beforehand. For example, the third data derivation rule identifier HH 13  is configured to identify a third data derivation rule RY 13  being different from the first data derivation rule RY 11 . The input unit  340 , in the data preparation phase UP 1 , receives a user input operation PZ 81  occurred earlier than the sixth user input operation PV 21 . The input unit  340  provides an operation request message QZ 81  to the processing unit  310  in response to the user input operation PZ 81  using the electricity application target BZ 81 . For example, the electricity application target BZ 81  is the same as or different from the electricity application target BZ 82 . 
     The processing unit  310  performs a data acquisition operation EM 11  to obtain the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  in response to the operation request message QZ 81 , fetches the designated protocol identifier HPA in response to the operation request message QZ 81 , and fetches the seventh application memory address AH 11  based on the fetched designated protocol identifier HPA. The processing unit  310 , in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the fetched seventh application memory address AH 11 , replaces the third data derivation rule identifier HH 13  stored at the seventh application memory location YH 11  with the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . For example, the data acquisition operation EM 11  is one of a data encoding operation and a data access operation. Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EM 11  is the data encoding operation, the data encoding operation uses the stored third data derivation rule identifier HH 13  to obtain the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . For example, the third data derivation rule identifier HH 13  and the third data derivation rule RY 13  are respectively the same as or different from the second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  and the second data derivation rule RY 12 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  320  further has an application memory location YH 31  identified based on an application memory address AH 31 . For example, the application memory address AH 31  is determined according to the designated protocol identifier HPA. The first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  is stored at the application memory location YH 31  based on the application memory address AH 31 . Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EM 11  is the data access operation, the data access operation uses the designated protocol identifier HPA to obtain the application memory address AH 31 , and accesses the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  stored at the application memory location YH 31  based on the obtained application memory address AH 31  to obtain the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . 
     For example, the electricity application target BZ 81  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored designated protocol identifier HPA, the application memory address AH 31 , and the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  stored at the application memory location YH 31 . For example, the processing unit  310  reads the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in response to the operation request message QZ 81 , and reads the stored designated protocol identifier HPA belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored designated protocol identifier HPA. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  33   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  861 A of the communication system  861  shown in  FIG.  24   . As shown in  FIG.  33   , the implementation structures  861 A includes the electronic device  400 , a message service system  650 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  400  includes the processing unit  310 , the storage unit  320  coupled to the processing unit  310 , the input unit  340  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and the display unit  330  coupled to the processing unit  310 . The message service system  650  includes a first message service device  660  and a second message service device  670 . The processing unit  310  is coupled to the first message service device  660  and the second message service device  670 . The first message service device  660  supports the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The second message service device  670  supports the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and is the same as or different from the first message service device  660 . 
     The processing unit  310  is configured to support the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The storage unit  320  stores the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the first electronic data DE 11 , the second electronic data DE 21 , the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , the first communication target identifier HT 11 , the second communication target identifier HT 21 , the first address pointer LP 11 , the second address pointer LP 21 , the target identifier set identifier HE 51 , the communication target identifier set WV 51  identified by the target identifier set identifier HE 51 , the target identifier set identifier HE 61 , the communication target identifier set WV 61  identified by the target identifier set identifier HE 61 , the target identifier set identifier HG 51 , the communication target identifier set WM 51  identified by the target identifier set identifier HG 51 , the target identifier set identifier HG 61 , and the communication target identifier set WM 61  identified by the target identifier set identifier HG 61 . 
     At least one of the electricity application target BY 21  and the first electricity application target BU 81  is associated with the application memory address AG 21 . The second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with at least one of the application memory addresses AG 11  and AG 21 . The processing unit  310  fetches the application memory address AG 21  in the data preparation phase UP 1  by using the second address pointer AG 21 . The input unit  340  in the data preparation phase UP 1  receives the fifth user input operation PV 11  using the electricity application target BY 21  to provide the input data DB 11  to the processing unit  310 . 
     The processing unit  310 , in response to obtaining the input data DB 11 , uses the fetched application memory address AG 21  to cause the storage unit  320  to store at the application memory location YG 21  the second electronic data DE 21  determined according to the obtained input data DB 11 . The processing unit  310  obtains the application memory address AG 21  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , and accesses the second electronic data DE 21  stored at the application memory location YG 21  based on the obtained application memory address AG 21  to send the accessed second electronic data DE 21 . For example, the electricity application target BY 21  is one of a display area and a sensing area. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  accesses or reads the first electronic data DE 11 , the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the first communication target identifier HT 11 , which are stored in the storage unit  320 , in response to the second operation request message QN 91  to obtain the stored first electronic data DE 11 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored first communication target identifier HT 11 , and uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to transmit an electronic message QA 31  toward the first message service device  660  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained electronic data DE 61 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11 . The electronic message QA 31  includes the first electronic data DE 11 . 
     For example, the electronic message QA 31  is or serves as an instruction message used to instruct the first message service device  660 . The first message service device  660  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to transmit an electronic message QA 41  toward the first communication target  511  in response to the electronic message QA 31 , so that the first communication target  511  receives the electronic message QA 41  in a specific application communication protocol PC 51  being matched with or equal to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The electronic message QA 41  includes the first electronic data DE 11 . 
     The processing unit  310  accesses or reads the second electronic data DE 21 , the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 , which are stored in the storage unit  320 , in response to the second operation request message QN 91  to obtain the stored second electronic data DE 21 , the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the stored second communication target identifier HT 21 , and uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to transmit an electronic message QA 91  toward the second message service device  670  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained second electronic data DE 21 , the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21 . The electronic message QA 91  includes the second electronic data DE 21 . 
     For example, the electronic message QA 91  is or serves as an instruction message used to instruct the second message service device  670 . The second message service device  670  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to transmit an electronic message QAA 1  toward the second communication target  521  in response to the electronic message QA 91 , so that the second communication target  521  receives the electronic message QAA 1  in a specific application communication protocol PC 81  being matched with or equal to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The electronic message QAA 1  includes the second electronic data DE 21 . 
     The input unit  340  provides the second operation request message QN 91  at a provision time TB 11  in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . For example, the data transmission phase UT 1  immediately follows the provision time TB 11 , and has a time length. For example, the time length is equal to one selected from a group consisting of 10 minutes, 5 minutes, 3 minutes, 2 minutes, 1 minute, 50 seconds, 40 seconds, 30 seconds, 20 seconds, 10 seconds, 5 seconds, 3 seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second and 0.5 second. In some embodiments, when the processing unit  310  is configured to cause the data transmission phase UT 1  to end, the processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  400  to enter a data preparation phase UP 2  being after the data transmission phase UT 1 . For example, the processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  400  to enter the data preparation phase UP 2  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  400  is used by a user  910 . The input unit  340  receives from the user  910  at least one selected from a plurality of user input operations. The plurality of user input operations include the first user input operation PU 81 , the second user input operation PU 91 , the third user input operation PK 51 , the fourth user input operation PK 61 , the fifth user input operation PV 11 , the sixth user input operation PV 21 , the user input operation PZ 81  and the user input operation PZ 82 . In some embodiments, the electronic device  400  is used by a plurality of users including the user  910 . The input unit  340  is operated by the plurality of users to receive the plurality of user input operations. For example, the plurality of users are different. 
     In some embodiments, each of the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from a group consisting of the email communication protocol, the instant-messaging communication protocol, the short-message service communication protocol and the multimedia-message service communication protocol. For example, the first operation request message QN 81  and the second operation request message QN 91  are a plurality of user request messages, respectively. For example, the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . constitute an application communication protocol group GP 1 . The communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is configured to identify the application communication protocol group GP 1 . 
     For example, the processing unit  310  reads at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . For example, the processing unit  310  accesses at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  receives the second electronic data DE 21  from an external device  505  in the data preparation phase UP 1 , and stores the received second electronic data DE 21  into the storage unit  320  in response to receiving the second electronic data DE 21 . For example, the external device  505  is coupled to the processing unit  310 . Please additionally refer to  FIG.  5   . In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  accesses the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , and accesses the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  stored at the application memory location YC 81  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the first ordinal number NP 1 . The processing unit  310  accesses the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  stored at the application memory location YC 91  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the second ordinal number NP 2 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  34   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  861 B of the communication system  861  shown in  FIG.  24   . As shown in  FIG.  34   , the implementation structure  861 B includes the electronic device  400 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  400  includes the processing unit  310 , the storage unit  320  coupled to the processing unit  310 , the input unit  340  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and the display unit  330  coupled to the processing unit  310 . Each of the storage unit  320 , the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  is controlled by the processing unit  310 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  400  includes the first electricity application target BU 81 , the second electricity application target BU 91 , the electricity application target BX 51 , the electricity application target BX 61 , the electricity application target BY 21 , the third electricity application target BC 11 , the electricity application target BZ 81  and the electricity application target BZ 82 , each of which is coupled to the processing unit  310 . The first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 21 , the third electricity application target BC 11 , and the electricity application targets BZ 81  and BZ 82  are respectively located at a spatial location EU 81 , a spatial location EU 91 , a spatial location EX 51 , a spatial location EX 61 , a spatial location EY 21 , a spatial location EC 11 , a spatial location EZ 81  and a spatial location EZ 82 . 
     For example, the spatial locations EU 81 , EU 91 , EX 51 , EX 61 , EY 21 , EC 11 , EZ 81  and EZ 82  are different. For example, two selected from a group consisting of the spatial locations EU 81 , EU 91 , EX 51 , EX 61 , EY 21 , EC 11 , EZ 81  and EZ 82  are the same. The first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 21 , the third electricity application target BC 11 , and the electricity application targets BZ 81  and BZ 82  respectively have a plurality of electricity application areas, or are respectively formed by the plurality of electricity application areas. 
     For example, the input unit  340  includes one selected from a group consisting of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 21 , the third electricity application target BC 11 , the electricity application targets BZ 81  and BZ 82 , and any combination thereof. Any of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 21 , the third electricity application target BC 11 , and the electricity application targets BZ 81  and BZ 82  is a sensing target, wherein the sensing target includes one selected from a group consisting of a sensing area, a push button and a touch point. 
     The processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  400  to enter the data preparation phase UP 1  by means of the first electricity application target BU 81 . The processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  400  to leave the data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the data transmission phase UT 1  by means of the second electricity application target BU 91 . The processing unit  310  obtains the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored by means of the electricity application target BX 51 . The processing unit  310  obtains the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored by means of the electricity application target BX 61 . The processing unit  310  obtains the input data DB 11  by means of the electricity application target BY 21 . 
     The processing unit  310  processes the obtained second electronic data DE 21  to form the first electronic data DE 11  by means of the third electricity application target BC 11 . The processing unit  310  performs the data acquisition operation EM 11  to obtain the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  by means of the electricity application target BZ 81 , and stores the obtained first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  to the seventh application memory location YH 11 . The processing unit  310  performs the data acquisition operation EM 12  to obtain the second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  by means of the electricity application target BZ 82 , and stores the obtained second data derivation rule identifier HH 12  to the seventh application memory location YH 11 . 
     For example, the display unit  330  includes one selected from a group consisting of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 21 , the third electricity application target BC 11 , the electricity application targets BZ 81  and BZ 82 , and any combination thereof. For example, the processing unit  310  is configured to cause the display unit  330  to display the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91  at the same time or for different times. For example, the processing unit  310  is configured to cause the display unit  330  to display at least two selected from a group consisting of the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 21 , the third electricity application target BC 11 , and the electricity application targets BZ 81  and BZ 82  at the same time or for different times. 
     For example, any of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 21 , the third electricity application target BC 11 , and the electricity application targets BZ 81  and BZ 82  is a display target, wherein the display target includes one selected from a group consisting of a display area, an icon and a display action item. 
     The first electricity application target BU 81  is associated with at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the stored first communication target identifier HT 11 , the stored second communication target identifier HT 21 , the stored target identifier set identifier HE 51 , the stored target identifier set identifier HE 61 , the stored target identifier set identifier HG 51  and the stored target identifier set identifier HG 61 . The second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the stored first electronic data DE 11 , the stored second electronic data DE 21 , the stored target identifier set identifier HE 51  and the stored target identifier set identifier HE 61 . 
     The electricity application target BX 51  is associated with at least one of the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the first application memory address AU 51 . The electricity application target BX 61  is associated with at least one of the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the second application memory address AU 61 . The electricity application target BY 21  is associated with the fourth application memory address AG 21 , and is used to obtain the input data DB 11 . The third electricity application target BC 11  is associated with the stored second address pointer LP 21 , the seventh application memory address AH 11 , the stored first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  and the first address pointer LP 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the electricity application target BY 21  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The input unit  340  provides an operation request message QK 21  to the processing unit  310  in response to the fifth user input operation PV 11  using the electricity application target BY 21 . The processing unit  310  reads or accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in response to the operation request message QK 21 , and reads the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the second ordinal number NP 2 . 
     The third electricity application target BC 11  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The input unit  340  provides the third operation request message QV 11  to the processing unit  310  in response to the sixth user input operation PV 21  using the third electricity application target BC 11 . The processing unit  310  reads or accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in response to the third operation request message QV 11 , and reads the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  and the second ordinal number NP 2 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  is configured to cause the display unit  330  to display a selection tool TK 11 . The first user input operation PU 81  uses or selects the first electricity application target BU 81  displayed by the display unit  330  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  340  to provide the first operation request message QN 81  to the processing unit  310 . The second user input operation PU 91  uses or selects the second electricity application target BU 91  displayed by the display unit  330  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  340  to provide the second operation request message QN 91  to the processing unit  310 . 
     The third user input operation PK 51  uses the electricity application target BX 51  displayed by the display unit  330  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the processing unit  310  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. The fourth user input operation PK 61  uses the electricity application target BX 61  displayed by the display unit  330  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the processing unit  310  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. The fifth user input operation PV 11  uses the electricity application target BY 21  displayed by the display unit  330  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the processing unit  310  to obtain the input data DB 11 . 
     The sixth user input operation PV 21  uses the third electricity application target BC 11  displayed by the display unit  330  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  340  to provide the third operation request message QV 11  to the processing unit  310 . The user input operation PZ 81  uses the electricity application target BZ 81  displayed by the display unit  330  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  340  to provide the operation request message QZ 81  to the processing unit  310 . The user input operation PZ 82  uses the electricity application target BZ 82  displayed by the display unit  330  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  340  to provide the operation request message QZ 82  to the processing unit  310 . For example, the selection tool TK 11  is a cursor. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  35   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  861 C of the communication system  861  shown in  FIG.  24   . As shown in  FIG.  35   , the implementation structure  861 C includes the electronic device  400 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  400  includes the processing unit  310 , and the storage unit  320  coupled to the processing unit  310 . The storage unit  320  is controlled by the processing unit  310 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  36    and  FIG.  37   .  FIG.  36    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  861 D of the communication system  861  shown in  FIG.  24   .  FIG.  37    is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  861 E of the communication system  861  shown in  FIG.  24   . As shown in  FIGS.  36  and  37   , each of the implementation structures  861 D and  861 E includes the electronic device  400 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  400  includes the processing unit  310 , the storage unit  320  coupled to the processing unit  310 , the input unit  340  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and the display unit  330  coupled to the processing unit  310 . Each of the storage unit  320 , the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  is controlled by the processing unit  310 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  400  for sending first electronic data DE 11  includes a storage unit  320 , an electricity-using target BU 21  and a processing unit  310 . The storage unit  320  stores the first electronic data DE 11 . The processing unit  310  is coupled to the storage unit  320  and the electricity-using target BU 21 , is configured to obtain a first communication protocol identifier HP 1  configured to identify a first specific application communication protocol PC 11  by means of the electricity-using target BU 21 , accesses the stored first electronic data DE 11  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and sends the accessed first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  400  sequentially experiences a data transmission phase UT 7 , a data preparation phase UP 1  and a data transmission phase UT 1 , sends second electronic data DE 21  in the data transmission phase UT 7 , prepares in the data preparation phase UP 1  the first electronic data DE 11  derived from the second electronic data DE 21 , and sends the first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is selected from a plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belongs to a communication protocol identifier group GH 1  identified by a protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The storage unit  320  further stores the communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , and a first address pointer LP 11  associated with the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the first electronic data DE 11 . 
     The processing unit  310  is configured to access the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , and accesses the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  from the storage unit  320 . The processing unit  310  uses the stored first address pointer LP 11  to access the stored first electronic data DE 11  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . 
     In some embodiments, one of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes a first electricity application target BU 81  coupled to the processing unit  310 . One of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes a second electricity application target BU 91  coupled to the processing unit  310 . For example, the second electricity application target BU 91  is the same as or different from the first electricity application target BU 81 . The electricity-using target BU 21  is the second electricity application target BU 91 . One of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes a third electricity application target BC 11  coupled to the processing unit  310 . The stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include a second communication protocol identifier HP 2  configured to identify a second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . 
     The storage unit  320  further stores a first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  associated with the third electricity application target BC 11 , and a first data derivation rule RY 11  identified by the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . The storage unit  320  further stores a first communication target identifier HT 11  associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and a second communication target identifier HT 21  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the first communication target identifier HT 11  is configured to identify the first communication target  511 . The second communication target identifier HT 21  is configured to identify a second communication target  521 . 
     The storage unit  320  has a first application memory location YU 51  identified based on a first application memory address AU 51 , and a second application memory location YU 61  identified based on a second application memory address AU 61 . For example, the first application memory address AU 51  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The second application memory address AU 61  is determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     The storage unit  320  further has a third application memory location YG 11  identified by a third application memory address AG 11 , and a fourth application memory location YG 21  identified by a fourth application memory address AG 21 . For example, the first electronic data DE 11  is configured to be stored at the third application memory location YG 11 . The second electronic data DE 21  is configured to be stored at the fourth application memory location YG 21 . The storage unit  320  further stores a second address pointer LP 21  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the first address pointer LP 11  points to the third application memory address AG 11 . The second address pointer LP 21  points to the fourth application memory address AG 21 . 
     The storage unit  320  further has a fifth application memory location YB 11  identified by a fifth application memory address AB 11 , and a sixth application memory location YB 21  identified by a sixth application memory address AB 21 . For example, the fifth application memory address AB 11  is determined according to the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The sixth application memory address AB 21  is determined according to the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The first address pointer LP 11  is configured to be stored at the fifth application memory location YB 11 . The second address pointer LP 21  is configured to be stored at the sixth application memory location YB 21 . 
     The storage unit  320  further has a seventh application memory location YH 11  identified by a seventh application memory address AH 11 . For example, the seventh application memory address AH 11  is determined according to a designated protocol identifier HPA being one of the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The third electricity application target BC 11  is associated with the seventh application memory address AH 11 . The first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  is stored at the seventh application memory location YH 11  based on the seventh application memory address AH 11 . 
     In some embodiments, each of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91  is associated with the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The input unit  340  receives a first user input operation PU 81  using the first electricity application target BU 81  to provide a first operation request message QN 81  to the processing unit  310 . The input unit  340  receives a second user input operation PU 91  occurred later than the first user input operation PU 81 , and provides a second operation request message QN 91  to the processing unit  310  in response to the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 . 
     The processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  400  to enter the data transmission phase UT 7  and the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . For example, when the processing unit  310  is configured to cause the data transmission phase UT 7  to end, the processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  400  to leave the data transmission phase UT 7  to enter the data preparation phase UP 1  being after the data transmission phase UT 7 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data transmission phase UT 7 , and accesses the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  in the data transmission phase UT 7  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The processing unit  310  uses the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the second application memory address AU 61  in the data transmission phase UT 7 , and accesses the second communication target identifier HT 21  stored at the second application memory location YU 61  based on the obtained second application memory address AU 61 . 
     The processing unit  310  uses the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the sixth application memory address AB 21  in the data transmission phase UT 7 , accesses the second address pointer LP 21  based on the obtained sixth application memory address AB 21  to obtain the fourth application memory address AG 21 , and accesses the second electronic data DE 21  stored at the fourth application memory location YG 21  based on the obtained fourth application memory address AG 21 . The processing unit  310  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the accessed second electronic data DE 21  toward the second communication target  521  in the data transmission phase UT 7  based on the accessed second electronic data DE 21 , the accessed second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the accessed second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  400  to leave the data transmission phase UT 7  to enter the data preparation phase UP 1  in response to sending the accessed second electronic data DE 21 . The processing unit  310  causes the storage unit  320  to prepare first electronic data DE 11  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310  reads the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     The processing unit  310 , in the data preparation phase UP 1 , reads the stored first communication protocol identifiers HP 1  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored first communication protocol identifiers HP 1 . The processing unit  310  reads the stored second communication protocol identifiers HP 2  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     The input unit  340  receives a third user input operation PK 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310  performs a first data acquisition operation EF 51  in response to the third user input operation PK 51  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. The processing unit  310  fetches the first application memory address AU 51  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11  at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the fetched first application memory address AU 51 . 
     In some embodiments, the third electricity application target BC 11  is associated with the stored second address pointer LP 21 , the seventh application memory address AH 11 , the stored first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  and the first address pointer LP 11 . The input unit  340 , in the data preparation phase UP 1 , receives a sixth user input operation PV 21  between the first user input operation PU 81  and the second user input operation PU 91 , and provides a third operation request message QV 11  to the processing unit  310  in response to the sixth user input operation PV 21  using the third electricity application target BC 11 . 
     The processing unit  310  uses the designated protocol identifier HPA to fetch the seventh application memory address AH 11  in response to the third operation request message QV 11 , reads the first data derivation rule identifier HH 11  stored at the seventh application memory location YH 11  based on the fetched seventh application memory address AH 11 , and reads the stored first data derivation rule RY 11  based on the read first data derivation rule identifier HH 11 . The processing unit  310  reads the second electronic data DE 21  stored at the fourth application memory location YG 21  in response to the third operation request message QV 11  to obtain the stored second electronic data DE 21  from the storage unit  320 . 
     The processing unit  310  processes the read second electronic data DE 21  to form third electronic data DE 1 A based on the read first data derivation rule RY 11 . For example, the third electronic data DE 1 A is equal to one of the obtained second electronic data DE 21  and a portion of the read second electronic data DE 21 . The processing unit  310  applies the read first data derivation rule RY 11  to the read second electronic data DE 21  to form the third electronic data DE 1 A derived from the read second electronic data DE 21 . Under a condition that the processing unit  310  forms the third electronic data DE 1 A, the processing unit  310  performs a data derivation operation EK 11  to form the first electronic data DE 11  derived from the third electronic data DE 1 A. For example, the first electronic data DE 11  is the same as or different from the third electronic data DE 1 A. The data derivation operation EK 11  is one of a null derivation operation and a practical derivation operation. 
     The processing unit  310  fetches the fifth application memory address AB 11  in the data preparation phase UP 1  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , reads the first address pointer LP 11  based on the fetched fifth application memory address AB 11  to fetch the third application memory address AG 11 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the formed first electronic data DE 11  at the third application memory location YG 11  based on the fetched third application memory address AG 11 . For example, the second user input operation PU 91  is further associated with the stored first electronic data DE 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  leaves the data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 , and accesses the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the data transmission phase UT 1 . The processing unit  310  accesses the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the stored communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the accessed protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  to obtain the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . 
     The processing unit  310  uses the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the first application memory address AU 51  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , and accesses the first communication target identifier HT 11  stored at the first application memory location YU 51  based on the obtained first application memory address AU 51 . The processing unit  310  uses the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the fifth application memory address AB 11  in the data transmission phase UT 1 , accesses the first address pointer LP 11  based on the obtained fifth application memory address AB 11  to obtain the third application memory address AG 11 , and accesses the first electronic data DE 11  stored at the third application memory location YG 11  based on the obtained third application memory address AG 11 . 
     The processing unit  310  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the accessed first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  in the data transmission phase UT 1  based on the accessed first electronic data DE 11 , the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the accessed first communication target identifier HT 11 . The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from a group consisting of an email communication protocol, an instant-messaging communication protocol, a short-message service communication protocol and a multimedia-message service communication protocol. The first communication target identifier HT 11  is the same as or different from the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The first communication target  511  is the same as or different from the second communication target  521 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  38   , which is a schematic diagram showing a communication system  801  according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. The communication system  801  includes an electronic device  700 , a first communication target  511  and a second communication target  521 . For example, the electronic device  700  is to communicate with the first communication target  511 . The electronic device  700  includes a storage unit  720  and a processing unit  710 . The storage unit  720  stores a first communication protocol identifier HP 1  configured to identify a first specific application communication protocol PC 1 . The processing unit  710  is coupled to the storage unit  720 . In addition, the processing unit  710 , in response to a specific request signal QK 1 , obtains an electronic data DE 61  and a first communication target identifier HT 11  accessed based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to send the electronic data DE 61  in the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  toward the first communication target  511  identified by the first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  is configured to correspond to a first specific data capacity value VC 61  representing a first data capacity CD 61 . For example, the first specific data capacity value VC 61  is determined beforehand. The processing unit  710  obtains the first specific data capacity value VC 61  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The processing unit  710  allocates in the storage unit  720  a first storage space SS 21  having the first data capacity CD 61  based on the first specific data capacity value VC 61  to obtain a first memory address AM 21  configured to identify the first storage space SS 21 . The processing unit  710  allocates a storage block BS 21  in the storage unit  720  to obtain a storage address AS 21  configured to identify the storage block BS 21 . For example, the storage address AS 21  is dependent on or independent from the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . 
     Under a condition that the storage address AS 21  is dependent on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the processing unit  710  obtains the storage address AS 21  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and causes a display unit  730  to display the electronic data DE 61  on a display block BD 21  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . Under a condition that the storage address AS 21  is independent from the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the processing unit  710  obtains the storage address AS 21  being independent from the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The first specific application communication protocol PC 11  has a first target identifier format stipulation SF 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the specific request signal QK 1  is one of a first effective request signal QR 1  and a second effective request signal QU 1 . The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  700  to enter a first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first effective request signal QR 1 . In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  obtains or determines the electronic data DE 61  and the first communication target identifier HT 11  complying with the first target identifier format stipulation SF 1 , causes the storage unit  720  to store the first communication target identifier HT 11  in the first storage space SS 21  based on the obtained first memory address AM 21 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the electronic data DE 61  in the storage block BS 21  based on the obtained storage address AS 21 . The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  700  to leave the first data preparation phase UP 1  to enter a first data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second effective request signal QU 1 . 
     For example, the first effective request signal QR 1  includes a first operation request message QN 81 . The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  700  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . The second effective request signal QU 1  includes a second operation request message QN 91 . The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  700  to leave the first data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the first data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     In the first data transmission phase UT 1  being after the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  accesses the first communication target identifier HT 11  stored in the first storage space SS 21  based on the obtained first memory address AM 21  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11 , accesses the electronic data DE 61  stored in the storage block BS 21  based on the obtained storage address AS 21  to obtain the electronic data DE 61 , and uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in response to obtaining the first communication target identifier HT 11  and the electronic data DE 61 . For example, the processing unit  710  obtains the first memory address AM 21  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and thereby accesses the first communication target identifier HT 11  stored in the first storage space SS 21  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . Under a condition that the storage address AS 21  is dependent on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the storage block BS 21  is located in one of the inside and the outside of the first storage space SS 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belongs to a specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage unit  720 . The processing unit  710  obtains the first communication protocol identifiers HP 1  and a second communication protocol identifier HP 2  from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  including the first and the second communication protocol identifiers HP 1  and HP 2 . For example, the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is a specific communication protocol identifier array, and is determined beforehand. For example, the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is configured to identify a second specific application communication protocol PC 21  being different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     The second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is configured to correspond to a second specific data capacity value VC 62  representing a second data capacity CD 62 . For example, the second specific data capacity value VC 62  is the same as or different from the first specific data capacity value VC 61 , and is determined beforehand. The processing unit  710  obtains the second specific data capacity value VC 62  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The processing unit  710  allocates in the storage unit  720  a second storage space SS 22  having the second data capacity CD 62  based on the second specific data capacity value VC 62  to obtain a second memory address AM 22  configured to identify the second storage space SS 22 . For example, the second storage space SS 22  is different from the first storage space SS 21 . Under a condition that the storage address AS 21  is independent from the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and is dependent on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the processing unit  710  obtains the storage address AS 21  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     The second specific application communication protocol PC 21  has a second target identifier format stipulation SF 2 . In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  obtains the second communication target identifier HT 21  complying with the second target identifier format stipulation SF 2 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the second communication target identifier HT 21  in the second storage space SS 22  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22 . For example, the second communication target identifier HT 21  is configured to identify the second communication target  521 . 
     In the first data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  accesses the second communication target identifier HT 21  stored in the second storage space SS 22  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21 , and uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in response to obtaining the second communication target identifier HT 21  and the electronic data DE 61 . For example, the processing unit  710  obtains the second memory address AM 22  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and thereby accesses the second communication target identifier HT 21  stored in the second storage space SS 22  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     The storage address AS 21  is dependent on a third communication protocol identifier HP 3  selected from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . The third communication protocol identifier HP 3  is configured to identify a third specific application communication protocol PC 31 . The specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is configured to identify a specific application communication protocol group GP 1  consisting of a plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . Each of the first, the second and the third specific application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21  and PC 31  belongs to the specific application communication protocol group GP 1 . 
     Each of the first and the second specific application communication protocols PC 11  and PC 21  is one selected from a plurality of predetermined application communication protocols. For example, the plurality of predetermined application communication protocols include one selected from a group consisting of an email communication protocol, a short-message service communication protocol, a multimedia-message service communication protocol and an instant-messaging communication protocol. The third specific application communication protocol PC 31  is one selected from a group consisting of the email communication protocol, the short-message service communication protocol, the multimedia-message service communication protocol and the instant-messaging communication protocol. The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from the plurality of predetermined application communication protocols. For example, the plurality of predetermined application communication protocols are respectively a plurality of predetermined data transmission communication protocols. Under a condition that the storage address AS 21  is dependent on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the storage block BS 21  is located in one of the inside and the outside of the second storage space SS 22 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  39   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8011  of the communication system  801  shown in  FIG.  38   . As shown in  FIG.  39   , the implementation structure  8011  includes the electronic device  700 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  700  further includes a display unit  730  coupled to the processing unit  710 . In some embodiments, the display unit  730  includes a first display area KD 21  represented by a first display coordinate data DP 21 , and a display block BD 21  being different from the first display area KD 21 . For example, the first display coordinate data DP 21  is associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and is determined based on the first specific data capacity value VC 61 . The processing unit  710  obtains the first display coordinate data DP 21  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to cause the display unit  730  to display a first communication target identification information MH 11 , representing the first communication target identifier HT 11 , on the first display area KD 21 . In addition, the processing unit  710  causes the display unit  730  to display the electronic data DE 61  on the display block BD 21 . 
     The display unit  730  further includes a second display area KD 22  represented by a second display coordinate data DP 22 . The first display area KD 21 , the second display area KD 22  and the display block BD 21  are different. The second display coordinate data DP 22  is associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and is determined based on the second specific data capacity value VC 62 . The processing unit  710  obtains the second display coordinate data DP 22  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to cause the display unit  730  to display a second communication target identification information MH 21  representing the second communication target identifier HT 21  on the second display area KD 22 . 
     In some embodiments, the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is identified by a protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The storage unit  720  stores the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  and the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The processing unit  710  is configured to support the first and the second specific application communication protocols PC 11  and PC 21 , is configured to read the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 , and obtains the stored first and the stored second communication protocol identifiers HP 1  and HP 2  from the stored specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  40   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8012  of the communication system  801  shown in  FIG.  38   . Please additionally refer to  FIG.  38   . The implementation structure  8012  includes the electronic device  700  and the first communication target  511 . The electronic device  700  includes the storage unit  720 , the processing unit  710 , and an input unit  740  coupled to the processing unit  710 . The storage unit  720  includes a storage area KS 2 , the first storage space SS 21 , the second storage space SS 22  and the storage block BS 21 , and stores the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . For example, the first storage space SS 21  is one of a first nonvolatile memory space and a first volatile memory space. The second storage space SS 22  is one of a second nonvolatile memory space and a second volatile memory space. The storage block BS 21  is one of a nonvolatile memory block and a volatile memory block. 
     The first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  corresponds to the first specific data capacity value VC 61  determined according to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the first specific data capacity value VC 61  represents the first data capacity CD 61  used to allocate the first storage space SS 21 , and is determined according to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  beforehand. 
     The processing unit  710  obtains the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , obtains the first specific data capacity value VC 61  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and allocates in the storage unit  720  the first storage space SS 21  having the first data capacity CD 61  based on the first specific data capacity value VC 61  to obtain the first memory address AM 21  configured to identify the first storage space SS 21 . For example, the first storage space SS 21  is located at a first memory location PM 21  identified by the first memory address AM 21 , and is thereby identified by the first memory address AM 21 . For example, the storage unit  720  has the first memory location PM 21  identified based on the first memory address AM 21 . The first memory address AM 21  is determined according to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  720  stores in the storage area KS 2  the first memory address AM 21  corresponding to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The processing unit  710 , based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  obtained from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 2 , accesses the first memory address AM 21  stored in the storage area KS 2  to obtain the first memory address AM 21  from the storage area KS 2 . 
     The processing unit  710  obtains the first memory address AM 21  to identify the first storage space SS 21 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store in the first storage space SS 21  a first application data DA 21 , including the electronic data DE 61  and the first communication target identifier HT 11 , based on the obtained first memory address AM 21 . For example, the first storage space SS 21  is allocated enough to contain the first application data DA 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . The third communication protocol identifier HP 3  is configured to identify the third specific application communication protocol PC 31  included in the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The storage block BS 21  is allocated based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , and is identified by the storage address AS 21 . When the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  is the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the storage address AS 21  is dependent on the first memory address AM 21 . When the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  is the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the storage address AS 21  is dependent on the second memory address AM 22 . 
     The third communication protocol identifier HP 3  corresponds to a third specific data capacity value VC 63  determined according to the third specific application communication protocol PC 31 . For example, the third specific data capacity value VC 63  represents a third data capacity CD 63  used to allocate the storage block BS 21 , and is determined according to the third specific application communication protocol PC 31  beforehand. The third specific data capacity value VC 63  and the third data capacity CD 63  are respectively a first data limit length value VF 21  and a first data limit length LF 21 . The third specific data capacity value VC 63  is different from any of the first and the second specific data capacity values VC 61  and VC 62 , so that the third data capacity CD 63  is different from any of the first and the second data capacities CD 61  and CD 62 . 
     Under a condition that the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are considered, the first data limit length value VF 21  is one selected from a group consisting of a longest limit length value, a shortest limit length value, and a middle limit length value. When the first data limit length value VF 21  is the longest limit length value, the third specific application communication protocol PC 31  is one of the email communication protocol and the multimedia-message service communication protocol. When the first data limit length value VF 21  is the shortest limit length value, the third specific application communication protocol PC 31  is one of the short-message service communication protocol and the instant-messaging communication protocol. 
     The processing unit  710  obtains the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , obtains the third specific data capacity value VC 63  based on the obtained third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , and allocates in the storage unit  720  the storage block BS 21  having the third data capacity CD 63  based on the third specific data capacity value VC 63  to obtain the storage address AS 21  configured to identify the storage block BS 21 . 
     For example, the storage block BS 21  is located at a storage location PB 21  identified by the storage address AS 21 , and is thereby identified by the storage address AS 21 . The processing unit  710  obtains the storage address AS 21  to identify the storage block BS 21 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the electronic data DE 61  in the storage block BS 21  based on the obtained storage address AS 21 . For example, the storage block BS 21  is allocated enough to contain the electronic data DE 61 , and is a storage space. For example, the storage location PB 21  is a memory location. 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  720  includes the storage area KS 2  being different from the first storage space SS 21 , and stores in the storage area KS 2  the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , the first specific data capacity value VC 61  corresponding to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and the third specific data capacity value VC 63  corresponding to the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . For example, the storage area KS 2  is one of a nonvolatile memory area and a volatile memory area, and is a storage space. 
     The processing unit  710  obtains the first, the second and the third communication protocol identifiers HP 1 , HP 2  and HP 3  from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 2 , accesses the first specific data capacity value VC 61  stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the first specific data capacity value VC 61  from the storage area KS 2 , and accesses the third specific data capacity value VC 63  stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the obtained third communication protocol identifier HP 3  to obtain the third specific data capacity value VC 63  from the storage area KS 2 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  720  stores in the storage area KS 2  the first memory address AM 21  configured to correspond to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and stores the storage address AS 21  in the storage area KS 2 . For example, the storage address AS 21  is a memory address. The processing unit  710  accesses the first memory address AM 21  stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the first memory address AM 21  from the storage area KS 2 , and obtains the storage address AS 21  from the storage area KS 2  by accessing the storage address AS 21  stored in the storage area KS 2 . Under a condition that the storage address AS 21  is configured to correspond to the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , the processing unit  710  accesses the storage address AS 21  stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the obtained third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  700  is identified by a first source target identifier HS 11  under the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the first source target identifier HS 11  complies with the first target identifier format stipulation SF 1 . The storage unit  720  further stores in the storage area KS 2  the first source target identifier HS 11  corresponding to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and a first candidate target identifier set WM 1  corresponding to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . For example, the first candidate target identifier set WM 1  complies with the first target identifier format stipulation SF 1 . 
     The storage unit  720  further stores in the storage area KS 2  a target identifier set identifier HG 11  configured to identify the first candidate target identifier set WM 1 . The storage unit  720  is configured to have in the storage area KS 2  an application memory location YE 11  associated with the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the target identifier set identifier HG 11  is stored at the application memory location YE 11  identified based on an application memory address AE 11 . For example, the application memory location YE 11  is identified by the application memory address AE 11 . The application memory address AE 11  is determined according to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . 
     The storage unit  720  includes the storage block BS 21 . The storage block BS 21  has the third data capacity CD 63 . The third data capacity CD 63  corresponds to the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , is determined according to the third specific application communication protocol PC 31  beforehand, and is a longest limit length under a condition that the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are considered. In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  obtains the electronic data DE 61  having an electronic data length LN 61 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the electronic data DE 61  in the storage block BS 21  based on the storage address AS 21 . For example, the electronic data length LN 61  is less than or equal to the first data limit length LF 21 , and is represented by an electronic data length value VN 61 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  stores in the first storage space SS 21  the first application data DA 21  to be applied to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  based on the obtained first memory address AM 21  and the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . For example, the first application data DA 21  includes the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the first source target identifier HS 11 , a first variable logical value VL 11  and a first variable target identifier set WV 1 . The first variable target identifier set WV 1  is configured to identify a first variable target set (not shown). The obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  corresponds to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  of the first application data DA 21 , corresponds to the first source target identifier HS 11  of the first application data DA 21 , corresponds to the first variable logical value VL 11 , and corresponds to the first variable target identifier set WV 1 . The first variable logical value VL 11  is associated with that whether a first data transmission TD 1  toward the first variable target set is to be enabled in the first data transmission phase UT 1  being after the first data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  700  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  at a first request time TR 1  in response to a first effective request signal QR 1 . For example, the first effective request signal QR 1  is one of a first interrupt request signal and a first input request message. In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  stores or writes the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  into the first storage space SS 21  based on the obtained first memory address AM 21 , accesses or reads the first source target identifier HS 11  stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the first source target identifier HS 11  from the storage area KS 2 , and thereby stores or writes the obtained first source target identifier HS 11  into the first storage space SS 21  based on the obtained first memory address AM 21 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710 , based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , determines a first referential logical value VR 11  representing that whether the processing unit  710  currently supports the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  obtains a first desired logical value VK 11  corresponding to the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , determines a first operational logical value VQ 11  by performing a first logical AND operation PA 11  to the first referential logical value VR 11  and the first desired logical value VK 11 , and assigns the first operational logical value VQ 11  to the first variable logical value VL 11  based on the obtained first memory address AM 21 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  optionally obtains at least a first desired target identifier HK 11 , and causes the obtained at least a first desired target identifier HK 11  to join the first variable target identifier set WV 1  based on the obtained first memory address AM 21 . For example, the at least a first desired target identifier HK 11  complies with the first target identifier format stipulation SF 1 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  optionally accesses at least a first candidate target identifier HM 11  being in a first candidate target identifier set WM 1  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to select the at least a first candidate target identifier HM 11  from the first candidate target identifier set WM 1 , and causes the selected at least a first candidate target identifier HM 11  to join the first variable target identifier set WV 1  based on the obtained first memory address AM 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  receives a first user input operation PU 81 , and provides the first effective request signal QR 1  to the processing unit  710  in response to the first user input operation PU 81 . The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  700  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to one of the first effective request signal QR 1  and the first operation request message QN 81 , and reads the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     The input unit  740  receives a user input operation PK 11  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  710  performs a data acquisition operation EF 11  in response to the user input operation PK 11 . The data acquisition operation EF 11  is one of a data acquisition action EF 1 A and a data acquisition action EF 1 B. The processing unit  710  uses the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the first memory address AM 21  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EF 11  is the data acquisition action EF 1 A, the processing unit  710  performs the data acquisition action EF 1 A to obtain the at least a first desired target identifier HK 11  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 , and causes the obtained at least a first desired target identifier HK 11  to join the first variable target identifier set WV 1  based on the obtained first memory address AM 21 . 
     Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EF 11  is the data acquisition action EF 1 B: the processing unit  710  uses the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the application memory address AE 11  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 ; the processing unit  710  reads the target identifier set identifier HG 11  stored at the application memory location YE 11  based on the obtained application memory address AE 11 ; and the processing unit  710  accesses the at least a first candidate target identifier HM 11  belonging to the first candidate target identifier set WM 1  based on the read target identifier set identifier HG 11  to select the at least a first candidate target identifier HM 11  from the first candidate target identifier set WM 1 . 
     Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EF 11  is the data acquisition action EF 1 B: the processing unit  710  uses the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the first memory address AM 21  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 ; and the processing unit  710  causes one of the selected at least a first candidate target identifier HM 11  and the accessed at least a first candidate target identifier HM 11  to join the first variable target identifier set WV 1  based on the obtained first memory address AM 21 . The input unit  740  receives a user input operation PW 24  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  710  obtains the storage address AS 21  in the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the user input operation PW 24 , and causes the storage unit  720  to prepare the electronic data DE 61  in the storage block BS 21  based on the obtained storage address AS 21 . 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  710  finishes preparing the first application data DA 21  and the electronic data DE 61 , the input unit  740  receives a second user input operation PU 91 , and provides the second effective request signal QU 1  to the processing unit  710  in response to the second user input operation PU 91 . The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  700  to leave the first data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the first data transmission phase UT 1  in response to one of the second effective request signal QU 1  and the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  41   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8013  of the communication system  801  shown in  FIG.  38   . Please additionally refer to  FIGS.  38  and  40   . The implementation structure  8013  includes the electronic device  700 , a message service system  650  and a first communication target set  510 . The message service system  650  includes a first message service device  660 . The first communication target set  510  includes the first communication target  511  and a communication target  512 . 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the processing unit  710  finishes preparing the electronic data DE 61  and the first application data DA 21 , the processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  700  to enter the first data transmission phase UT 1  being after the first data preparation phase UP 1  at a second request time TR 2  being after the first request time TR 1  in response to the second effective request signal QU 1 , and thereby separately checks the stored electronic data DE 61  and the stored first application data DA 21  based on the obtained storage address AS 21  and the obtained first memory address AM 21 . For example, the processing unit  710  receives the second effective request signal QU 1  in response to finishing preparing the electronic data DE 61  and the first application data DA 21 . For example, the second effective request signal QU 1  is one of a second interrupt request signal and a second input request message. 
     When the electronic device  700  enters the first data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  checks the electronic data DE 61  based on the obtained storage address AS 21 , confirms that the first variable logical value VL 11  and the first variable target identifier set WV 1  respectively become a first effective logical value VE 11  and a first communication target identifier set WT 1 , and thereby checks the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the stored first source target identifier HS 11 , the stored first effective logical value VE 11  and the stored first communication target identifier set WT 1 , which are stored in the first storage space SS 21 , based on the obtained first memory address AM 21 . For example, the stored first communication target identifier set WT 1  is configured to identify the first communication target set  510 . The first communication target identifier HT 11  belonging to the first communication target identifier set WT 1  is configured to identify the first communication target  511  belonging to the first communication target set  510 . 
     In some embodiments, in the first data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  obtains the first effective logical value VE 11  from the stored first application data DA 21  based on the obtained first memory address AM 21 , and makes a first logical decision RD 61  on whether the first effective logical value VE 11  stored in the first storage space SS 21  is true by evaluating the obtained first effective logical value VE 11 . 
     When the first logical decision RD 61  is positive, the processing unit  710  makes a second logical decision RD 62  on whether the first communication target identifier set WT 1  stored in the first storage space SS 21  is empty. When the second logical decision RD 62  is positive, the processing unit  710  confirms that the processing unit  710  is prohibited from performing the first data transmission TD 1  toward the first communication target set  510  in the first data transmission phase UT 1 . 
     When the second logical decision RD 62  is negative: the first communication target set  510  consists of one of the first communication target  511  and a first plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . ; the first communication target identifier set WT 1  consists of one of the first communication target identifier HT 11  and a first plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . ; and the processing unit  710  confirms that the processing unit  710  is allowed to use the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to perform the first data transmission TD 1  toward the first communication target set  510  in the first data transmission phase UT 1 . For example, the first plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . include the first communication target  511 , and are respectively a first plurality of external communication device or a first plurality of external electronic device. The first plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , include the first communication target identifier HT 11 . The first communication target identifier HT 11  is one of the first desired target identifier HK 11  and the selected first candidate target identifier HM 11 . 
     The specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . The third communication protocol identifier HP 3  is configured to identify the third specific application communication protocol PC 31  included in the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . For example, the third specific application communication protocol PC 31  is one selected from a group consisting of the email communication protocol, the short-message service communication protocol, the multimedia-message service communication protocol and the instant-messaging communication protocol. 
     The storage unit  720  includes the storage block BS 21  associated with the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . The storage block BS 21  is identified by the storage address AS 21  being dependent on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . When the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  is the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the storage address AS 21  is dependent on the first memory address AM 21 . When the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  is the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the storage address AS 21  is dependent on the second memory address AM 22 . The storage block BS 21  has the third data capacity CD 63 . The third data capacity CD 63  corresponds to the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , and is determined according to the third specific application communication protocol PC 31  beforehand. 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are considered, the first data limit length value VF 21  is one selected from a group consisting of a longest limit length value, a shortest limit length value, and a middle limit length value. The storage unit  720  further stores in the storage area KS 2  a second data limit length value VF 22  corresponding to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . For example, the second data limit length value VF 22  represents a second data limit length LF 22  to be applied to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is determined according to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  beforehand. 
     When the second logical decision RD 62  is negative, the processing unit  710 , based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , further makes a third logical decision RD 63  on whether the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is one of the email communication protocol and the multimedia-message service communication protocol. For example, when the processing unit  710  confirms that the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  is configured to identify one of the email communication protocol and the multimedia-message service communication protocol, the third logical decision RD 63  is made to be positive. 
     When the third logical decision RD 63  is negative, the processing unit  710 , by comparing the second data limit length value VF 22  with the electronic data length value VN 61 , makes a fourth logical decision RD 64  on whether the electronic data DE 61  meets a first specific data length constraint condition CL 21  corresponding to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . For example, under a condition that the third specific data capacity value VC 63  is one of the longest limit length value and the middle limit length value, the processing unit  710  makes the fourth logical decision RD 64 . The first specific data length constraint condition CL 21  is determined according to the second data limit length value VF 22 . When the electronic data length value VN 61  is less than or equal to the second data limit length value VF 22 , the fourth logical decision RD 64  is made to be positive. 
     When the fourth logical decision RD 64  is negative and there is in a first situation: the processing unit  710  splits the electronic data DE 61  to determine a first plurality of operation data portions DF 61  based on the second data limit length value VF 22 ; and the processing unit  710  sequentially performs a first plurality of data transmission portions included in the first data transmission TD 1  to the first plurality of operation data portions DF 61  to send the first plurality of operation data portions DF 61  toward the first communication target  511  under the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , so that the processing unit  710  causes the first communication target  511  to receive the first plurality of operation data portions DF 61  to constitute the electronic data DE 61 . For example, each of the first plurality of operation data portions DF 61  meets the first specific data length constraint condition CL 21 ; and the first plurality of data transmission portions are respectively associated with the first plurality of operation data portions DF 61 . 
     When the fourth logical decision RD 64  is negative and there is in a second situation: the processing unit  710  converts the electronic data DE 61  to determine a first operation data DU 61  meeting the first specific data length constraint condition CL 21  based on the second data limit length value VF 22 ; and the processing unit  710  sends the first operation data DU 61  serving as the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  under the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     Under a condition that the second logical decision RD 62  is negative, the processing unit  710  obtains the electronic data DE 61  from the storage block BS 21  based on the obtained storage address AS 21 , and obtains the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the first source target identifier HS 11  and the first communication target identifier set WT 1  from the stored first application data DA 21  based on the obtained first memory address AM 21 . For example, under a condition that the first communication target identifier set WT 1  consists of the first communication target identifier HT 11 , the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the obtained first source target identifier HS 11 , the obtained electronic data DE 61  and the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  is coupled to the first message service device  660 . For example, the first message service device  660  supports the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is included in the message service system  650 . Under a condition that the third logical decision RD 63  is positive, the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send a first electronic message QE 11  toward the first message service device  660  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the obtained first source target identifier HS 11 , the obtained electronic data DE 61  and the obtained first communication target identifier set WT 1 . For example, the first electronic message QE 11  includes the first source target identifier HS 11 , the electronic data DE 61  and the first communication target identifier set WT 1 , and is or serves as a first instruction message used to instruct the first message service device  660 . 
     Under a condition that the third logical decision RD 63  is positive and the first communication target identifier set WT 1  consists of the first communication target identifier HT 11 , the first message service device  660  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to transmit a second electronic message QE 21  toward the first communication target  511  in response to the first electronic message QE 11 , so that the first communication target  511  receives the second electronic message QE 21  in a fourth specific application communication protocol PC 41  being matched with or equal to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the second electronic message QE 21  includes the first source target identifier HS 11 , the electronic data DE 61  and the first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     Under a condition that the third logical decision RD 63  is positive and the first communication target identifier set WT 1  consists of the first plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . , the first message service device  660  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to separately transmit a first plurality of electronic messages QE 21 , QE 22 , . . . , respectively corresponding to the first plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . , toward the first plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . in response to the first electronic message QE 11 , so that the first plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . respectively receive the first plurality of electronic messages QE 21 , QE 22 , . . . in a first plurality of respective communication protocols, each of which is matched with or equal to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, each of the first plurality of electronic messages QE 21 , QE 22 , includes the first source target identifier HS 11 , the electronic data DE 61  and the first communication target identifier HT 11 . The first communication target  511  included in the first plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . receives the second electronic message QE 21 , included in the first plurality of electronic messages QE 21 , QE 22 , . . . , in the fourth specific application communication protocol PC 41  being matched with or equal to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , wherein the fourth specific application communication protocol PC 41  is included in the first plurality of respective communication protocols. 
     Under a condition that the third logical decision RD 63  is negative and the fourth logical decision RD 64  is positive (or the electronic data length LN 61  is less than or equal to the second data limit length LF 22 ) and the first communication target identifier set WT 1  consists of the first communication target identifier HT 11 : the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send a third electronic message QE 31  toward the first message service device  660  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the obtained first source target identifier HS 11 , the obtained electronic data DE 61  and the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11 , wherein the third electronic message QE 31  includes the first source target identifier HS 11 , the electronic data DE 61  and the first communication target identifier HT 11 ; and the first message service device  660  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to transmit a fourth electronic message QE 41  toward the first communication target  511  in response to the third electronic message QE 31 , so that the first communication target  511  receives the fourth electronic message QE 41  in a fifth specific application communication protocol PC 51  being matched with or equal to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the third electronic message QE 31  is or serves as a second instruction message used to instruct the first message service device  660 . For example, the fourth electronic message QE 41  at least includes the electronic data DE 61 . 
     Under a condition that the third logical decision RD 63  is negative and the fourth logical decision RD 64  is positive (or the electronic data length LN 61  is less than or equal to the second data limit length LF 22 ) and the first communication target identifier set WT 1  consists of the first plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . , for each first respective identifier: the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send a fifth electronic message QE 51  toward the first message service device  660  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the obtained first source target identifier HS 11 , the obtained electronic data DE 61  and the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11 , wherein the fifth electronic message QE 51  includes the first source target identifier HS 11 , the electronic data DE 61  and the first communication target identifier HT 11 ; and the first message service device  660  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to transmit a sixth electronic message QE 61  toward each first respective target, identified by the each first respective identifier, in response to the fifth electronic message QE 51 , so that the each first respective target receives the sixth electronic message QE 61  in a sixth specific application communication protocol PC 61  being matched with or equal to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the respective fifth electronic message QE 51  is or serves as a third instruction message used to instruct the first message service device  660 . For example, the respective sixth electronic message QE 61  at least includes the electronic data DE 61 . 
     Under a condition that the third logical decision RD 63  is negative and the fourth logical decision RD 64  is negative to cause the electronic device  700  to be in the first situation and the first communication target identifier set WT 1  consists of the first communication target identifier HT 11 , for each first respective data portion included in the first plurality of operation data portions DF 61 : the processing unit  710  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the each first respective data portion toward the first communication target  511  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the obtained first source target identifier HS 11 , the obtained each first respective data portion and the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11 , so that the processing unit  710  causes the first communication target  511  to receive the first plurality of operation data portions DF 61  to constitute the electronic data DE 61 . 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the second logical decision RD 62  is negative, the processing unit  710  controls the storage unit  720  based on the obtained storage address AS 21  to obtain the stored electronic data DE 61  from the storage block BS 21 , controls the storage unit  720  based on the obtained first memory address AM 21  to obtain the stored first source target identifier HS 11  and the stored first communication target identifier set WT 1  from the first storage space SS 21 , and thereby outputs one selected from a group consisting of the first electronic message QE 11 , the third electronic message QE 31 , the respective fifth electronic message QE 51  and another functional electronic message. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  42   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8014  of the communication system  801  shown in  FIG.  38   . Please additionally refer to  FIGS.  38 ,  40  and  41   . The implementation structure  8014  includes the electronic device  700  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  700  includes the storage unit  720 , the processing unit  710  and the input unit  740 . The storage unit  720  includes the storage area KS 2 . The second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belongs to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 2 , and is configured to identify the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is one selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is one selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . 
     The storage unit  720  further stores in the storage area KS 2  the second specific data capacity value VC 62  corresponding to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The second specific data capacity value VC 62  is determined according to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  beforehand, and represents the second data capacity CD 62  used to allocate the second storage space SS 22 . The second specific data capacity value VC 62  is different from the first specific data capacity value VC 61 , so that the second data capacity CD 62  is different from the first data capacity CD 61 . The second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is used to allocate the second storage space SS 22 . 
     The processing unit  710  obtains the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 2 , obtains the second specific data capacity value VC 62  from the storage area KS 2  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and allocates in the storage unit  720  the second storage space SS 22  having the second data capacity CD 62  based on the obtained second specific data capacity value VC 62  to obtain the second memory address AM 22  configured to identify the second storage space SS 22 . 
     For example, the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  corresponds to the second memory address AM 22  by corresponding to the second specific data capacity value VC 62 . The second storage space SS 22  is located at a second memory location PM 22  identified by the second memory address AM 22 , and is thereby identified by the second memory address AM 22 . The second memory location PM 22  corresponds to the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and is different from the first memory location PM 21 . The second data capacity CD 62  is the same as or different from the first data capacity CD 61 . The second storage space SS 22  is different from each of the storage area KS 2  and the first storage space SS 21 . For example, the storage unit  720  has the second memory location PM 22  identified based on the second memory address AM 22 . The second memory address AM 22  is determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belonging to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  720  stores in the storage area KS 2  the second memory address AM 22  corresponding to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The processing unit  710 , based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  obtained from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 2 , accesses the second memory address AM 22  stored in the storage area KS 2  to obtain the second memory address AM 22  from the storage area KS 2 . The processing unit  710  obtains the second memory address AM 22  to identify the second storage space SS 22 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store in the first storage space SS 22  a second application data DA 22 , including the second communication target identifier HT 21 , based on the obtained second memory address AM 22 . For example, the second storage space SS 22  is allocated enough to contain the second application data DA 22 . 
     In some embodiments, the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is one selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The electronic device  700  is identified by a second source target identifier HS 21  under the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the second source target identifier HS 21  complies with the second target identifier format stipulation SF 2 . The storage unit  720  further stores in the storage area KS 2  the second source target identifier HS 21  corresponding to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and a second candidate target identifier set WM 2  corresponding to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the second candidate target identifier set WM 2  complies with the second target identifier format stipulation SF 2 . 
     The storage unit  720  further stores in the storage area KS 2  a target identifier set identifier HG 21  configured to identify the second candidate target identifier set WM 2 . The storage unit  720  is configured to have in the storage area KS 2  an application memory location YE 21  associated with the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the target identifier set identifier HG 21  is stored at the application memory location YE 21  identified based on an application memory address AE 21 . For example, the application memory location YE 21  is identified by the application memory address AE 21 . The application memory address AE 21  is determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belonging to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  stores in the first storage space SS 22  the second application data DA 22  to be applied to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22  and the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the second application data DA 22  includes the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the second source target identifier HS 21 , a second variable logical value VL 21  and a second variable target identifier set WV 2 . 
     The second variable target identifier set WV 2  is configured to identify a second variable target set (not shown). The obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  corresponds to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  of the second application data DA 22 , corresponds to the second source target identifier HS 21  of the second application data DA 22 , corresponds to the second variable logical value VL 21 , and corresponds to the second variable target identifier set WV 2 . The second variable logical value VL 21  is associated with that whether a second data transmission TD 2  toward the second variable target set is to be enabled in the first data transmission phase UT 1 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  stores or writes the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  into the second storage space SS 22  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22 , accesses or reads the second source target identifier HS 21  stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the second source target identifier HS 21  from the storage area KS 2 , and thereby stores or writes the obtained second source target identifier HS 21  into the second storage space SS 22  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710 , based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , determines a second referential logical value VR 21  representing that whether the processing unit  710  currently supports the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  obtains a second desired logical value VK 21  corresponding to the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , determines a second operational logical value VQ 21  by performing a second logical AND operation PA 21  to the second referential logical value VR 21  and the second desired logical value VK 21 , and assigns the second operational logical value VQ 21  to the second variable logical value VL 21  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  optionally obtains at least a second desired target identifier HK 21 , and causes the obtained at least a second desired target identifier HK 21  to join the second variable target identifier set WV 2  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22 . For example, the at least a second desired target identifier HK 21  complies with the second target identifier format stipulation SF 2 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  optionally accesses at least a second candidate target identifier HM 21  being in a second candidate target identifier set WM 2  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to select the at least a second candidate target identifier HM 21  from the second candidate target identifier set WM 2 , and causes the selected at least a second candidate target identifier HM 21  to join the second variable target identifier set WV 2  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  reads the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belonging to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 . The input unit  740  receives a user input operation PK 21  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  710  performs a data acquisition operation EF 21  in response to the user input operation PK 21 . The data acquisition operation EF 21  is one of a data acquisition action EF 2 A and a data acquisition action EF 2 B. The processing unit  710  uses the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the second memory address AM 22  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EF 21  is the data acquisition action EF 2 A, the processing unit  710  performs the data acquisition action EF 2 A to obtain the at least a second desired target identifier HK 21  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 , and causes the obtained at least a second desired target identifier HK 21  to join the second variable target identifier set WV 2  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22 . 
     Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EF 21  is the data acquisition action EF 2 B: the processing unit  710  uses the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the application memory address AE 21  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 ; the processing unit  710  reads the target identifier set identifier HG 21  stored at the application memory location YE 21  based on the obtained application memory address AE 21 ; and the processing unit  710  accesses the at least a second candidate target identifier HM 21  belonging to the second candidate target identifier set WM 2  based on the read target identifier set identifier HG 21  to select the at least a second candidate target identifier HM 21  from the second candidate target identifier set WM 2 . 
     Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EF 21  is the data acquisition action EF 2 B: the processing unit  710  uses the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the second memory address AM 22  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 ; and the processing unit  710  causes one of the selected at least a second candidate target identifier HM 21  and the accessed at least a second candidate target identifier HM 21  to join the second variable target identifier set WV 2  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22 . 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  710  finishes preparing the first application data DA 21 , the second application data DA 22  and the electronic data DE 61 , the input unit  740  receives the second user input operation PU 91 , and provides the second effective request signal QU 1  to the processing unit  710  in response to the second user input operation PU 91 . The processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  700  to leave the first data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the first data transmission phase UT 1  in response to one of the second effective request signal QU 1  and the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  43   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8015  of the communication system  801  shown in  FIG.  38   . Please additionally refer to  FIGS.  38 ,  40 ,  41  and  42   . The implementation structure  8015  includes the electronic device  700 , the message service system  650  and a second communication target set  520 . The message service system  650  includes a second message service device  670 . The second communication target set  520  includes the second communication target  521  and a communication target  522 . 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the processing unit  710  finishes preparing the electronic data DE 61 , the first application data DA 21  and the second application data DA 22 , the processing unit  710  causes the electronic device  700  to enter the first data transmission phase UT 1  at the second request time TR 2  in response to the second effective request signal QU 1 , and thereby checks the stored second application data DA 22  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22 . For example, the processing unit  710  receives the second effective request signal QU 1  in response to finishing preparing the electronic data DE 61 , the first application data DA 21  and the second application data DA 22 . 
     When the electronic device  700  enters the first data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  confirms that the second variable logical value VL 21  and the second variable target identifier set WV 2  respectively become a second effective logical value VE 21  and a second communication target identifier set WT 2 , and thereby checks the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the stored second source target identifier HS 21 , the stored second effective logical value VE 21  and the stored second communication target identifier set WT 2 , which are stored in the second storage space SS 22 , based on the obtained second memory address AM 22 . For example, the stored second communication target identifier set WT 2  is configured to identify the second communication target set  520 . The second communication target identifier HT 21  belonging to the second communication target identifier set WT 2  is configured to identify the second communication target  521  belonging to the second communication target set  520 . 
     In the first data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  710  obtains the second effective logical value VE 21  from the stored second application data DA 22  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22 , and makes a fifth logical decision RD 65  on whether the second effective logical value VE 21  stored in the second storage space SS 22  is true by evaluating the obtained second effective logical value VE 21 . 
     When the fifth logical decision RD 65  is positive, the processing unit  710  makes a sixth logical decision RD 66  on whether the second communication target identifier set WT 2  stored in the second storage space SS 22  is empty. When the sixth logical decision RD 66  is positive, the processing unit  710  confirms that the processing unit  710  is prohibited from performing the second data transmission TD 2  toward the second communication target set  520  in the first data transmission phase UT 1 . 
     When the sixth logical decision RD 66  is negative: the second communication target set  520  consists of one of the second communication target  521  and a second plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . ; the second communication target identifier set WT 2  consists of one of the second communication target identifier HT 21  and a second plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . ; and the processing unit  710  confirms that the processing unit  710  is allowed to use the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to perform the second data transmission TD 2  toward the second communication target set  520  in the first data transmission phase UT 1 . For example, the second plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . include the second communication target  521 , and are respectively a second plurality of external communication device or a second plurality of external electronic device. The second plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . include the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The second communication target identifier HT 21  is one of the second desired target identifier HK 21  and the selected second candidate target identifier HM 21 . 
     When the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  is the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the storage address AS 21  is dependent on the second memory address AM 22 . The storage block BS 21  has the third data capacity CD 63 . For example, the third data capacity CD 63  corresponds to the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , and is determined according to the third specific application communication protocol PC 31  beforehand. 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are considered, the first data limit length value VF 21  is one selected from a group consisting of the longest limit length value, the shortest limit length value, and the middle limit length value. The storage unit  720  further stores in the storage area KS 2  a third data limit length value VF 23  corresponding to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , wherein the third data limit length value VF 23  represents a third data limit length LF 23  to be applied to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and is determined according to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  beforehand. 
     When the sixth logical decision RD 66  is negative, the processing unit  710 , based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , further makes a seventh logical decision RD 67  on whether the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is one of the email communication protocol and the multimedia-message service communication protocol. For example, when the processing unit  710  confirms that the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is configured to identify one of the email communication protocol and the multimedia-message service communication protocol, the seventh logical decision RD 67  is made to be positive. 
     When the seventh logical decision RD 67  is negative, the processing unit  710 , by comparing the third data limit length value VF 23  with the electronic data length value VN 61 , makes an eighth logical decision RD 68  on whether the electronic data DE 61  meets a second specific data length constraint condition CL 22  corresponding to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, under a condition that the third specific data capacity value VC 63  is one of the longest limit length value and the middle limit length value, the processing unit  710  makes the eighth logical decision RD 68 . The second specific data length constraint condition CL 22  is determined according to the third data limit length value VF 23 . When the electronic data length value VN 61  is less than or equal to the third data limit length value VF 23 , the eighth logical decision RD 68  is made to be positive. 
     When the eighth logical decision RD 68  is negative and there is in a third situation: the processing unit  710  splits the electronic data DE 61  to determine a second plurality of operation data portions DF 62  based on the third data limit length value VF 23 ; and the processing unit  710  sequentially performs a second plurality of data transmission portions included in the second data transmission TD 2  to the second plurality of operation data portions DF 62  to send the second plurality of operation data portions DF 62  toward the second communication target  521  under the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , so that the processing unit  710  causes the second communication target  521  to receive the second plurality of operation data portions DF 62  to constitute the electronic data DE 61 . For example, each of the second plurality of operation data portions DF 62  meets the second specific data length constraint condition CL 22 ; and the second plurality of data transmission portions are respectively associated with the second plurality of operation data portions DF 62 . 
     When the eighth logical decision RD 68  is negative and there is in a fourth situation: the processing unit  710  converts the electronic data DE 61  to determine a second operation data DU 62  meeting the second specific data length constraint condition CL 22  based on the third data limit length value VF 23 ; and the processing unit  710  sends the second operation data DU 62  serving as the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  521  under the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     Under a condition that the sixth logical decision RD 66  is negative, the processing unit  710  obtains the electronic data DE 61  from the storage block BS 21  based on the obtained storage address AS 21 , and obtains the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the second source target identifier HS 21  and the second communication target identifier set WT 2  from the stored second application data DA 22  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22 . For example, under a condition that the second communication target identifier set WT 2  consists of the second communication target identifier HT 21 , the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the obtained second source target identifier HS 21 , the obtained electronic data DE 61  and the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  is further coupled to a second message service device  670  included in the message service system  650 . For example, the second message service device  670  supports the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and is the same as or different from the first message service device  660 . Under a condition that the seventh logical decision RD 67  is positive, the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send a seventh electronic message QE 71  toward the second message service device  670  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the obtained second source target identifier HS 21 , the obtained electronic data DE 61  and the obtained second communication target identifier set WT 2 . For example, the seventh electronic message QE 71  includes the second source target identifier HS 21 , the electronic data DE 61  and the second communication target identifier set WT 2 , and is or serves as a fourth instruction message used to instruct the second message service device  670 . 
     Under a condition that the seventh logical decision RD 67  is positive and the second communication target identifier set WT 2  consists of the second communication target identifier HT 21 , the second message service device  670  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to transmit an eighth electronic message QE 81  toward the second communication target  521  in response to the seventh electronic message QE 71 , so that the second communication target  521  receives the eighth electronic message QE 81  in a seventh specific application communication protocol PC 71  being matched with or equal to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the eighth electronic message QE 81  includes the second source target identifier HS 21 , the electronic data DE 61  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     Under a condition that the seventh logical decision RD 67  is positive and the second communication target identifier set WT 2  consists of the second plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . , the second message service device  670  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to separately transmit a second plurality of electronic messages QE 81 , QE 82 , . . . , respectively corresponding to the second plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . , toward the second plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . in response to the seventh electronic message QE 71 , so that the second plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . respectively receive the second plurality of electronic messages QE 81 , QE 82 , . . . in a second plurality of respective communication protocols, each of which is matched with or equal to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     For example, each of the second plurality of electronic messages QE 81 , QE 82 , . . . includes the second source target identifier HS 21 , the electronic data DE 61  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The second communication target  521  included in the second plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . receives the eighth electronic message QE 81 , included in the second plurality of electronic messages QE 81 , QE 82 , . . . , in the seventh specific application communication protocol PC 71  being matched with or equal to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , wherein the seventh specific application communication protocol PC 71  is included in the second plurality of respective communication protocols. 
     Under a condition that the seventh logical decision RD 67  is negative and the eighth logical decision RD 68  is positive (or the electronic data length LN 61  is less than or equal to the third data limit length LF 23 ) and the second communication target identifier set WT 2  consists of the second communication target identifier HT 21 : the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send a ninth electronic message QE 91  toward the second message service device  670  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the obtained second source target identifier HS 21 , the obtained electronic data DE 61  and the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21 , wherein the ninth electronic message QE 91  includes the second source target identifier HS 21 , the electronic data DE 61  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 ; and the second message service device  670  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to transmit a tenth electronic message QEA 1  toward the second communication target  521  in response to the ninth electronic message QE 91 , so that the second communication target  521  receives the tenth electronic message QEA 1  in an eighth specific application communication protocol PC 81  being matched with or equal to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the ninth electronic message QE 91  is or serves as a fifth instruction message used to instruct the second message service device  670 . For example, the tenth electronic message QEA 1  at least includes the electronic data DE 61 . 
     Under a condition that the seventh logical decision RD 67  is negative and the eighth logical decision RD 68  is positive (or the electronic data length LN 61  is less than or equal to the third data limit length LF 23 ) and the second communication target identifier set WT 2  consists of the second plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . , for each second respective identifier: the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send an eleventh electronic message QEB 1  toward the second message service device  670  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the obtained second source target identifier HS 21 , the obtained electronic data DE 61  and the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21 , wherein the eleventh electronic message QEB 1  includes the second source target identifier HS 21 , the electronic data DE 61  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 ; and the second message service device  670  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to transmit a twelfth electronic message QEC 1  toward each second respective target, identified by the each second respective identifier, in response to the eleventh electronic message QEB 1 , so that the each second respective target receives the twelfth electronic message QEC 1  in a ninth specific application communication protocol PC 91  being matched with or equal to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the respective eleventh electronic message QEB 1  is or serves as a sixth instruction message used to instruct the second message service device  670 . For example, the respective twelfth electronic message QEC 1  at least includes the electronic data DE 61 . 
     Under a condition that the seventh logical decision RD 67  is negative and the eighth logical decision RD 68  is negative to cause the electronic device  700  to be in the third situation and the second communication target identifier set WT 2  consists of the second communication target identifier HT 21 , for each second respective data portion included in the second plurality of operation data portions DF 62 : the processing unit  710  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the each second respective data portion toward the second communication target  521  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the obtained second source target identifier HS 21 , the obtained each second respective data portion and the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21 , so that the processing unit  710  causes the second communication target  521  to receive the second plurality of operation data portions DF 62  to constitute the electronic data DE 61 . 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the sixth logical decision RD 66  is negative, the processing unit  710  controls the storage unit  720  based on the obtained storage address AS 21  to obtain the stored electronic data DE 61  from the storage block BS 21 , controls the storage unit  720  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22  to obtain the stored second source target identifier HS 21  and the stored second communication target identifier set WT 2  from the second storage space SS 22 , and thereby outputs one selected from a group consisting of the seventh electronic message QE 71 , the ninth electronic message QE 91 , the respective eleventh electronic message QEB 1  and another functional electronic message. 
     In some embodiments, the second communication target set  520  is a first empty set, or consists of one of the second communication target  521  and the second plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . . The second communication target identifier set WT 2  is a second empty set, or consists of one of the second communication target identifier HT 21  and the second plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . . The second communication target  521  is the same as or different from the first communication target  511 . The storage unit  720  stores the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  in the storage area KS 2 . The specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is configured to identify the specific communication protocol group GP 1 , and consists of a plurality of communication protocol identifiers HP 1 , HP 2 , . . . including the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is a specific communication protocol identifier array, and is determined beforehand. 
     In some embodiments, the plurality of communication protocol identifiers HP 1 , HP 2 , . . . are configured to respectively identify the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . , and respectively have a plurality of ordinal positions respectively represented by a plurality of ordinal numbers NP 1 , NP 2 , . . . , so that the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  has a first ordinal position represented by a first ordinal number NP 1 , and the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  has a second ordinal position represented by a second ordinal number NP 2 . The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . constitute the specific communication protocol group GP 1 , and include the first and the second specific application communication protocols PC 11  and PC 21 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1  or before the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  accesses the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  in the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the first ordinal number NP 1  to obtain the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  in the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the second ordinal number NP 2  to obtain the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The processing unit  710  obtains the plurality of communication protocol identifiers HP 1 , HP 2 , . . . from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , and sequentially performs a plurality of data transmission respectively associated with the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . under the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . based on the obtained plurality of communication protocol identifiers HP 1 , HP 2 , . . . . 
     In some embodiments, each of the first plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . is one selected from a group consisting of a first email address, a first telephone number, a first uniform resource locator (URL) and a first network address, and complies with the first target identifier format stipulation SF 1 . For example, the respective first telephone number is a first mobile telephone number. The first source target identifier HS 11  complies with the first target identifier format stipulation SF 1 , and is to be used to perform a third data transmission toward the electronic device  700  under the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     Each of the second plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . is one selected from a group consisting of a second email address, a second telephone number, a second uniform resource locator (URL) and a second network address, and complies with the second target identifier format stipulation SF 2 . For example, the respective second telephone number is a second mobile telephone number. The second source target identifier HS 21  complies with the second target identifier format stipulation SF 2 , and is to be used to perform a fourth data transmission toward the electronic device  700  under the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  700  includes the storage unit  720  and the processing unit  710 . The storage unit  720  stores the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  configured to identify the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The processing unit  710  is coupled to the storage unit  720 , and obtains the electronic data DE 61  and the first communication target identifier HT 11  to use the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  in response to one of the first effective request signal QR 1  and the second effective request signal QU 1 , wherein the first communication target identifier HT 11  is accessed based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and the first communication target  511  is identified by the first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  44   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8016  of the communication system  801  shown in  FIG.  38   . Please additionally refer to  FIGS.  38 ,  39 ,  40 ,  41 ,  42  and  43   . The implementation structure  8016  includes the electronic device  700 , the message service system  650 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The message service system  650  includes the first message service device  660  and the second message service device  670 . 
     In some embodiments, any of the electronic devices  100 ,  200 ,  201  and  700  is one selected from a group consisting of a first computing device, a first communication device, a first user device, a first control device, a first mobile device, a first portable device, a first desktop device, a first relatively fixed device, a first fixed device, and any combination thereof. Any of the electronic devices  100 ,  200 ,  201  and  700  is identified by the first source target identifier HS 11  under the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is identified by the second source target identifier HS 21  under the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the first communication target identifier set WT 1  includes or is independent from the first source target identifier HS 11 . The second communication target identifier set WT 2  includes or is independent from the second source target identifier HS 21 . 
     The first plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . are to be used for respectively linking to the first plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . by using the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The first source target identifiers HS 11  is to be used for linking to the electronic device  700  by using the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is one selected from a group consisting of a third email address, a third telephone number, a third uniform resource locator (URL) and a third network address. For example, the respective third telephone number is a third mobile telephone number. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  performs a specific application function FA 1 . For example, the specific application function FA 1  is identified by an application function identifier HF 1 . The first specific data capacity value VC 61  is determined beforehand according to one being selected from a group consisting of the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , the specific application function FA 1  and a combination thereof. The second specific data capacity value VC 62  is determined beforehand according to one being selected from a group consisting of the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , the specific application function FA 1  and a combination thereof. The third specific data capacity value VC 63  is determined beforehand according to one being selected from a group consisting of the third specific application communication protocol PC 31 , the specific application function FA 1  and a combination thereof. The second data limit length value VF 22  is determined beforehand according to one being selected from a group consisting of the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , the specific application function FA 1  and a combination thereof. The third data limit length value VF 23  is determined beforehand according to one being selected from a group consisting of the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , the specific application function FA 1  and a combination thereof. 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  720  is controlled by the processing unit  710 , includes a nonvolatile memory unit  722  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and a volatile memory unit  724  coupled to the processing unit  710 , and stores a stored data DN 21 , the electronic data DE 61 , the first application data DA 21  and the second application data DA 22 . For example, the stored data DN 21  is stored in the storage area KS 2 . The nonvolatile memory unit  722  includes a nonvolatile memory space SN 51  coupled to the processing unit  710 . The volatile memory unit  724  includes a volatile memory space SV 51  coupled to the processing unit  710 . 
     When the first storage space SS 21  is the first nonvolatile memory space, the first storage space SS 21  is included in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  of the nonvolatile memory unit  722 . When the first storage space SS 21  is the first volatile memory space, the first storage space SS 21  is included in the volatile memory space SV 51  of the volatile memory unit  724 . When the second storage space SS 22  is the second nonvolatile memory space, the second storage space SS 22  is included in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  of the nonvolatile memory unit  722 . When the second storage space SS 22  is the second volatile memory space, the second storage space SS 22  is included in the volatile memory space SV 51  of the volatile memory unit  724 . 
     When the storage block BS 21  is the nonvolatile memory block, the storage block BS 21  is included in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  of the nonvolatile memory unit  722 . When the storage block BS 21  is the volatile memory block, the storage block BS 21  is included in the volatile memory space SV 51  of the volatile memory unit  724 . When the storage area KS 2  is the nonvolatile memory area, the storage area KS 2  is included in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  of the nonvolatile memory unit  722 . When the storage area KS 2  is the volatile memory area, the storage area KS 2  is included in the volatile memory space SV 51  of the volatile memory unit  724 . 
     The stored data DN 21  is stored in the storage area KS 2 , and includes the application function identifier HF 1 , the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , a first reference data DX 21  stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , a second reference data DX 22  stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and a third reference data DX 23  stored in the storage area KS 2 . 
     The first reference data DX 21 , the second reference data DX 22  and the third reference data DX 23  are respectively stored at a third memory location PM 23 , a fourth memory location PM 24  and a fifth memory location PM 25 . The third, the fourth and the fifth memory locations PM 23 , PM 24  and PM 25  are respectively identified by a third memory address AM 23 , a fourth memory address AM 24  and a fifth memory address AM 25 , or are respectively identified based on the third, the fourth and the fifth memory addresses AM 23 , AM 24  and AM 25 . The third and the fourth memory addresses AM 23  and AM 24  are respectively determined based on the first and the second communication protocol identifiers HP 1  and HP 2 , so that the first reference data DX 21  and the second reference data DX 22  are configured to respectively correspond to the first and the second communication protocol identifiers HP 1  and HP 2 . The specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  includes the first and the second communication protocol identifiers HP 1  and HP 2 . 
     In some embodiments, the third reference data DX 23  is optionally stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . Under a condition that the third reference data DX 23  is stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , the fifth memory address AM 25  is determined based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , so that the third reference data DX 23  is configured to correspond to the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . 
     Under a condition that the third reference data DX 23  is stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  and the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  is the first communication protocol identifiers HP 1 : the third reference data DX 23  is included in the first reference data DX 21 ; the fifth memory location PM 25  is the third memory location PM 23 ; and the fifth memory address AM 25  is the third memory address AM 23 . 
     Under a condition that the third reference data DX 23  is stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  and the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  is the second communication protocol identifiers HP 2 : the third reference data DX 23  is included in the second reference data DX 22 ; the fifth memory location PM 25  is the fourth memory location PM 24 ; and the fifth memory address AM 25  is the fourth memory address AM 24 . 
     For example, the processing unit  710  is configured to cause the storage unit  720  to store the third, the fourth and the fifth memory addresses AM 23 , AM 24  and AM 25  in the storage area KS 2 . The third, the fourth and the fifth memory addresses AM 23 , AM 24  and AM 25  are configured to be respectively determined according to the first, the second and the third communication protocol identifiers HP 1 , HP 2  and HP 3 . 
     The first reference data DX 21  includes a first plurality of application parameters, which include the first source target identifier HS 11 , the first candidate target identifier set WM 1 , the first referential logical value VR 11 , the first specific data capacity value VC 61 , the second data limit length value VF 22 , the first memory address AM 21  and the first display coordinate data DP 21 . The second reference data DX 22  includes a second plurality of application parameters, which include the second source target identifier HS 21 , the second candidate target identifier set WM 2 , the second referential logical value VR 21 , the second specific data capacity value VC 62 , the third data limit length value VF 23 , the second memory address AM 22  and the second display coordinate data DP 22 . The third reference data DX 23  includes a third plurality of application parameters, which include the third specific data capacity value VC 63 , the storage address AS 21  and a third display coordinate data DP 23 . 
     The processing unit  710  obtains the third memory address AM 23  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses at least a first application parameter included in the first plurality of application parameters based on the obtained third memory address AM 23  to obtain the at least a first application parameter. The processing unit  710  obtains the fourth memory address AM 24  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and accesses at least a second application parameter included in the second plurality of application parameters based on the obtained fourth memory address AM 24  to obtain the at least a second application parameter. 
     The processing unit  710  obtains the fifth memory address AM 25 , and accesses at least a third application parameter included in the third plurality of application parameters based on the obtained fifth memory address AM 25  to obtain the at least a third application parameter. For example, under a condition that the third reference data DX 23  is stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , the processing unit  710  obtains the fifth memory address AM 25  based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  includes a communication interface unit  714  and a processor  712 . The communication interface unit  714  is coupled to the first and the second message service devices  660  and  670 . For example, the communication interface unit  714  is one of a wireless interface unit and a wired interface unit. The processor  712  is coupled to the storage unit  720  and the communication interface unit  714 , and controls the storage unit  720  and the communication interface unit  714 . 
     In some embodiments, the processor  712  obtains the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 2 , and obtains the first specific data capacity value VC 61  representing the first data capacity CD 61  from the storage area KS 2  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The processor  712  allocates in the storage unit  720  the first storage space SS 21  having the first data capacity CD 61  based on the obtained first specific data capacity value VC 61  to obtain the first memory address AM 21  configured to identify the first storage space SS 21 . The processor  712  obtains the third specific data capacity value VC 63  representing the third data capacity CD 63  from the storage area KS 2  based on the obtained third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , and allocates in the storage unit  720  the storage block BS 21  having the third data capacity CD 63  based on the obtained third specific data capacity value VC 63  to obtain the storage address AS 21  configured to identify the storage block BS 21 . The processor  712  prepares the electronic data DE 61  in the storage block BS 21  based on the obtained storage address AS 21 , and prepares the first communication target identifier HT 11  in the first storage space SS 21  based on the obtained first memory address AM 21 . 
     Under a condition that the processor  712  finishes preparing the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication target identifier HT 11  and the second communication target identifier HT 21  in the storage unit  720 , the processor  712  controls the storage unit  720  to separately access the prepared electronic data DE 61  and the prepared first communication target identifier HT 11  based on the obtained storage address AS 21  and the obtained first memory address AM 21  to cause the communication interface unit  714  to separately obtain the prepared electronic data DE 61  and the prepared first communication target identifier HT 11  from the storage block BS 21  and the first storage space SS 21 , and controls the communication interface unit  714  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to cause the communication interface unit  714  to use the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511 . 
     The processor  712  outputs a first control signal QT 21  to the communication interface unit  714  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the obtained storage address AS 21  and the obtained first memory address AM 21 . The communication interface unit  714  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to output one selected from a group consisting of the first electronic message QE 11 , the third electronic message QE 31 , the respective fifth electronic message QE 51  and another functional electronic message toward the first message service device  660  based on the first control signal QT 21 , the obtained electronic data DE 61  and the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     The processor  712  obtains the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 2 , and obtains the second specific data capacity value VC 62  representing the second data capacity CD 62  from the storage area KS 2  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The processor  712  allocates in the storage unit  720  the second storage space SS 22  having the second data capacity CD 62  based on the obtained second specific data capacity value VC 62  to obtain the second memory address AM 22  configured to identify the second storage space SS 22 . The processor  712  prepares the second communication target identifier HT 21  in the second storage space SS 22  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22 . 
     Under a condition that the processor  712  finishes preparing the electronic data DE 61 , the first communication target identifier HT 11  and the second communication target identifier HT 21  in the storage unit  720 , the processor  712  controls the storage unit  720  to separately access the prepared electronic data DE 61  and the prepared second communication target identifier HT 21  based on the obtained storage address AS 21  and the obtained second memory address AM 22  to cause the communication interface unit  714  to separately obtain the prepared electronic data DE 61  and the prepared second communication target identifier HT 21  from the storage block BS 21  and the second storage space SS 22 , and controls the communication interface unit  714  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to cause the communication interface unit  714  to use the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521 . 
     The processor  712  outputs a second control signal QT 22  to the communication interface unit  714  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the obtained storage address AS 21  and the obtained second memory address AM 22 . The communication interface unit  714  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to output one selected from a group consisting of the seventh electronic message QE 71 , the ninth electronic message QE 91 , the respective eleventh electronic message QEB 1  and another functional electronic message toward the second message service device  670  based on the second control signal QT 22 , the obtained electronic data DE 61  and the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the second logical decision RD 62  is negative, the processor  712  controls the storage unit  720  and the communication interface unit  714  to cause the communication interface unit  714  to obtain the stored first source target identifier HS 11 , the stored electronic data DE 61  and the stored first communication target identifier set WT 1  from the storage block BS 21  and the first storage space SS 21  based on the obtained storage address AS 21  and the obtained first memory address AM 21 , and outputs the first control signal QT 21  to the communication interface unit  714  to cause the communication interface unit  714  to use the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to output one selected from a group consisting of the first electronic message QE 11 , the third electronic message QE 31 , the respective fifth electronic message QE 51  and another functional electronic message. 
     Under a condition that the sixth logical decision RD 66  is negative, the processor  712  controls the storage unit  720  and the communication interface unit  714  to cause the communication interface unit  714  to obtain the stored second source target identifier HS 21 , the stored electronic data DE 61  and the stored second communication target identifier set WT 2  from the storage block BS 21  and the second storage space SS 22  based on the obtained storage address AS 21  and the obtained second memory address AM 22 , and outputs the second control signal QT 22  to the communication interface unit  714  to cause the communication interface unit  714  to use the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to output one selected from a group consisting of the seventh electronic message QE 71 , the ninth electronic message QE 91 , the respective eleventh electronic message QEB 1  and another functional electronic message. 
     In some embodiments, the first communication target  511  is one selected from a group consisting of a second computing device, a second communication device, a second user device, a second mobile device, a second portable device, a second desktop device, a second relatively fixed device, a second fixed device, and any combination thereof. The second communication target  521  is one selected from a group consisting of a third computing device, a third communication device, a third user device, a third mobile device, a third portable device, a third desktop device, a third relatively fixed device, a third fixed device, and any combination thereof. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  45   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8017  of the communication system  801  shown in  FIG.  38   . Please additionally refer to  FIGS.  38 ,  39 ,  41 ,  43  and  44   . The implementation structure  8017  includes the electronic device  700 , a network  610 , the message service system  650 , the first communication target  511  and a user  910 . The message service system  650  includes the first and the second message service devices  660  and  670 . The electronic device  700  includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720  and the display unit  730 . The display unit  730  is coupled to the processor  712 , and is controlled by the processor  712  to display the electronic data DE 61 , a data content of the first application data DA 21 , and a data content of the second application data DA 22 . 
     In some embodiments, any of the electronic devices  100 ,  200 ,  201  and  700  is one selected from a group consisting of the first computing device, the first communication device, the first user device, the first control device, the first mobile device, the first portable device, the first desktop device, the first relatively fixed device, the first fixed device and any combination thereof, is used by the user  910 , and includes the input unit  740 , a sensing unit  750  and a timer  760 . The input unit  740  is coupled to the processor  712 , is controlled by the processor  712 , and provides a first input data DB 21  to the processor  712 . The sensing unit  750  is coupled to the processor  712 , is controlled by the processor  712 , and is configured to sense a variable physical parameter FP 21  to provide a sensed data DQ 21  to the processor  712 . 
     For example, the variable physical parameter FP 21  is one selected from a group consisting of a variable electrical parameter, a variable mechanic parameter, a variable optical parameter, a variable magnetic parameter, a variable real time, a variable real temperature, a variable color temperature, a variable electrical voltage, a variable electrical current, a variable electrical power, a variable electrical resistance, a variable electrical capacitance, a variable electrical inductance, a variable frequency, a clock time, a variable time length, a variable luminance, a variable luminous intensity, a variable application image, a variable application sound, a variable sound volume, a variable flow rate, a variable amplitude, a variable spatial location, a variable displacement, a variable sequence position, a variable angle, a variable spatial length, a variable distance, a variable translational velocity, a variable angular velocity, a variable acceleration, a variable force, a variable pressure and a variable mechanical power and any combination thereof. The timer  760  is coupled to the processor  712 , and is controlled by the processor  712 . 
     For example, the sensing unit  750  includes an image sensing component  751  and a sound sensing component  752 . Each of the image sensing component  751  and the sound sensing component  752  is coupled to the processor  712 . Under a condition that the user  910  presents or is configured to present an application image, the image sensing component  751  is configured to sense the application image of the user  910  to cause the sensed data DQ 21  to include an image data. Under a condition that the user  910  makes an application sound, the sound sensing component  752  is configured to sense the application sound, made by the user  910 , to cause the sensed data DQ 21  to include a sound data. For example, the image sensing component  751  is a camera. The sound sensing component  752  is a microphone. The application image is one selected from a group consisting of a face image, a fingerprint, a hand image, a body-portion image and a body image. The application sound is one selected from a group consisting of a voice, a musical sound, and a combination of the voice and the musical sound. For example, the sensing unit  750  includes at least one of the image sensing component  751  and the sound sensing component  752 . 
     The communication interface unit  714  is further coupled to the network  610 , and receives an input message QY 21  including a second input data DY 21 . For example, the communication interface unit  714  receives the input message QY 21  through the network  610 . For example, the communication interface unit  714  receives the input message QY 21  from one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . Each of the first and the second message service devices  660  and  670  is coupled to the network  610 , and is included in the message service system  650 . The electronic device  700  further includes a bus  780 . The bus  780  is coupled to the processor  712 , the communication interface unit  714 , the timer  760 , the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740 , the display unit  730  and the sensing unit  750 . For example, the communication interface unit  714  sends the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  511  through the network  610 , and sends the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  through the network  610 . 
     Under a condition that the electronic device  700  is applied to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , the first source target identifier HS 11  stored in the storage area KS 2  serves as a first user identifier configured to identify the user  910 . Under a condition that the electronic device  700  is applied to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , the second source target identifier HS 21  stored in the storage area KS 2  serves as a second user identifier configured to identify the user  910 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  receives the first user input operation PU 81  performed by the user  910 . The processor  712  receives the first effective request signal QR 1  to cause the electronic device  700  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to one selected from a group consisting of the first user input operation PU 81  associated with the input unit  740  and the user  910 , a message reception associated with the input message QY 21 , a first specific request message QM 1  received by the communication interface unit  714 , and a first integer overflow associated with the timer  760 . 
     In some embodiments, the communication interface unit  714  receives the first specific request message QM 1  including a first specific control instruction. For example, the first specific request message QM 1  is the first input request message, so that the first effective request signal QR 1  may be the first specific request message QM 1 . The processor  712  causes the electronic device  700  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  based on the first specific control instruction. For example, the communication interface unit  714  receives the first specific request message QM 1  through the network  610 . For example, the communication interface unit  714  receives the first specific request message QM 1  from one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  provides the first effective request signal QR 1  to the processor  712  in response to the first user input operation PU 81 , wherein the first effective request signal QR 1  may be the first interrupt request signal. In some embodiments, the timer  760  provides the first effective request signal QR 1  to the processor  712  in response to the first integer overflow, wherein the first effective request signal QR 1  may be the first interrupt request signal. 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) causes the electronic device  700  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the message reception: the second input data DY 21  includes the electronic data DE 61 , the first application data DA 21  and the second application data DA 22 ; and in the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) obtains the storage address AS 21  based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  obtained from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 2 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store the received electronic data DE 61  into the storage block BS 21  based on the obtained storage address AS 21 . For example, the message reception causes to provide the first effective request signal QR 1  to the processor  712  to cause the electronic device  700  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1 , wherein the first effective request signal QR 1  may be the first interrupt request signal. 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) causes the electronic device  700  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the message reception: in the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) obtains the first memory address AM 21  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  obtained from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 2 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store or write the received first application data DA 21  into the first storage space SS 21  based on the obtained first memory address AM 21 ; and in the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) obtains the second memory address AM 22  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  obtained from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 2 , and causes the storage unit  720  to store or write the received second application data DA 22  into the second storage space SS 22  based on the obtained second memory address AM 22 . 
     The first memory address AM 21  is one of a first base address and a first end address, so that the first memory location PM 21  is one of a first base location and a first end location. The second memory address AM 22  is one of a second base address and a second end address, so that the second memory location PM 22  is one of a second base location and a second end location. 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) causes the electronic device  700  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first user input operation PU 81 , the input unit  740  in the first data preparation phase UP 1  receives the user input operation PK 11  performed by the user  910 , the user input operation PK 21  performed by the user  910 , and the user input operation PW 24  performed by the user  910 . Therefore, the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) causes the storage unit  720  to prepare the electronic data DE 61  in the storage area BS 21  in the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the user input operation PW 24 , causes the storage unit  720  to prepare the first application data DA 21  in the first storage space SS 21  in the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the user input operation PK 11 , and causes the storage unit  720  to prepare the second application data DA 22  in the second storage space SS 22  in the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the user input operation PK 21 . 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) finishes preparing the first application data DA 21 , the second application data DA 22  and the electronic data DE 61 , the input unit  740  receives the second user input operation PU 91  performed by the user  910 . Therefore, under a condition that the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) finishes preparing the first application data DA 21 , the second application data DA 22  and the electronic data DE 61 , the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) receives the second effective request signal QU 1  in response to one selected from a group consisting of the second user input operation PU 91  associated with the input unit  740  and the user  910 , a second specific request message QM 2  received by the communication interface unit  714 , and a second integer overflow associated with the timer  760 . 
     In some embodiments, the communication interface unit  714  receives the second specific request message QM 2  including a second specific control instruction. For example, the second specific request message QM 2  is the second input request message, so that the second effective request signal QU 1  may be the second specific request message QM 2 . The processor  712  causes the electronic device  700  to leave the first data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the first data transmission phase UT 1  based on the second specific control instruction. For example, the communication interface unit  714  receives the second specific request message QM 2  through the network  610 . For example, the communication interface unit  714  receives the second specific request message QM 2  from one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  provides the second effective request signal QU 1  to the processor  712  in response to the second user input operation PU 91 , wherein the second effective request signal QU 1  may be the second interrupt request signal. In some embodiments, the timer  760  provides the second effective request signal QU 1  to the processor  712  in response to the second integer overflow, wherein the second effective request signal QU 1  may be the second interrupt request signal. 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) causes the electronic device  700  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first user input operation PU 81 , the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) determines the electronic data DE 61  for the specific application function FA 1  based on a third application data DA 23  provided by the electronic device  700 . For example, the third application data DA 23  is one selected from a group consisting of the first input data DB 21 , the stored data DN 21 , the sensed data DQ 21 , the second input data DY 21 , and any combination thereof. For example, each of the first desired logical value VK 11 , the at least a first desired target identifier HK 11 , the second desired logical value VK 21 , and the at least a second desired target identifier HK 21  is determined based on the third application data DA 23 , and is desired by the user  910 . For example, the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) obtains or determines the third application data DA 23  by means of one selected from a group consisting of the input unit  740 , the sensing unit  750 , the storage unit  720 , the timer  760  and the communication interface unit  714 . 
     The message service system  650  includes a plurality of message service devices  660 ,  670 , . . . respectively support the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . For example, the plurality of message service devices  660 ,  670 , . . . include the first and the second message service devices  660  and  670 ; and each of the plurality of message service devices  660 ,  670 , . . . is coupled to the communication interface unit  714  and the network  610 . For example, the specific application function FA 1  is one selected from a group consisting of a service function, a communication function, a control function, a data processing function, a data analysis function, a data conversion function, and any combination thereof. For example, the communication interface unit  714  transmits one selected from a group consisting of the first electronic message QE 11 , the third electronic message QE 31 , the respective fifth electronic message QE 51  and another functional electronic message toward the first message service device  660  through the network  610 , and transmits one selected from a group consisting of the seventh electronic message QE 71 , the ninth electronic message QE 91 , the respective eleventh electronic message QEB 1  and another functional electronic message toward the second message service device  670  through the network  610 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) determines the electronic data DE 61  in the first data preparation phase UP 1  based on one selected from a group consisting of the first input data DB 21 , the stored data DN 21 , the sensed data DQ 21 , the second input data DY 21 , and any combination thereof. For example, the electronic data DE 61  is one selected from a group consisting of a service data, an article data, an object data, a measured data, a recognized data, a control application data, a manufacturing data, a material data, a management data, and any combination thereof. For example, the communication interface unit  714  supports the first and the second specific application communication protocols PC 11  and PC 21 . For example, the input unit  740  receives in the first data preparation phase UP 1  the user input operation PW 24  performed by the user  910 , and provides the first input data DB 21  to the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) in response to the user input operation PW 24  associated with the user  910 . For example, the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) obtains the electronic data DE 61  from the stored data DN 21  in response to the user input operation PW 24 , and causes the storage unit  720  to prepare the electronic data DE 61 , obtained from the stored data DN 21 , in the storage area BS 21  based on the obtained storage address AS 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  740  in a second data preparation phase UP 2  being after the first data transmission phase UT 1  receives a user input operation PW 25  performed by the user  910 . Therefore, the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ), in the second data preparation phase UP 2  in response to the user input operation PW 25  associated with the user  910  and the input unit  740 , changes the first application data DA 21 , stored in the first storage space SS 21 , into a fourth application data DA 24 , and/or changes the electronic data DE 61 , stored in the storage area BS 21 , into changed data DE 81 . 
     For example, the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) optionally changes a data content of the electronic data DE 61 , stored in the storage area BS 21 , to form the changed data DE 81  in response to the user input operation PW 25 . The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ), in response to the user input operation PW 25 , optionally further changes a logical-value content of the first effective logical value VE 11 , stored in the first storage space SS 21 , to form the fourth application data DA 24 . The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ), in response to the user input operation PW 25 , optionally further changes an identifier-set content of the first communication target identifier set WT 1 , stored in the first storage space SS 21 , to form the fourth application data DA 24 . 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the first application data DA 21  stored in the first storage space SS 21  is changed into the fourth application data DA 24  and/or the electronic data DE 61  stored in the storage area BS 21  is changed into the changed data DE 81 , the input unit  740  receives a user input operation PW 26  performed by the user  910 . The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) receives a third effective request signal QU 2  in response to the user input operation PW 26  associated with the user  910  and the input unit  740 , and causes the electronic device  700  to enter a second data transmission phase UT 2  being after the second data preparation phase UP 2  in response to the third effective request signal QU 2 . For example, the third effective request signal QU 2  is one of a third interrupt request signal and a third input request message. 
     The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) accesses the fourth application data DA 24 , stored in the first storage space SS 21 , in the second data transmission phase UT 2  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the fourth application data DA 24  and/or the changed data DE 81  from the storage unit  720 , and performs a fifth data transmission TD 5  based on the obtained fourth application data DA 24  and/or the obtained changed data DE 8 . For example, the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) causes the electronic device  700  to enter the second data preparation phase UP 2  in response to a fourth effective request signal QR 2 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  46   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8018  of the communication system  801  shown in  FIG.  38   . Please additionally refer to  FIGS.  38 ,  39 ,  41 ,  43 ,  44  and  45   . The implementation structure  8018  includes the electronic device  700  and the user  910 . The electronic device  700  includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720  and the display unit  730 . The display unit  730  includes the first display area KD 21  associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , a second display area KD 22  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and the display block BD 21  associated with the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . 
     For example, the first display area KD 21  includes a first display border ND 21  being dependent on a first plurality of display reference locations PR 11 , PR 12 , PR 13  and PR 14 , and has a first display area value VA 21  being proportional to the first specific data capacity value VC 61 . The second display area KD 22  includes a second display border ND 22  being dependent on a second plurality of display reference locations PR 21 , PR 22 , PR 23  and PR 24 , and has a second display area value VA 22  being proportional to the second specific data capacity value VC 62 . The display block BD 21  includes a third display border ND 23  being dependent on a third plurality of display reference locations PR 31 , PR 32 , PR 33  and PR 34 , and has a third display area value VA 23  being proportional to the third specific data capacity value VC 63 . 
     The first display area KD 21 , the second display area KD 22  and the display block BD 21  are different, and are respectively represented by the first display coordinate data DP 21 , a second display coordinate data DP 22  and a third display coordinate data DP 23 . The first, the second and the third display coordinate data DP 21 , DP 22  and DP 23  are respectively associated with the first, the second and the third communication protocol identifiers HP 1 , HP 2  and HP 3 . For example, the first display coordinate data DP 21  includes a first plurality of screen reference coordinates configured to respectively represent the first plurality of display reference locations PR 11 , PR 12 , PR 13  and PR 14 , and is dependent on the first display area value VA 21 . The second display coordinate data DP 22  includes a second plurality of screen reference coordinates configured to respectively represent the second plurality of display reference locations PR 21 , PR 22 , PR 23  and PR 24 , and is dependent on the second display area value VA 22 . The third display coordinate data DP 23  includes a third plurality of screen reference coordinates configured to respectively represent the third plurality of display reference locations PR 31 , PR 32 , PR 33  and PR 34 , and is dependent on the third display area value VA 23 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  accesses the first specific data capacity value VC 61 , stored in the storage area KS 2 , based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , stored in the storage area KS 2 , to obtain the first specific data capacity value VC 61 , and determines or determines beforehand the first display coordinate data DP 21  based on the obtained first specific data capacity value VC 61 . Therefore, the processing unit  710  obtains the first display coordinate data DP 21  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , stores the first display coordinate data DP 21  in the storage area KS 2  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses the first display coordinate data DP 21  stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . 
     The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) accesses the second specific data capacity value VC 62 , stored in the storage area KS 2 , based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , stored in the storage area KS 2 , to obtain the second specific data capacity value VC 62 , and determines or determines beforehand the second display coordinate data DP 22  based on the obtained second specific data capacity value VC 62 . Therefore, the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) obtains the second display coordinate data DP 22  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , stores the second display coordinate data DP 22  in the storage area KS 2  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and accesses the second display coordinate data DP 22  stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) accesses the third specific data capacity value VC 63 , stored in the storage area KS 2 , based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , stored in the storage area KS 2 , to obtain the third specific data capacity value VC 63 , and determines or determines beforehand the third display coordinate data DP 23  based on the obtained third specific data capacity value VC 63 . Therefore, the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) obtains the third display coordinate data DP 23  based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , stores the third display coordinate data DP 23  in the storage area KS 2  based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , and accesses the third display coordinate data DP 23  stored in the storage area KS 2  based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . 
     The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) obtains the first display coordinate data DP 21  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  stored in the storage area KS 2 , and causes the display unit  730  based on the obtained first display coordinate data DP 21  to display on the first display area KD 21  a first source target identification information MS 11  representing the first source target identifier HS 11 , and the first communication target identification information MH 11  representing the first communication target identifier HT 11 . For example, under a condition that the processor  712  receives the first effective request signal QR 1 , the processor  712  causes the display unit  730  to display the first source target identification information MS 11  and the first communication target identification information MH 11  on the first display area KD 21  based on the obtained first display coordinate data DP 21 . For example, the first source target identification information MS 11  is the same as or different from the first source target identifier HS 11 . For example, the first communication target identification information MH 11  is the same as or different from the first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) obtains the second display coordinate data DP 22  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  stored in the storage area KS 2 , and causes the display unit  730  based on the obtained second display coordinate data DP 22  to display on the second display area KD 22  a second source target identification information MS 21  representing the second source target identifier HS 21 , and the second communication target identification information MH 21  representing the second communication target identifier HT 21 . For example, under a condition that the processor  712  receives the first effective request signal QR 1 , the processor  712  causes the display unit  730  to display the second source target identification information MS 21  and the second communication target identification information MH 21  on the second display area KD 22  based on the obtained second display coordinate data DP 22 . For example, the second source target identification information MS 21  is the same as or different from the second source target identifier HS 21 . For example, the second communication target identification information MH 21  is the same as or different from the second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) obtains the third display coordinate data DP 23  based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  stored in the storage area KS 2 , and causes the display unit  730  to display the electronic data DE 61  on the display block BD 21  based on the obtained third display coordinate data DP 23 . For example, under a condition that the processor  712  receives the first effective request signal QR 1 , the processor  712  causes the display unit  730  to display the electronic data DE 61  on the display block BD 21  based on the obtained third display coordinate data DP 23 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) replaces the first specific data capacity value VC 61  stored in the storage area KS 2  with a fourth specific data capacity value VC 64  being different from the first specific data capacity value VC 61  to change the first storage space SS 21  from the first data capacity CD 61  into a fourth data capacity CD 64  represented by the fourth specific data capacity value VC 64 . The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) replaces the first display coordinate data DP 21  stored in the storage area KS 2  with a fourth display coordinate data DP 24  being different from the first display coordinate data DP 21  to change the first display area KD 21  from the first display border ND 21  into a fourth display border ND 24  represented by the fourth display coordinate data DP 24 . For example, the fourth display coordinate data DP 24  is determined based on the fourth specific data capacity value VC 64 . 
     The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) replaces the second specific data capacity value VC 62  stored in the storage area KS 2  with a fifth specific data capacity value VC 65  being different from the second specific data capacity value VC 62  to change the second storage space SS 22  from the second data capacity CD 62  into a fifth data capacity CD 65  represented by the fifth specific data capacity value VC 65 . The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) replaces the second display coordinate data DP 22  stored in the storage area KS 2  with a fifth display coordinate data DP 25  being different from the second display coordinate data DP 22  to change the second display area KD 22  from the second display border ND 22  into a fifth display border ND 25  represented by the fifth display coordinate data DP 25 . For example, the fifth display coordinate data DP 25  is determined based on the fifth specific data capacity value VC 65 . 
     The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) replaces the third specific data capacity value VC 63  stored in the storage area KS 2  with a sixth specific data capacity value VC 66  being different from the third specific data capacity value VC 63  to change the storage block BS 21  from the third data capacity CD 63  into a sixth data capacity CD 65  represented by the sixth specific data capacity value VC 66 . The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) replaces the third display coordinate data DP 23  stored in the storage area KS 2  with a sixth display coordinate data DP 26  being different from the third display coordinate data DP 23  to change the display block BD 21  from the third display border ND 23  into a sixth display border ND 26  represented by the sixth display coordinate data DP 26 . For example, the sixth display coordinate data DP 26  is determined based on the sixth specific data capacity value VC 66 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  47   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8019  of the communication system  801  shown in  FIG.  38   . As shown in  FIG.  47   , the implementation structure  8019  includes the electronic device  700 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  700  includes the processing unit  710 , the storage unit  720  coupled to the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ), the input unit  740  coupled to the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ), and the display unit  730  coupled to the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ). Each of the storage unit  720 , the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  is controlled by the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  700  includes a first electricity application target BU 81 , a second electricity application target BU 91 , an electricity application target BX 51 , an electricity application target BX 61  and an electricity application target BY 51 , each of which is coupled to the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ). The first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , and the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 51  are respectively located at a spatial location EU 81 , a spatial location EU 91 , a spatial location EX 51 , a spatial location EX 61  and a spatial location EY 51 . For example, one of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes the electricity application target BU 81 . One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes the electricity application target BU 91 . One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes the electricity application target BX 51 . One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes the electricity application target BX 61 . One of the input unit  740  and the display unit  730  includes the electricity application target BY 51 . 
     For example, the spatial locations EU 81 , EU 91 , EX 51 , EX 61  and EY 51  are different. For example, two selected from a group consisting of the spatial locations EU 81 , EU 91 , EX 51 , EX 61  and EY 51  are the same. The first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , and the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 51  respectively have a plurality of electricity application areas, or are respectively formed by the plurality of electricity application areas. 
     The input unit  740  receives the first user input operation PU 81  using the first electricity application target BU 81 , and provides the first effective request signal QR 1  including the first operation request message QN 81  to the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) in response to the first user input operation PU 81 . The input unit  740  receives the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 , and provides the second effective request signal QU 1  including the second operation request message QN 91  to the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) in response to the second user input operation PU 91 . 
     The input unit  740  receives the user input operation PK 11  using the electricity application target BX 51 , and provides an operation request message QK 11  to the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) in response to the user input operation PK 11 . The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) performs the data acquisition operation EF 11  in response to the operation request message QK 11  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. 
     The input unit  740  receives the user input operation PK 21  using the electricity application target BX 61 , and provides an operation request message QK 21  to the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) in response to the user input operation PK 21 . The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) performs the data acquisition operation EF 21  in response to the operation request message QK 21  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. The input unit  740  receives the user input operation PW 24  using the electricity application target BY 51 , and provides the first input data DB 21  to the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) in response to the user input operation PW 24 . The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) causes the storage unit  720  to prepare in the storage block BS 21  the electronic data DE 61  derived from the obtained first input data DB 21 . For example, each of the user input operations PK 11  and PK 21  is performed by the user  910 . 
     For example, the input unit  740  includes one selected from a group consisting of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 51 , and any combination thereof. Any of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , and the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 51  is a sensing target, wherein the sensing target includes one selected from a group consisting of a sensing area, a push button and a touch point. 
     The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) causes the electronic device  700  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  by means of the first electricity application target BU 81 . The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) causes the electronic device  700  to leave the first data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the first data transmission phase UT 1  by means of the second electricity application target BU 91 . The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) obtains the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored by means of the electricity application target BX 51 . The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) obtains the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored by means of the electricity application target BX 61 . The processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) obtains the first input data DB 21  by means of the electricity application target BY 51 . 
     For example, the display unit  730  includes one selected from a group consisting of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 51 , and any combination thereof. For example, the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) is configured to cause the display unit  730  to display the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91  at the same time or for different times. For example, the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) is configured to cause the display unit  730  to display the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 51  at the same time or for different times. Any of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , and the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 51  is a display target, wherein the display target includes one selected from a group consisting of a display area, an icon and a display action item. 
     The first electricity application target BU 81  is associated with at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the stored first communication target identifier HT 11 , the stored second communication target identifier HT 21 , the first, the second, the third, the fourth and the fifth memory addresses AM 21 , AM 22 , AM 23 , AM 24  and AM 25 , the storage address AS 21 , the stored target identifier set identifier HG 11  and the stored target identifier set identifier HG 21 . The second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the first memory address AM 21 , the second memory address AM 22  and the storage address AS 21 . 
     The electricity application target BX 51  is associated with at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the first memory address AM 21  and the application memory address AE 11 . The electricity application target BX 61  is associated with at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the second memory address AM 22  and the application memory address AE 21 . The electricity application target BY 51  is associated with the storage address AS 21 , and is used to obtain the first input data DB 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) is configured to cause the display unit  730  to display a selection tool TK 11 . The first user input operation PU 81  uses or selects the first electricity application target BU 81  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  740  to provide the first operation request message QN 81  to the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ). The second user input operation PU 91  uses or selects the second electricity application target BU 91  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  740  to provide the second operation request message QN 91  to the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ). 
     The user input operation PK 11  uses the electricity application target BX 51  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11 . The user input operation PK 21  uses the electricity application target BX 61  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The user input operation PW 24  uses the electricity application target BY 51  displayed by the display unit  730  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the processing unit  710  (or the processor  712 ) to obtain the first input data DB 21 . For example, the selection tool TK 11  is a cursor. 
     In some embodiments, when the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is the email communication protocol, the email communication protocol may be a simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP), and the fourth specific application communication protocol PC 41  may be one of a POP3 email protocol and an internet message access protocol (IMAP). When the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is the short-message service communication protocol, the fourth specific application communication protocol PC 41  may be the short-message service communication protocol. When the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is the instant-messaging communication protocol, the instant-messaging communication protocol may be one of an instant messaging and presence protocol (IMPP) and an extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), and the fourth specific application communication protocol PC 41  may be one of the instant messaging and presence protocol (IMPP) and the extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP). When the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is the multimedia-message service communication protocol, the multimedia-message service communication protocol may be a MM1 multimedia-message service protocol, and the fourth specific application communication protocol PC 41  may be the MM1 multimedia-message service protocol. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  48   , which is a schematic diagram showing a communication system  851  according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. The communication system  851  includes an electronic device  300 , a first communication target  511  and a second communication target  521 . For example, the electronic device  300  is to communicate with the first communication target  511 . The electronic device  300  includes a storage unit  320  and a processing unit  310 . The storage unit  320  stores a first communication protocol identifier HP 1  configured to identify a first specific application communication protocol PC 1 . The processing unit  310  is coupled to the storage unit  320 . In addition, the processing unit  310 , in response to a specific request signal QK 1 , obtains a first electronic data DE 11  and a first communication target identifier HT 11  accessed based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to send the first electronic data DE 11  in the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  toward the first communication target  511  identified by the first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  is configured to correspond to a first specific data capacity value VC 11  representing a first data capacity CD 11 . For example, the first specific data capacity value VC 11  is determined beforehand. The processing unit  310  obtains the first specific data capacity value VC 11  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The processing unit  310  allocates in the storage unit  320  a first storage space SS 11  having the first data capacity CD 11  based on the first specific data capacity value VC 11  to obtain a first memory address AM 11  configured to identify the first storage space SS 11 . The first specific application communication protocol PC 11  has a first target identifier format stipulation SF 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the specific request signal QK 1  is one of a first effective request signal QR 1  and a second effective request signal QU 1 . The processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  300  to enter a first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first effective request signal QR 1 . In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  obtains the first electronic data DE 11  and the first communication target identifier HT 11  complying with the first target identifier format stipulation SF 1 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the first electronic data DE 11  and the first communication target identifier HT 11  in the first storage space SS 11  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 . The processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  300  to leave the first data preparation phase UP 1  to enter a first data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second effective request signal QU 1 . 
     For example, the first effective request signal QR 1  includes a first operation request message QN 81 . The processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  300  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first operation request message QN 81 . The second effective request signal QU 1  includes a second operation request message QN 91 . The processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  300  to leave the first data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the first data transmission phase UT 1  in response to the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     In the first data transmission phase UT 1  being after the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  accesses the first electronic data DE 11  and the first communication target identifier HT 11 , which are stored in the first storage space SS 11 , based on the obtained first memory address AM 11  to obtain the first electronic data DE 11  and the first communication target identifier HT 11 , and uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  in response to obtaining the first electronic data DE 11  and the first communication target identifier HT 11 . For example, the processing unit  310  obtains the first memory address AM 11  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and thereby accesses the first communication target identifier HT 11  stored in the first storage space SS 11  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belongs to a specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage unit  320 . The processing unit  310  obtains the first communication protocol identifiers HP 1  and a second communication protocol identifier HP 2  from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  including the first and the second communication protocol identifiers HP 1  and HP 2 . For example, the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is a specific communication protocol identifier array, and is determined beforehand. For example, the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is configured to identify a second specific application communication protocol PC 21  being different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     The second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is configured to correspond to a second specific data capacity value VC 12  representing a second data capacity CD 12 . The processing unit  310  obtains the second specific data capacity value VC 12  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The processing unit  310  allocates in the storage unit  320  a second storage space SS 12  having the second data capacity CD 12  based on the obtained second specific data capacity value VC 12  to obtain a second memory address AM 12  configured to identify the second storage space SS 12 . For example, the second specific data capacity value VC 12  is determined beforehand, and is the same as or different from the first specific data capacity value VC 11 . For example, the second storage space SS 12  is different from the first storage space SS 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  has a second target identifier format stipulation SF 2 . In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  obtains or determines a source data DS 11  and a second communication target identifier HT 21  complying with the second target identifier format stipulation SF 2 , wherein the second communication target identifier HT 21  is configured to identify the second communication target  521 . In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  obtains or determines the first electronic data DE 11  for the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  based on the source data DS 11 , obtains or determines a second electronic data DE 21  for the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  based on the source data DS 11 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the second electronic data DE 21  and the second communication target identifier HT 21  in the second storage space SS 12  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 . For example, the second electronic data DE 21  is the same as or different from the first electronic data DE 11 . 
     In the first data transmission phase UT 1 , under a condition that the processing unit  310  confirms that transmitting the second electronic data DE 21  toward the second communication target  521  in the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is allowed, the processing unit  310  accesses the second electronic data DE 21  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 , which are stored in the second storage space SS 12 , based on the obtained second memory address AM 12  to obtain the second electronic data DE 21  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 , and uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  521  in response to obtaining the second electronic data DE 21  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 . For example, the processing unit  310  obtains the second memory address AM 12  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and thereby accesses the second communication target identifier HT 21  stored in the second storage space SS 12  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     A third communication protocol identifier HP 3  selected from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is configured to identify a third specific application communication protocol PC 31 . The storage unit  320  includes a third storage space SS 13  allocated based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . For example, the source data DS 11  is configured to be stored in the third storage space SS 13 . The specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is configured to identify a specific application communication protocol group GP 1  consisting of a plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . Each of the first, the second and the third specific application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21  and PC 31  belongs to the specific application communication protocol group GP 1 . 
     Each of the first and the second specific application communication protocols PC 11  and PC 21  is one selected from a plurality of predetermined application communication protocols. For example, the plurality of predetermined application communication protocols include one selected from a group consisting of an email communication protocol, a short-message service communication protocol, a multimedia-message service communication protocol and an instant-messaging communication protocol. The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are selected from the plurality of predetermined application communication protocols. For example, the plurality of predetermined application communication protocols are respectively a plurality of predetermined data transmission communication protocols. 
     The third specific application communication protocol PC 31  is one of the email communication protocol and the multimedia-message service communication protocol. Under a condition that the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  is the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , the first storage space SS 11  and the first electronic data DE 11  are respectively the third storage space SS 13  and the source data DS 11 . Under a condition that the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , the second storage space SS 12  and the second electronic data DE 21  are respectively the third storage space SS 13  and the source data DS 11 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  49   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8511  of the communication system  851  shown in  FIG.  48   . As shown in  FIG.  49   , the implementation structure  8511  includes the electronic device  300 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  300  further includes a display unit  330  coupled to the processing unit  310 . In some embodiments, the display unit  330  includes a first display area KD 11  represented by a first display coordinate data DP 11 . For example, the first display coordinate data DP 11  is associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and is determined based on the first specific data capacity value VC 11 . The processing unit  310  obtains the first display coordinate data DP 11  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to cause the display unit  330  to display the first electronic data DE 11  and a first communication target identification information MH 11  representing the first communication target identifier HT 11  on the first display area KD 11 . 
     The display unit  330  further includes a second display area KD 12  represented by a second display coordinate data DP 12 . For example, the first display area KD 11  is different from the second display area KD 12 . For example, the second display coordinate data DP 12  is associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and is determined based on the second specific data capacity value VC 12 . The processing unit  310  obtains the second display coordinate data DP 12  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to cause the display unit  330  to display the second electronic data DE 21  and a second communication target identification information MH 21  representing the second communication target identifier HT 21  on the second display area KD 22 . 
     In some embodiments, the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is identified by a protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The storage unit  320  stores the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  and the protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . The processing unit  310  is configured to support the first and the second specific application communication protocols PC 11  and PC 21 , is configured to read the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 , and obtains the stored first and the stored second communication protocol identifiers HP 1  and HP 2  from the stored specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  based on the read protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  50   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8512  of the communication system  851  shown in  FIG.  48   . Please additionally refer to  FIG.  48   . The implementation structure  8512  includes the electronic device  300  and the first communication target  511 . The electronic device  300  includes the storage unit  320 , the processing unit  310 , and an input unit  340  coupled to the processing unit  310 . The storage unit  320  includes the first and the second storage spaces SS 11  and SS 12 , and stores the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . For example, the first storage space SS 11  is one of a first nonvolatile memory space and a first volatile memory space. The second storage space SS 12  is one of a second nonvolatile memory space and a second volatile memory space. 
     The first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  corresponds to the first specific data capacity value VC 11  determined according to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the first specific data capacity value VC 11  represents the first data capacity CD 11  used to allocate the first storage space SS 11 , and is determined according to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  beforehand. 
     The storage unit  320  further includes a storage area KS 1  being different from each of the first and the second storage spaces SS 11  and SS 12 , and stores the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  and the first specific data capacity value VC 11  corresponding to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  in the storage area KS 1 . For example, the storage area KS 1  is one of a nonvolatile memory area and a volatile memory area. 
     The processing unit  310  obtains the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 1 , accesses the first specific data capacity value VC 11  stored in the storage area KS 1  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the first specific data capacity value VC 11  from the storage area KS 1 , and allocates in the storage unit  320  the first storage space SS 11  having the first data capacity CD 11  based on the first specific data capacity value VC 11  to obtain the first memory address AM 11  configured to identify the first storage space SS 11 . For example, the first storage space SS 11  is located at a first memory location PM 11  identified by the first memory address AM 11 , and is thereby identified by the first memory address AM 11 . For example, the storage unit  320  has the first memory location PM 11  identified based on the first memory address AM 11 . The first memory address AM 11  is determined according to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  320  stores in the storage area KS 1  the first memory address AM 11  corresponding to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The processing unit  310 , based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  obtained from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 1 , accesses the first memory address AM 11  stored in the storage area KS 1  to obtain the first memory address AM 11  from the storage area KS 1 . 
     The processing unit  310  obtains the first memory address AM 11  to identify the first storage space SS 11 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store in the first storage space SS 11  a first application data DA 11 , including the first electronic data DE 11  and the first communication target identifier HT 11 , based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 . For example, the first storage space SS 11  is allocated enough to contain the first application data DA 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  300  is identified by a first source target identifier HS 11  under the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the first source target identifier HS 11  complies with the first target identifier format stipulation SF 1 . The storage unit  320  further stores in the storage area KS 1  the first source target identifier HS 11  corresponding to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and a first candidate target identifier set WM 1  corresponding to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . For example, the first candidate target identifier set WM 1  complies with the first target identifier format stipulation SF 1 . 
     The storage unit  320  further stores in the storage area KS 1  a target identifier set identifier HG 11  configured to identify the first candidate target identifier set WM 1 . The storage unit  320  is configured to have in the storage area KS 1  an application memory location YE 11  associated with the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the target identifier set identifier HG 11  is stored at the application memory location YE 11  identified based on an application memory address AE 11 . For example, the application memory location YE 11  is identified by the application memory address AE 11 . The application memory address AE 11  is determined according to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  stores in the first storage space SS 11  the first application data DA 11  to be applied to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11  and the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . For example, the first application data DA 11  includes the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the first source target identifier HS 11 , a first variable data DV 11 , a first variable logical value VL 11  and a first variable target identifier set WV 1 . 
     The first variable target identifier set WV 1  is configured to identify a first variable target set (not shown). The obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  corresponds to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  of the first application data DA 11 , corresponds to the first source target identifier HS 11  of the first application data DA 11 , corresponds to the first variable data DV 11 , corresponds to the first variable logical value VL 11 , and corresponds to the first variable target identifier set WV 1 . The first variable logical value VL 11  is associated with that whether a first data transmission TD 1  toward the first variable target set is to be enabled in the first data transmission phase UT 1  being after the first data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  300  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  at a first request time TR 1  in response to a first effective request signal QR 1 . For example, the first effective request signal QR 1  is a first interrupt request signal. In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  stores or writes the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  into the first storage space SS 11  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 , accesses or reads the first source target identifier HS 11  stored in the storage area KS 1  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the first source target identifier HS 11  from the storage area KS 1 , and thereby stores or writes the obtained first source target identifier HS 11  into the first storage space SS 11  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310 , based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , determines a first referential logical value VR 11  representing that whether the processing unit  310  currently supports the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  obtains a first desired logical value VK 11  corresponding to the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , determines a first operational logical value VQ 11  by performing a first logical AND operation PA 11  to the first referential logical value VR 11  and the first desired logical value VK 11 , and assigns the first operational logical value VQ 11  to the first variable logical value VL 11  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  optionally obtains at least a first desired target identifier HK 11 , and causes the obtained at least a first desired target identifier HK 11  to join the first variable target identifier set WV 1  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 . For example, the at least a first desired target identifier HK 11  complies with the first target identifier format stipulation SF 1 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  optionally accesses at least a first candidate target identifier HM 11  being in a first candidate target identifier set WM 1  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to select the at least a first candidate target identifier HM 11  from the first candidate target identifier set WM 1 , and causes the selected at least a first candidate target identifier HM 11  to join the first variable target identifier set WV 1  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 . 
     The specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . The third communication protocol identifier HP 3  is configured to identify the third specific application communication protocol PC 31  included in the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . For example, the third specific application communication protocol PC 31  is one of the email communication protocol and the multimedia-message service communication protocol. The storage unit  320  includes the third storage space SS 13  allocated based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . When the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  is the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the third storage space SS 13  is the first storage space SS 11 . When the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  is the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the third storage space SS 13  is the second storage space SS 12 . 
     In some embodiments, the third storage space SS 13  includes a first storage block BS 11 . The first storage block BS 11  has a third data capacity CD 13  represented by a third specific data capacity value VC 13 , wherein the third specific data capacity value VC 13  and the third data capacity CD 13  are respectively a first data limit length value VF 11  and a first data limit length LF 11 . The first data limit length LF 11  corresponds to the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , is determined according to the third specific application communication protocol PC 31  beforehand, and is a longest limit length under a condition that the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . are considered. 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  obtains a source data DS 11  having a source data length LS 11 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store the source data DS 11  in the first storage block BS 11 . For example, the source data length LS 11  is less than or equal to the first data limit length LF 11 , and is represented by a source data length value VS 11 . 
     The first storage space SS 11  includes a second storage block BS 12  configured to contain the first variable data DV 11 . For example, the second storage block BS 12  has a fourth data capacity CD 14  represented by a fourth specific data capacity value VC 14 . For example, the fourth specific data capacity value VC 14  and the fourth data capacity CD 14  are respectively a second data limit length value VF 12  and a second data limit length LF 12 . The second data limit length LF 12  is associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , is less than or equal to the first data limit length LF 11 , and is determined according to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  beforehand. 
     In some embodiments, in the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  makes a first logical decision RD 11  on whether the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is the third specific application communication protocol PC 31  by comparing the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  with the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . For example, when the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is the third specific application communication protocol PC 31 , the first logical decision RD 11  is made to be positive. 
     When the first logical decision RD 11  is positive, the processing unit  310  regards the first variable data DV 11  as the source data DS 11 , and thereby regards the first electronic data DE 11  as the source data DS 11 . When the first logical decision RD 11  is negative, the processing unit  310 , by comparing the second data limit length value VF 12  with the source data length value VS 11 , makes a second logical decision RD 12  on whether the source data DS 11  meets a first specific data length constraint condition CL 11  corresponding to the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . For example, the first specific data length constraint condition CL 11  is determined according to the second data limit length value VF 12 . 
     When the source data length value VS 11  is less than or equal to the second data limit length value VF 12 , the second logical decision RD 12  is made to be positive. When the second logical decision RD 12  is positive, the processing unit  310  assigns the source data DS 11  to the first variable data DV 11 . When the second logical decision RD 12  is negative, the processing unit  310  converts the source data DS 11  based on the second data limit length value VF 12  to determine a first operation data DG 11  meeting the first specific data length constraint condition CL 11 , and assigns the first operation data DG 11  to the first variable data DV 11 . Therefore, the processing unit  310  converts the source data DS 11  based on the second data limit length value VF 12  to determine the first electronic data DE 11 . For example, the source data DS 11  is different from the first electronic data DE 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  340  receives a first user input operation PU 81 , and provides the first effective request signal QR 1  to the processing unit  310  in response to the first user input operation PU 81 . The processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  300  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to one of the first effective request signal QR 1  and the first operation request message QN 81 , and reads the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  belonging to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     The input unit  340  receives a user input operation PK 11  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310  performs a data acquisition operation EF 11  in response to the user input operation PK 11 . The data acquisition operation EF 11  is one of a data acquisition action EF 1 A and a data acquisition action EF 1 B. The processing unit  310  uses the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the first memory address AM 11  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EF 11  is the data acquisition action EF 1 A, the processing unit  310  performs the data acquisition action EF 1 A to obtain the at least a first desired target identifier HK 11  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 , and causes the obtained at least a first desired target identifier HK 11  to join the first variable target identifier set WV 1  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 . 
     Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EF 11  is the data acquisition action EF 1 B: the processing unit  310  uses the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the application memory address AE 11  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 ; the processing unit  310  reads the target identifier set identifier HG 11  stored at the application memory location YE 11  based on the obtained application memory address AE 11 ; and the processing unit  310  accesses the at least a first candidate target identifier HM 11  belonging to the first candidate target identifier set WM 1  based on the read target identifier set identifier HG 11  to select the at least a first candidate target identifier HM 11  from the first candidate target identifier set WM 1 . 
     Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EF 11  is the data acquisition action EF 1 B: the processing unit  310  uses the read first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the first memory address AM 11  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 ; and the processing unit  310  causes one of the selected at least a first candidate target identifier HM 11  and the accessed at least a first candidate target identifier HM 11  to join the first variable target identifier set WV 1  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 . 
     The input unit  340  receives a user input operation PW 24  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310  obtains the source data DS 11  in the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the user input operation PW 14 , causes the storage unit  320  to store the source data DS 11  in the first storage block BS 11 , and determines the first variable data DV 11  based on the source data DS 11  to cause the storage unit  320  to store the first application data DA 11  in the first storage space SS 11 . 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  310  finishes preparing the first application data DA 11 , the input unit  30  receives a second user input operation PU 91 , and provides the second effective request signal QU 1  to the processing unit  310  in response to the second user input operation PU 91 . The processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  300  to leave the first data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the first data transmission phase UT 1  in response to one of the second effective request signal QU 1  and the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  51   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8513  of the communication system  851  shown in  FIG.  48   . Please additionally refer to  FIGS.  48  and  50   . The implementation structure  8513  includes the electronic device  300 , a message service system  650  and a first communication target set  510 . The message service system  650  includes a first message service device  660 . The first communication target set  510  includes the first communication target  511  and a communication target  512 . 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the processing unit  310  finishes preparing the first application data DA 11 , the processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  300  to enter the first data transmission phase UT 1  being after the first data preparation phase UP 1  at a second request time TR 2  being after the first request time TR 1  in response to the second effective request signal QU 1 , and thereby checks the stored first application data DA 11  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 . For example, the processing unit  310  receives the second effective request signal QU 1  in response to finishing preparing the first application data DA 11 . For example, the second effective request signal QU 1  is a second interrupt request signal. 
     When the electronic device  300  enters the first data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  310  confirms that the first variable data DV 11 , the first variable logical value VL 11  and the first variable target identifier set WV 1  respectively become the first electronic data DE 11 , a first effective logical value VE 11  and a first communication target identifier set WT 1 , and thereby checks the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the stored first source target identifier HS 11 , the stored first electronic data DE 11 , the stored first effective logical value VE 11  and the stored first communication target identifier set WT 1 , which are stored in the first storage space SS 11 , based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 . For example, the stored first electronic data DE 11  is derived from the source data DS 11 . The stored first communication target identifier set WT 1  is configured to identify the first communication target set  510 . The first communication target identifier HT 11  belonging to the first communication target identifier set WT 1  is configured to identify the first communication target  511  belonging to the first communication target set  510 . 
     In some embodiments, in the first data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  310  obtains the first effective logical value VE 11  from the stored first application data DA 11  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 , and makes a third logical decision RD 13  on whether the first effective logical value VE 11  stored in the first storage space SS 11  is true by evaluating the obtained first effective logical value VE 11 . 
     When the third logical decision RD 13  is positive, the processing unit  310  makes a fourth logical decision RD 14  on whether the first communication target identifier set WT 1  stored in the first storage space SS 11  is empty. When the fourth logical decision RD 14  is positive, the processing unit  310  confirms that the processing unit  310  is prohibited from performing the first data transmission TD 1  toward the first communication target set  510  in the first data transmission phase UT 1 . 
     When the fourth logical decision RD 14  is negative: the first communication target set  510  consists of one of the first communication target  511  and a first plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . ; the first communication target identifier set WT 1  consists of one of the first communication target identifier HT 11  and a first plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . ; and the processing unit  310  confirms that the processing unit  310  is allowed to use the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to perform the first data transmission TD 1  toward the first communication target set  510  in the first data transmission phase UT 1 . For example, the first plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . include the first communication target  511 , and are respectively a first plurality of external communication device or a first plurality of external electronic device. The first plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . include the first communication target identifier HT 11 . The first communication target identifier HT 11  is one of the first desired target identifier HK 11  and the selected first candidate target identifier HM 11 . 
     Under a condition that the fourth logical decision RD 14  is negative, the processing unit  310  obtains the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the first source target identifier HS 11 , the first electronic data DE 11  and the first communication target identifier set WT 1  from the stored first application data DA 11  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 . For example, under a condition that the first communication target identifier set WT 1  consists of the first communication target identifier HT 11 , the processing unit  310  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the obtained first source target identifier HS 11 , the obtained first electronic data DE 11  and the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  is coupled to the first message service device  660 . For example, the first message service device  660  supports the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is included in the message service system  650 . Under a condition that the first logical decision RD 11  is positive and the fourth logical decision RD 14  is negative, the processing unit  310  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send a first electronic message QA 11  toward the first message service device  660  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the obtained first source target identifier HS 11 , the obtained first electronic data DE 11  and the obtained first communication target identifier set WT 1 . For example, the first electronic message QA 11  includes the first source target identifier HS 11 , the first electronic data DE 11  and the first communication target identifier set WT 1 , and is or serves as a first instruction message used to instruct the first message service device  660 . 
     Under a condition that the first logical decision RD 11  is positive and the fourth logical decision RD 14  is negative and the first communication target identifier set WT 1  consists of the first communication target identifier HT 11 , the first message service device  660  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to transmit a second electronic message QA 21  toward the first communication target  511  in response to the first electronic message QA 11 , so that the first communication target  511  receives the second electronic message QA 21  in a fourth specific application communication protocol PC 41  being matched with or equal to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the second electronic message QA 21  includes the first source target identifier HS 11 , the first electronic data DE 11  and the first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     Under a condition that the first logical decision RD 11  is positive and the fourth logical decision RD 14  is negative and the first communication target identifier set WT 1  consists of the first plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . , the first message service device  660  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to separately transmit a first plurality of electronic messages QA 21 , QA 22 , . . . , respectively corresponding to the first plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . , toward the first plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . in response to the first electronic message QA 11 , so that the first plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . respectively receive the first plurality of electronic messages QA 21 , QA 22 , . . . in a first plurality of respective communication protocols, each of which is matched with or equal to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, each of the first plurality of electronic messages QA 21 , QA 22 , . . . includes the first source target identifier HS 11 , the first electronic data DE 11  and the first communication target identifier HT 11 . The first communication target  511  included in the first plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . receives the second electronic message QA 21 , included in the first plurality of electronic messages QA 21 , QA 22 , . . . , in the fourth specific application communication protocol PC 41  being matched with or equal to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , wherein the fourth specific application communication protocol PC 41  is included in the first plurality of respective communication protocols. 
     Under a condition that the first logical decision RD 11  is negative and the fourth logical decision RD 14  is negative and the first communication target identifier set WT 1  consists of the first communication target identifier HT 11 : the processing unit  310  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send a third electronic message QA 31  toward the first message service device  660  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the obtained first source target identifier HS 11 , the obtained first electronic data DE 11  and the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11 , wherein the third electronic message QA 31  includes the first source target identifier HS 11 , the first electronic data DE 11  and the first communication target identifier HT 11 ; and the first message service device  660  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to transmit a fourth electronic message QA 41  toward the first communication target  511  in response to the third electronic message QA 31 , so that the first communication target  511  receives the fourth electronic message QA 41  in a fifth specific application communication protocol PC 51  being matched with or equal to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the third electronic message QA 31  is or serves as a second instruction message used to instruct the first message service device  660 . For example, the fourth electronic message QA 41  at least includes the first electronic data DE 11 . 
     Under a condition that the first logical decision RD 11  is negative and the fourth logical decision RD 14  is negative and the first communication target identifier set WT 1  consists of the first plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . , for each first respective identifier: the processing unit  310  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send a fifth electronic message QA 51  toward the first message service device  660  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the obtained first source target identifier HS 11 , the obtained first electronic data DE 11  and the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11 , wherein the fifth electronic message QA 51  includes the first source target identifier HS 11 , the first electronic data DE 11  and the first communication target identifier HT 11 ; and the first message service device  660  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to transmit a sixth electronic message QA 61  toward each first respective target, identified by the each first respective identifier, in response to the fifth electronic message QA 51 , so that the each first respective target receives the sixth electronic message QA 61  in a sixth specific application communication protocol PC 61  being matched with or equal to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . For example, the respective fifth electronic message QA 51  is or serves as a third instruction message used to instruct the first message service device  660 . For example, the respective sixth electronic message QA 61  at least includes the first electronic data DE 11 . 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the fourth logical decision RD 14  is negative, the processing unit  310  controls the storage unit  320  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11  to obtain the stored first source target identifier HS 11 , the stored first electronic data DE 11  and the stored first communication target identifier set WT 1  from the first storage space SS 11 , and thereby outputs one selected from a group consisting of the first electronic message QA 11 , the third electronic message QA 31  and the respective fifth electronic message QA 51 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  52   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8514  of the communication system  851  shown in  FIG.  48   . Please additionally refer to  FIGS.  48 ,  50  and  51   . The implementation structure  8514  includes the electronic device  300  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  300  includes the storage unit  320 , the processing unit  310  and the input unit  340 . The storage unit  320  includes the storage area KS 1 . The second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belongs to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 1 , and is configured to identify the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is one selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is one selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . 
     The storage unit  320  further stores in the storage area KS 1  the second specific data capacity value VC 12  corresponding to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The second specific data capacity value VC 12  is determined according to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  beforehand, and represents the second data capacity CD 12  used to allocate the second storage space SS 12 . The second specific data capacity value VC 12  is different from the first specific data capacity value VC 11 , so that the second data capacity CD 12  is different from the first data capacity CD 11 . The second communication protocol identifier HP 2  is used to allocate the second storage space SS 12 . 
     The processing unit  310  obtains the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 1 , obtains the second specific data capacity value VC 12  from the storage area KS 1  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and allocates in the storage unit  320  the second storage space SS 12  having the second data capacity CD 12  based on the second specific data capacity value VC 12  to obtain the second memory address AM 12  configured to identify the second storage space SS 12 . 
     For example, the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  corresponds to the second memory address AM 12  by corresponding to the second specific data capacity value VC 12 . The second storage space SS 12  is located at a second memory location PM 12  identified by the second memory address AM 12 , and is thereby identified by the second memory address AM 12 . The second memory location PM 12  corresponds to the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and is different from the first memory location PM 11 . The second data capacity CD 12  is the same as or different from the first data capacity CD 11 . The second storage space SS 12  is different from each of the storage area KS 1  and the first storage space SS 11 . For example, the storage unit  320  has the second memory location PM 12  identified based on the second memory address AM 12 . The second memory address AM 12  is determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belonging to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  320  stores in the storage area KS 1  the second memory address AM 12  corresponding to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The processing unit  310 , based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  obtained from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 1 , accesses the second memory address AM 12  stored in the storage area KS 1  to obtain the second memory address AM 12  from the storage area KS 1 . The processing unit  310  obtains the second memory address AM 12  to identify the second storage space SS 12 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store in the first storage space SS 12  a second application data DA 12 , including the second electronic data DE 21  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 , based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 . For example, the second storage space SS 12  is allocated enough to contain the second application data DA 12 . 
     In some embodiments, the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is one selected from the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . The electronic device  300  is identified by a second source target identifier HS 21  under the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the second source target identifier HS 21  complies with the second target identifier format stipulation SF 2 . The storage unit  320  further stores in the storage area KS 1  the second source target identifier HS 21  corresponding to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and a second candidate target identifier set WM 2  corresponding to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the second candidate target identifier set WM 2  complies with the second target identifier format stipulation SF 2 . 
     The storage unit  320  further stores in the storage area KS 1  a target identifier set identifier HG 21  configured to identify the second candidate target identifier set WM 2 . The storage unit  320  is configured to have in the storage area KS 1  an application memory location YE 21  associated with the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the target identifier set identifier HG 21  is stored at the application memory location YE 21  identified based on an application memory address AE 21 . For example, the application memory location YE 21  is identified by the application memory address AE 21 . The application memory address AE 21  is determined according to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belonging to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  stores in the first storage space SS 12  the second application data DA 12  to be applied to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12  and the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the second application data DA 12  includes the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the second source target identifier HS 21 , a second variable data DV 21 , a second variable logical value VL 21  and a second variable target identifier set WV 2 . 
     The second variable target identifier set WV 2  is configured to identify a second variable target set (not shown). The obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  corresponds to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  of the second application data DA 12 , corresponds to the second source target identifier HS 21  of the second application data DA 12 , corresponds to the second variable data DV 21 , corresponds to the second variable logical value VL 21 , and corresponds to the second variable target identifier set WV 2 . The second variable logical value VL 21  is associated with that whether a second data transmission TD 2  toward the second variable target set is to be enabled in the first data transmission phase UT 1 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  stores or writes the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  into the second storage space SS 12  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 , accesses or reads the second source target identifier HS 21  stored in the storage area KS 1  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the second source target identifier HS 21  from the storage area KS 1 , and thereby stores or writes the obtained second source target identifier HS 21  into the second storage space SS 12  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310 , based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , determines a second referential logical value VR 21  representing that whether the processing unit  310  currently supports the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  obtains a second desired logical value VK 21  corresponding to the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , determines a second operational logical value VQ 21  by performing a second logical AND operation PA 21  to the second referential logical value VR 21  and the second desired logical value VK 21 , and assigns the second operational logical value VQ 21  to the second variable logical value VL 21  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  optionally obtains at least a second desired target identifier HK 21 , and causes the obtained at least a second desired target identifier HK 21  to join the second variable target identifier set WV 2  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 . For example, the at least a second desired target identifier HK 21  complies with the second target identifier format stipulation SF 2 . 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  optionally accesses at least a second candidate target identifier HM 21  being in the second candidate target identifier set WM 2  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to select the at least a second candidate target identifier HM 21  from the second candidate target identifier set WM 2 , and causes the selected at least a second candidate target identifier HM 21  to join the second variable target identifier set WV 2  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 . 
     In some embodiments, the second storage space SS 12  includes a third storage block BS 13  configured to contain the second variable data DV 21 . For example, the third storage block BS 13  has a fifth data capacity CD 15  represented by a fifth specific data capacity value VC 15 . For example, the fifth specific data capacity value VC 15  and the fifth data capacity CD 15  are respectively a third data limit length value VF 13  and a third data limit length LF 13 . The third data limit length LF 13  is associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , is less than or equal to the first data limit length LF 11 , and is determined according to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  beforehand 
     In some embodiments, in the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  makes a fifth logical decision RD 15  on whether the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is the third specific application communication protocol PC 31  by comparing the second communication protocol identifier HP 1  with the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . For example, when the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  is the third specific application communication protocol PC 31 , the fifth logical decision RD 15  is made to be positive. 
     When the fifth logical decision RD 15  is positive, the processing unit  310  regards the second variable data DV 21  as the source data DS 11 , and thereby regards the second electronic data DE 21  as the source data DS 11 . When the fifth logical decision RD 15  is negative, the processing unit  310 , by comparing the third data limit length value VF 13  with the source data length value VS 11 , makes a sixth logical decision RD 16  on whether the source data DS 11  meets a second specific data length constraint condition CL 12  corresponding to the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . For example, the second specific data length constraint condition CL 12  is determined according to the third data limit length value VF 13 . 
     When the source data length value VS 11  is less than or equal to the third data limit length value VF 13 , the sixth logical decision RD 16  is made to be positive. When the sixth logical decision RD 16  is positive, the processing unit  310  assigns the source data DS 11  to the second variable data DV 21 . When the sixth logical decision RD 16  is negative, the processing unit  310  converts the source data DS 11  based on the third data limit length value VF 13  to determine a second operation data DG 12  meeting the second specific data length constraint condition CL 12 , and assigns the second operation data DG 12  to the second variable data DV 21 . Therefore, the processing unit  310  converts the source data DS 11  based on the third data limit length value VF 13  to determine the second electronic data DE 21 . For example, the source data DS 11  is different from the second electronic data DE 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  reads the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  belonging to the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 . The input unit  340  receives a user input operation PK 21  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 . The processing unit  310  performs a data acquisition operation EF 21  in response to the user input operation PK 21 . The data acquisition operation EF 21  is one of a data acquisition action EF 2 A and a data acquisition action EF 2 B. The processing unit  310  uses the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the second memory address AM 12  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EF 21  is the data acquisition action EF 2 A, the processing unit  310  performs the data acquisition action EF 2 A to obtain the at least a second desired target identifier HK 21  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 , and causes the obtained at least a second desired target identifier HK 21  to join the second variable target identifier set WV 2  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 . 
     Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EF 21  is the data acquisition action EF 2 B: the processing unit  310  uses the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the application memory address AE 21  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 ; the processing unit  310  reads the target identifier set identifier HG 21  stored at the application memory location YE 21  based on the obtained application memory address AE 21 ; and the processing unit  310  accesses the at least a second candidate target identifier HM 21  belonging to the second candidate target identifier set WM 2  based on the read target identifier set identifier HG 21  to select the at least a second candidate target identifier HM 21  from the second candidate target identifier set WM 2 . 
     Under a condition that the data acquisition operation EF 21  is the data acquisition action EF 2 B: the processing unit  310  uses the read second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to obtain the second memory address AM 12  in the first data preparation phase UP 1 ; and the processing unit  310  causes one of the selected at least a second candidate target identifier HM 21  and the accessed at least a second candidate target identifier HM 21  to join the second variable target identifier set WV 2  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 . The processing unit  310  determines the second variable data DV 21  in the first data preparation phase UP 1  based on the source data DS 11  to cause the storage unit  320  to store the second application data DA 12  in the second storage space SS 12 . 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  310  finishes preparing the first application data DA 11  and the second application data DA 12 , the input unit  340  receives the second user input operation PU 91 , and provides the second effective request signal QU 1  to the processing unit  310  in response to the second user input operation PU 91 . The processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  300  to leave the first data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the first data transmission phase UT 1  in response to one of the second effective request signal QU 1  and the second operation request message QN 91 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  53   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8515  of the communication system  851  shown in  FIG.  48   . Please additionally refer to  FIGS.  48 ,  50 ,  51  and  52   . The implementation structure  8515  includes the electronic device  300 , the message service system  650  and a second communication target set  520 . The message service system  650  includes a second message service device  670 . The second communication target set  520  includes the second communication target  521  and a communication target  522 . 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the processing unit  310  finishes preparing the first application data DA 11  and the second application data DA 12 , the processing unit  310  causes the electronic device  300  to enter the first data transmission phase UT 1  at the second request time TR 2  in response to the second effective request signal QU 1 , and thereby checks the stored second application data DA 12  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 . For example, the processing unit  310  receives the second effective request signal QU 1  in response to finishing preparing the first application data DA 11  and the second application data DA 12 . 
     When the electronic device  300  enters the first data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  310  confirms that the second variable data DV 21 , the second variable logical value VL 21  and the second variable target identifier set WV 2  respectively become the second electronic data DE 21 , a second effective logical value VE 21  and a second communication target identifier set WT 2 , and thereby checks the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the stored second source target identifier HS 21 , the stored second electronic data DE 21 , the stored second effective logical value VE 21  and the stored second communication target identifier set WT 2 , which are stored in the second storage space SS 12 , based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 . For example, the stored second communication target identifier set WT 2  is configured to identify the second communication target set  520 . The second communication target identifier HT 21  belonging to the second communication target identifier set WT 2  is configured to identify the second communication target  521  belonging to the second communication target set  520 . 
     In the first data transmission phase UT 1 , the processing unit  310  obtains the second effective logical value VE 21  from the stored second application data DA 12  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 , and makes a seventh logical decision RD 17  on whether the second effective logical value VE 21  stored in the second storage space SS 12  is true by evaluating the obtained second effective logical value VE 21 . 
     When the seventh logical decision RD 17  is positive, the processing unit  310  makes an eighth logical decision RD 18  on whether the second communication target identifier set WT 2  stored in the second storage space SS 12  is empty. When the eighth logical decision RD 18  is positive, the processing unit  310  confirms that the processing unit  310  is prohibited from performing the second data transmission TD 2  toward the second communication target set  520  in the first data transmission phase UT 1 . 
     When the eighth logical decision RD 18  is negative: the second communication target set  520  consists of one of the second communication target  521  and a second plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . ; the second communication target identifier set WT 2  consists of one of the second communication target identifier HT 21  and a second plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . ; and the processing unit  310  confirms that the processing unit  310  is allowed to use the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to perform the second data transmission TD 2  toward the second communication target set  520  in the first data transmission phase UT 1 . For example, the second plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . include the second communication target  521 , and are respectively a second plurality of external communication device or a second plurality of external electronic device. The second plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . include the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The second communication target identifier HT 21  is one of the second desired target identifier HK 21  and the selected second candidate target identifier HM 21 . 
     Under a condition that the eighth logical decision RD 18  is negative, the processing unit  310  obtains the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the second source target identifier HS 21 , the second electronic data DE 21  and the second communication target identifier set WT 2  from the stored second application data DA 12  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 . For example, under a condition that the second communication target identifier set WT 2  consists of the second communication target identifier HT 21 , the processing unit  310  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the second electronic data DE 21  toward the second communication target  521  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the obtained second source target identifier HS 21 , the obtained second electronic data DE 21  and the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  is further coupled to a second message service device  670  included in the message service system  650 . For example, the second message service device  670  supports the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and is the same as or different from the first message service device  660 . Under a condition that the fifth logical decision RD 15  is positive and the eighth logical decision RD 18  is negative, the processing unit  310  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send a seventh electronic message QA 71  toward the second message service device  670  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the obtained second source target identifier HS 21 , the obtained second electronic data DE 21  and the obtained second communication target identifier set WT 2 . For example, the seventh electronic message QA 71  includes the second source target identifier HS 21 , the second electronic data DE 21  and the second communication target identifier set WT 2 , and is or serves as a fourth instruction message used to instruct the second message service device  670 . 
     Under a condition that the fifth logical decision RD 15  is positive and the eighth logical decision RD 18  is negative and the second communication target identifier set WT 2  consists of the second communication target identifier HT 21 , the second message service device  670  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to transmit an eighth electronic message QA 81  toward the second communication target  521  in response to the seventh electronic message QA 71 , so that the second communication target  521  receives the eighth electronic message QA 81  in a seventh specific application communication protocol PC 71  being matched with or equal to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the eighth electronic message QA 81  includes the second source target identifier HS 21 , the second electronic data DE 21  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     Under a condition that the fifth logical decision RD 15  is positive and the eighth logical decision RD 18  is negative and the second communication target identifier set WT 2  consists of the second plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . , the second message service device  670  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to separately transmit a second plurality of electronic messages QA 81 , QAE 82 , . . . , respectively corresponding to the second plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . , toward the second plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . in response to the seventh electronic message QA 71 , so that the second plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . respectively receive the second plurality of electronic messages QA 81 , QA 82 , . . . in a second plurality of respective communication protocols, each of which is matched with or equal to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, each of the second plurality of electronic messages QA 81 , QA 82 , . . . includes the second source target identifier HS 21 , the second electronic data DE 21  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 . The second communication target  521  included in the second plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . receives the eighth electronic message QA 81 , included in the second plurality of electronic messages QA 81 , QA 82 , . . . , in the seventh specific application communication protocol PC 71  being matched with or equal to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , wherein the seventh specific application communication protocol PC 71  is included in the second plurality of respective communication protocols. 
     Under a condition that the fifth logical decision RD 15  is negative and the eighth logical decision RD 18  is negative and the second communication target identifier set WT 2  consists of the second communication target identifier HT 21 : the processing unit  310  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send a ninth electronic message QA 91  toward the second message service device  670  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the obtained second source target identifier HS 21 , the obtained second electronic data DE 21  and the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21 , wherein the ninth electronic message QA 91  includes the second source target identifier HS 21 , the second electronic data DE 21  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 ; and the second message service device  670  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to transmit a tenth electronic message QAA 1  toward the second communication target  521  in response to the ninth electronic message QA 91 , so that the second communication target  521  receives the tenth electronic message QAA 1  in an eighth specific application communication protocol PC 81  being matched with or equal to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the ninth electronic message QA 91  is or serves as a fifth instruction message used to instruct the second message service device  670 . For example, the tenth electronic message QAA 1  at least includes the second electronic data DE 21 . 
     Under a condition that the fifth logical decision RD 15  is negative and the eighth logical decision RD 18  is negative and the second communication target identifier set WT 2  consists of the second plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . , for each second respective identifier: the processing unit  310  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send an eleventh electronic message QAB 1  toward the second message service device  670  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the obtained second source target identifier HS 21 , the obtained second electronic data DE 21  and the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21 , wherein the eleventh electronic message QAB 1  includes the second source target identifier HS 21 , the second electronic data DE 21  and the second communication target identifier HT 21 ; and the second message service device  670  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to transmit a twelfth electronic message QAC 1  toward each second respective target, identified by the each second respective identifier, in response to the eleventh electronic message QAB 1 , so that the each second respective target receives the twelfth electronic message QAC 1  in a ninth specific application communication protocol PC 91  being matched with or equal to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the respective eleventh electronic message QAB 1  is or serves as a sixth instruction message used to instruct the second message service device  670 . For example, the respective twelfth electronic message QAC 1  at least includes the second electronic data DE 21 . 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the eighth logical decision RD 18  is negative, the processing unit  310  controls the storage unit  320  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12  to obtain the stored second source target identifier HS 21 , the stored second electronic data DE 21  and the stored second communication target identifier set WT 2  from the second storage space SS 12 , and thereby outputs one selected from a group consisting of the seventh electronic message QA 71 , the ninth electronic message QA 91  and the respective eleventh electronic message QAB 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the second communication target set  520  is a first empty set, or consists of one of the second communication target  521  and the second plurality of communication targets  521 ,  522 , . . . . The second communication target identifier set WT 2  is a second empty set, or consists of one of the second communication target identifier HT 21  and the second plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . . The second communication target  521  is the same as or different from the first communication target  511 . The storage unit  320  stores the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  in the storage area KS 1 . The specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is configured to identify the specific communication protocol group GP 1 , and consists of a plurality of communication protocol identifiers HP 1 , HP 2 , . . . including the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     In some embodiments, the plurality of communication protocol identifiers HP 1 , HP 2 , . . . are configured to respectively identify the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . , and respectively have a plurality of ordinal positions respectively represented by a plurality of ordinal numbers NP 1 , NP 2 , . . . , so that the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  has a first ordinal position represented by a first ordinal number NP 1 , and the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  has a second ordinal position represented by a second ordinal number NP 2 . The plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . constitute the specific communication protocol group GP 1 , and include the first and the second specific application communication protocols PC 11  and PC 21 . For example, the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  is a specific communication protocol identifier array, and is determined beforehand. 
     In the first data preparation phase UP 1  or before the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  accesses the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  in the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 1  based on the first ordinal number NP 1  to obtain the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  in the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 1  based on the second ordinal number NP 2  to obtain the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The processing unit  310  obtains the plurality of communication protocol identifiers HP 1 , HP 2 , . . . from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , and sequentially performs a plurality of data transmission respectively associated with the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . under the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . based on the obtained plurality of communication protocol identifiers HP 1 , HP 2 , . . . . 
     In some embodiments, each of the first plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . is one selected from a group consisting of a first email address, a first telephone number, a first uniform resource locator (URL) and a first network address, and complies with the first target identifier format stipulation SF 1 . For example, the respective first telephone number is a first mobile telephone number. The first source target identifier HS 11  complies with the first target identifier format stipulation SF 1 , and is to be used to perform a third data transmission toward the electronic device  300  under the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     Each of the second plurality of communication target identifiers HT 21 , HT 22 , . . . is one selected from a group consisting of a second email address, a second telephone number, a second uniform resource locator (URL) and a second network address, and complies with the second target identifier format stipulation SF 2 . For example, the respective second telephone number is a second mobile telephone number. The second source target identifier HS 21  complies with the second target identifier format stipulation SF 2 , and is to be used to perform a fourth data transmission toward the electronic device  300  under the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  300  includes the storage unit  320  and the processing unit  310 . The storage unit  320  stores the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  configured to identify the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The processing unit  310  is coupled to the storage unit  320 , and obtains the first electronic data DE 11  and the first communication target identifier HT 11  to use the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  in response to one of the first effective request signal QR 1  and the second effective request signal QU 1 , wherein the first communication target identifier HT 11  is accessed based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and the first communication target  511  is identified by the first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  54   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8516  of the communication system  851  shown in  FIG.  48   . Please additionally refer to  FIGS.  48 ,  49 ,  50 ,  51 ,  52  and  53   . The implementation structure  8516  includes the electronic device  300 , the message service system  650 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The message service system  650  includes the first message service device  660  and the second message service device  670 . 
     In some embodiments, any of the electronic devices  400  and  300  is one selected from a group consisting of a first computing device, a first communication device, a first user device, a first control device, a first mobile device, a first portable device, a first desktop device, a first relatively fixed device, a first fixed device, and any combination thereof. Any of the electronic devices  400  and  300  is identified by the first source target identifier HS 11  under the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is identified by the second source target identifier HS 21  under the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 . For example, the first communication target identifier set WT 1  includes or is independent from the first source target identifier HS 11 . The second communication target identifier set WT 2  includes or is independent from the second source target identifier HS 21 . 
     The first plurality of communication target identifiers HT 11 , HT 12 , . . . are to be used for respectively linking to the first plurality of communication targets  511 ,  512 , . . . by using the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The first source target identifiers HS 11  is to be used for linking to the electronic device  300  by using the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , and is one selected from a group consisting of a third email address, a third telephone number, a third uniform resource locator (URL) and a third network address. For example, the respective third telephone number is a third mobile telephone number. 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  performs a specific application function FA 1 . For example, the specific application function FA 1  is identified by an application function identifier HF 1 . The first specific data capacity value VC 11  is determined beforehand according to one being selected from a group consisting of the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , the specific application function FA 1  and a combination thereof. The second specific data capacity value VC 12  is determined beforehand according to one being selected from a group consisting of the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , the specific application function FA 1  and a combination thereof. The third specific data capacity value VC 13  is determined beforehand according to one being selected from a group consisting of the third specific application communication protocol PC 31 , the specific application function FA 1  and a combination thereof. The fourth specific data capacity value VC 14  is determined beforehand according to one being selected from a group consisting of the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , the specific application function FA 1  and a combination thereof. The fifth specific data capacity value VC 15  is determined beforehand according to one being selected from a group consisting of the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , the specific application function FA 1  and a combination thereof. 
     In some embodiments, the storage unit  320  is controlled by the processing unit  310 , includes a nonvolatile memory unit  322  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and a volatile memory unit  324  coupled to the processing unit  310 , and stores a stored data DN 11 , the first application data DA 11  and the second application data DA 12 . For example, the stored data DN 11  is stored in the storage area KS 1 . The nonvolatile memory unit  322  includes a nonvolatile memory space SN 51  coupled to the processing unit  310 . The volatile memory unit  324  includes a volatile memory space SV 51  coupled to the processing unit  310 . 
     When the first storage space SS 11  is the first nonvolatile memory space, the first storage space SS 11  is included in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  of the nonvolatile memory unit  322 . When the first storage space SS 11  is the first volatile memory space, the first storage space SS 11  is included in the volatile memory space SV 51  of the volatile memory unit  324 . When the second storage space SS 12  is the second nonvolatile memory space, the second storage space SS 12  is included in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  of the nonvolatile memory unit  322 . 
     When the second storage space SS 12  is the second volatile memory space, the second storage space SS 12  is included in the volatile memory space SV 51  of the volatile memory unit  324 . When the storage area KS 1  is the nonvolatile memory area, the storage area KS 1  is included in the nonvolatile memory space SN 51  of the nonvolatile memory unit  322 . When the storage area KS 1  is the volatile memory area, the storage area KS 1  is included in the volatile memory space SV 51  of the volatile memory unit  324 . For example, the third storage space SS 13  is disposed in the volatile memory space SV 51  of the volatile memory unit  324 . 
     The stored data DN 11  is stored in the storage area KS 1 , and includes the application function identifier HF 1 , the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1 , a first reference data DX 11  stored in the storage area KS 1  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , a second reference data DX 12  stored in the storage area KS 1  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and a third reference data DX 13  stored in the storage area KS 1  based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 . 
     The first reference data DX 11 , the second reference data DX 12  and the third reference data DX 13  are respectively stored at a third memory location PM 13 , a fourth memory location PM 14  and a fifth memory location PM 15 . The third, the fourth and the fifth memory locations PM 13 , PM 14  and PM 15  are respectively identified by a third memory address AM 13 , a fourth memory address AM 14  and a fifth memory address AM 15 , or are respectively identified based on the third, the fourth and the fifth memory addresses AM 13 , AM 14  and AM 15 . 
     In some embodiments, the third, the fourth and the fifth memory addresses AM 13 , AM 14  and AM 15  are respectively determined based on the first, the second and the third communication protocol identifiers HP 1 , HP 2  and HP 3 , so that the first reference data DX 11 , the second reference data DX 12  and the third reference data DX 13  are configured to respectively correspond to the first, the second and the third communication protocol identifiers HP 1 , HP 2  and HP 3 . 
     The specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  include the first and the second communication protocol identifiers HP 1  and HP 2 . Under a condition that the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  is the first communication protocol identifiers HP 1 : the third reference data DX 13  is included in the first reference data DX 11 ; the fifth memory location PM 15  is the third memory location PM 13 ; and the fifth memory address AM 15  is the third memory address AM 13 . Under a condition that the third communication protocol identifier HP 3  is the second communication protocol identifiers HP 2 : the third reference data DX 13  is included in the second reference data DX 12 ; the fifth memory location PM 15  is the fourth memory location PM 14 ; and the fifth memory address AM 15  is the fourth memory address AM 14 . 
     For example, the processing unit  310  is configured to cause the storage unit  320  to store the third, the fourth and the fifth memory addresses AM 13 , AM 14  and AM 15  in the storage area KS 1 . The third, the fourth and the fifth memory addresses AM 13 , AM 14  and AM 15  are configured to be respectively determined according to the first, the second and the third communication protocol identifiers HP 1 , HP 2  and HP 3 . 
     The first reference data DX 11  includes a first plurality of application parameters, which include the first source target identifier HS 11 , the first candidate target identifier set WM 1 , the first referential logical value VR 11 , the first specific data capacity value VC 11 , the fourth specific data capacity value VC 14 , the first memory address AM 11  and the first display coordinate data DP 11 . The second reference data DX 12  includes a second plurality of application parameters, which include the second source target identifier HS 21 , the second candidate target identifier set WM 2 , the second referential logical value VR 21 , the second specific data capacity value VC 12 , the fifth specific data capacity value VC 15 , the second memory address AM 12  and the second display coordinate data DP 12 . The third reference data DX 13  includes the third specific data capacity value VC 13 . 
     The processing unit  310  obtains the third memory address AM 13  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses at least a first application parameter included in the first plurality of application parameters based on the obtained third memory address AM 13  to obtain the at least a first application parameter. The processing unit  310  obtains the fourth memory address AM 14  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and accesses at least a second application parameter included in the second plurality of application parameters based on the obtained fourth memory address AM 14  to obtain the at least a second application parameter. The processing unit  310  obtains the fifth memory address AM 15  based on the third communication protocol identifier HP 3 , and accesses the third specific data capacity value VC 13  included in the third reference data DX 13  based on the obtained fifth memory address AM 15  to obtain the third specific data capacity value VC 13 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  includes a communication interface unit  314  and a processor  312 . The communication interface unit  314  is coupled to the first and the second message service devices  660  and  670 . For example, the communication interface unit  314  is one of a wireless interface unit and a wired interface unit. The processor  312  is coupled to the storage unit  320  and the communication interface unit  314 , and controls the storage unit  320  and the communication interface unit  314 . 
     In some embodiments, the processor  312  obtains the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 1 , and obtains the first specific data capacity value VC 11  representing the first data capacity CD 11  from the storage area KS 1  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . The processor  312  allocates in the storage unit  320  the first storage space SS 11  having the first data capacity CD 11  based on the obtained first specific data capacity value VC 11  to obtain the first memory address AM 11  configured to identify the first storage space SS 11 . In addition, the processor  712  prepares the first electronic data DE 11  and the first communication target identifier HT 11  in the first storage space SS 11  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 . 
     Under a condition that the processor  312  finishes preparing the first electronic data DE 11 , the second electronic data DE 21 , the first communication target identifier HT 11  and the second communication target identifier HT 21  in the storage unit  320 , the processor  312  controls the storage unit  320  to access the prepared first electronic data DE 11  and the prepared first communication target identifier HT 11  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11  to cause the communication interface unit  314  to obtain the prepared first electronic data DE 11  and the prepared first communication target identifier HT 11  from the first storage space SS 11 , and controls the communication interface unit  314  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to cause the communication interface unit  314  to use the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to send the first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511 . 
     The processor  312  outputs a first control signal QT 11  to the communication interface unit  314  based on the obtained first communication protocol identifier HP 1  and the obtained first memory address AM 11 . The communication interface unit  314  uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to output one selected from a group consisting of the first electronic message QA 11 , the third electronic message QA 31  and the respective fifth electronic message QA 51  toward the first message service device  660  based on the first control signal QT 11 , the obtained first electronic data DE 11  and the obtained first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     The processor  312  obtains the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 1 , and obtains the second specific data capacity value VC 12  representing the second data capacity CD 12  from the storage area KS 1  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . The processor  712  allocates in the storage unit  320  the second storage space SS 12  having the second data capacity CD 12  based on the obtained second specific data capacity value VC 12  to obtain the second memory address AM 12  configured to identify the second storage space SS 12 . In addition, the processor  712  prepares the second electronic data DE 21  and the second communication target identifier HT 21  in the second storage space SS 12  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 . 
     Under a condition that the processor  312  finishes preparing the first electronic data DE 11 , the second electronic data DE 21 , the first communication target identifier HT 11  and the second communication target identifier HT 21  in the storage unit  320 , the processor  312  controls the storage unit  320  to access the prepared second electronic data DE 21  and the prepared second communication target identifier HT 21  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12  to cause the communication interface unit  314  to obtain the prepared second electronic data DE 21  and the prepared second communication target identifier HT 21  from the second storage space SS 12 , and controls the communication interface unit  314  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  to cause the communication interface unit  314  to use the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to send the second electronic data DE 21  toward the second communication target  521 . 
     The processor  312  outputs a second control signal QT 12  to the communication interface unit  314  based on the obtained second communication protocol identifier HP 2  and the obtained second memory address AM 12 . The communication interface unit  314  uses the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to output one selected from a group consisting of the seventh electronic message QA 71 , the ninth electronic message QA 91  and the respective eleventh electronic message QAB 1  toward the second message service device  670  based on the second control signal QT 12 , the obtained second electronic data DE 21  and the obtained second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the fourth logical decision RD 14  is negative, the processor  312  controls the storage unit  320  and the communication interface unit  314  to cause the communication interface unit  314  to obtain the stored first source target identifier HS 11 , the stored first electronic data DE 11  and the stored first communication target identifier set WT 1  from the first storage space SS 11  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 , and outputs the first control signal QT 11  to the communication interface unit  314  to cause the communication interface unit  314  to use the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to output one selected from a group consisting of the first electronic message QA 11 , the third electronic message QA 31  and the respective fifth electronic message QA 51 . 
     Under a condition that the eighth logical decision RD 18  is negative, the processor  312  controls the storage unit  320  and the communication interface unit  314  to cause the communication interface unit  314  to obtain the stored second source target identifier HS 21 , the stored second electronic data DE 21  and the stored second communication target identifier set WT 2  from the second storage space SS 12  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 , and outputs the second control signal QT 12  to the communication interface unit  314  to cause the communication interface unit  314  to use the second specific application communication protocol PC 21  to output one selected from a group consisting of the seventh electronic message QA 71 , the ninth electronic message QA 91  and the respective eleventh electronic message QAB 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the first communication target  511  is one selected from a group consisting of a second computing device, a second communication device, a second user device, a second mobile device, a second portable device, a second desktop device, a second relatively fixed device, a second fixed device, and any combination thereof. The second communication target  521  is one selected from a group consisting of a third computing device, a third communication device, a third user device, a third mobile device, a third portable device, a third desktop device, a third relatively fixed device, a third fixed device, and any combination thereof. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  55   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8517  of the communication system  851  shown in  FIG.  48   . Please additionally refer to  FIGS.  48 ,  49 ,  51 ,  53  and  54   . The implementation structure  8517  includes the electronic device  300 , a network  610 , the message service system  650 , the first communication target  511  and a user  910 . The message service system  650  includes the first and the second message service devices  660  and  670 . The electronic device  300  includes the processing unit  310 , the storage unit  320  and the display unit  330 . The display unit  330  is coupled to the processor  312 , and is controlled by the processor  312  to display a data content of the first application data DA 11 , and a data content of the second application data DA 12 . 
     In some embodiments, any of the electronic devices  400  and  300  is one selected from a group consisting of the first computing device, the first communication device, the first user device, the first control device, the first mobile device, the first portable device, the first desktop device, the first relatively fixed device, the first fixed device and any combination thereof, is used by the user  910 , and includes the input unit  340 , a sensing unit  350  and a timer  360 . The input unit  340  is coupled to the processor  312 , is controlled by the processor  312 , and provides a first input data DB 11  to the processor  312 . The sensing unit  350  is coupled to the processor  312 , is controlled by the processor  312 , and is configured to sense a variable physical parameter FP 11  to provide a sensed data DQ 11  to the processor  312 . 
     For example, the variable physical parameter FP 11  is one selected from a group consisting of a variable electrical parameter, a variable mechanic parameter, a variable optical parameter, a variable magnetic parameter, a variable real time, a variable real temperature, a variable color temperature, a variable electrical voltage, a variable electrical current, a variable electrical power, a variable electrical resistance, a variable electrical capacitance, a variable electrical inductance, a variable frequency, a clock time, a variable time length, a variable luminance, a variable luminous intensity, a variable application image, a variable application sound, a variable sound volume, a variable flow rate, a variable amplitude, a variable spatial location, a variable displacement, a variable sequence position, a variable angle, a variable spatial length, a variable distance, a variable translational velocity, a variable angular velocity, a variable acceleration, a variable force, a variable pressure and a variable mechanical power and any combination thereof. The timer  360  is coupled to the processor  312 , and is controlled by the processor  312 . 
     For example, the sensing unit  350  includes an image sensing component  351  and a sound sensing component  352 . Each of the image sensing component  351  and the sound sensing component  352  is coupled to the processor  312 . Under a condition that the user  910  presents or is configured to present an application image, the image sensing component  351  is configured to sense the application image of the user  910  to cause the sensed data DQ 11  to include an image data. Under a condition that the user  910  makes an application sound, the sound sensing component  352  is configured to sense the application sound, made by the user  910 , to cause the sensed data DQ 11  to include a sound data. For example, the image sensing component  351  is a camera. The sound sensing component  352  is a microphone. The application image is one selected from a group consisting of a face image, a fingerprint, a hand image, a body-portion image and a body image. The application sound is one selected from a group consisting of a voice, a musical sound, and a combination of the voice and the musical sound. For example, the sensing unit  350  includes at least one of the image sensing component  351  and the sound sensing component  352 . 
     The communication interface unit  314  is further coupled to the network  610 , and receives an input message QY 11  including a second input data DY 11 . For example, the communication interface unit  314  receives the input message QY 11  through the network  610 . For example, the communication interface unit  314  receives the input message QY 11  from one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . Each of the first and the second message service devices  660  and  670  is coupled to the network  610 , and is included in the message service system  650 . The electronic device  300  further includes a bus  380 . The bus  380  is coupled to the processor  312 , the communication interface unit  314 , the timer  360 , the storage unit  320 , the input unit  340 , the display unit  330  and the sensing unit  350 . For example, the communication interface unit  314  sends the first electronic data DE 11  toward the first communication target  511  through the network  610 , and sends the second electronic data DE 21  toward the second communication target  521  through the network  610 . For example, the second electronic data DE 21  is one selected from a group consisting of a service data, an article data, an object data, a measured data, a recognized data, a control application data, a manufacturing data, a material data, a management data, and any combination thereof. 
     Under a condition that the electronic device  300  is applied to the first specific application communication protocol PC 11 , the first source target identifier HS 11  stored in the storage area KS 1  serves as a first user identifier configured to identify the user  910 . Under a condition that the electronic device  300  is applied to the second specific application communication protocol PC 21 , the second source target identifier HS 21  stored in the storage area KS 1  serves as a second user identifier configured to identify the user  910 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  340  receives the first user input operation PU 81  performed by the user  910 . The processor  312  receives the first effective request signal QR 1  to cause the electronic device  300  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to one selected from a group consisting of the first user input operation PU 81  associated with the input unit  340  and the user  910 , a message reception associated with the input message QY 11 , a first specific request message QM 1  received by the communication interface unit  314 , and a first integer overflow associated with the timer  360 . 
     In some embodiments, the communication interface unit  314  receives the first specific request message QM 1  including a first specific control instruction. For example, the first specific request message QM 1  is a first input request message, so that the first effective request signal QR 1  may be the first specific request message QM 1 . The processor  312  causes the electronic device  300  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  based on the first specific control instruction. For example, the communication interface unit  314  receives the first specific request message QM 1  through the network  610 . For example, the communication interface unit  314  receives the first specific request message QM 1  from one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  340  provides the first effective request signal QR 1  to the processor  312  in response to the first user input operation PU 81 , wherein the first effective request signal QR 1  may be the first interrupt request signal. In some embodiments, the timer  360  provides the first effective request signal QR 1  to the processor  312  in response to the first integer overflow, wherein the first effective request signal QR 1  may be the first interrupt request signal. 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) causes the electronic device  300  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the message reception: the second input data DY 11  includes the first application data DA 11  and the second application data DA 12 ; in the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) obtains the first memory address AM 11  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  obtained from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 1 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store or write the received first application data DA 11  into the first storage space SS 11  based on the obtained first memory address AM 11 ; and in the first data preparation phase UP 1 , the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) obtains the second memory address AM 12  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  obtained from the specific communication protocol identifier group GH 1  stored in the storage area KS 1 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store or write the received second application data DA 12  into the second storage space SS 12  based on the obtained second memory address AM 12 . 
     The first memory address AM 11  is one of a first base address and a first end address, so that the first memory location PM 11  is one of a first base location and a first end location. The second memory address AM 12  is one of a second base address and a second end address, so that the second memory location PM 12  is one of a second base location and a second end location. 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) causes the electronic device  300  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first user input operation PU 81 , the input unit  340  in the first data preparation phase UP 1  receives the user input operation PK 11  performed by the user  910 , the user input operation PK 21  performed by the user  910 , and the user input operation PW 14  performed by the user  910 . Therefore, the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) obtains or determines the source data DS 11  in the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the user input operation PW 14  associated with the input unit  340  and the user  910 , determines the first variable data DV 11  based on the source data DS 11  to cause the storage unit  320  to store the first application data DA 11  in the first storage space SS 21 , and determines the second variable data DV 21  based on the source data DS 11  to cause the storage unit  320  to store the first application data DA 12  in the second storage space SS 12 . 
     The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) causes the storage unit  320  to prepare the first communication target identifier HT 11  in the first storage space SS 11  to form the first application data DA 11  in the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the user input operation PK 11 , and causes the storage unit  320  to prepare the second communication target identifier HT 21  in the second storage space SS 12  to form the second application data DA 12  in the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the user input operation PK 21 . 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) finishes preparing the first application data DA 11  and the second application data DA 12 , the input unit  340  receives the second user input operation PU 91  performed by the user  910 . Therefore, under a condition that the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) finishes preparing the first application data DA 11  and the second application data DA 12 , the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) receives the second effective request signal QU 1  in response to one selected from a group consisting of the second user input operation PU 91  associated with the input unit  340  and the user  910 , a second specific request message QM 2  received by the communication interface unit  314 , and a second integer overflow associated with the timer  360 . 
     In some embodiments, the communication interface unit  314  receives the second specific request message QM 2  including a second specific control instruction. For example, the second specific request message QM 2  is a second input request message, so that the second effective request signal QU 1  may be the second specific request message QM 2 . The processor  312  causes the electronic device  300  to leave the first data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the first data transmission phase UT 1  based on the second specific control instruction. For example, the communication interface unit  314  receives the second specific request message QM 2  through the network  610 . For example, the communication interface unit  314  receives the second specific request message QM 2  from one of the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  340  provides the second effective request signal QU 1  to the processor  312  in response to the second user input operation PU 91 , wherein the second effective request signal QU 1  may be the second interrupt request signal. In some embodiments, the timer  360  provides the second effective request signal QU 1  to the processor  312  in response to the second integer overflow, wherein the second effective request signal QU 1  may be the second interrupt request signal. 
     Under a condition that the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) causes the electronic device  300  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  in response to the first user input operation PU 81 , the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) obtains or determines the source data DS 11  for the specific application function FA 1  based on a third application data DA 13  provided by the electronic device  300 . For example, the third application data DA 13  is one selected from a group consisting of the first input data DB 11 , the stored data DN 11 , the sensed data DQ 11 , the second input data DY 11 , and any combination thereof. For example, each of the first desired logical value VK 11 , the at least a first desired target identifier HK 11 , the second desired logical value VK 21 , and the at least a second desired target identifier HK 21  is determined based on the third application data DA 13 , and is desired by the user  910 . For example, the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) obtains or determines the third application data DA 13  by means of one selected from a group consisting of the input unit  340 , the sensing unit  350 , the storage unit  320 , the timer  360  and the communication interface unit  314 . 
     The message service system  650  includes a plurality of message service devices  660 ,  670 , . . . respectively support the plurality of different application communication protocols PC 11 , PC 21 , . . . . For example, the plurality of message service devices  660 ,  670 , . . . include the first and the second message service devices  660  and  670 ; and each of the plurality of message service devices  660 ,  670 , . . . is coupled to the communication interface unit  314  and the network  610 . For example, the specific application function FA 1  is one selected from a group consisting of a service function, a communication function, a control function, a data processing function, a data analysis function, a data conversion function, and any combination thereof. For example, the communication interface unit  314  transmits one selected from a group consisting of the first electronic message QA 11 , the third electronic message QA 31  and the respective fifth electronic message QA 51  toward the first message service device  660  through the network  610 , and transmits one selected from a group consisting of the seventh electronic message QA 71 , the ninth electronic message QA 91  and the respective eleventh electronic message QAB 1  toward the second message service device  670  through the network  610 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) determines the source data DS 11  in the first data preparation phase UP 1  based on one selected from a group consisting of the first input data DB 11 , the stored data DN 11 , the sensed data DQ 11 , the second input data DY 11 , and any combination thereof, and thereby causes the storage unit  320  to separately store the first electronic data DE 11  and the second electronic data DE 21  in the first and the second storage spaces SS 11  and SS 12 . For example, the first electronic data DE 11  is one selected from a group consisting of a service data, an article data, an object data, a measured data, a recognized data, a control application data, a manufacturing data, a material data, a management data, and any combination thereof. For example, the communication interface unit  314  supports the first and the second specific application communication protocols PC 11  and PC 21 . For example, the input unit  340  receives in the first data preparation phase UP 1  the user input operation PW 14  performed by the user  910 , and provides the first input data DB 11  to the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) in response to the user input operation PW 14  associated with the user  910 . For example, the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) obtains the source data DS 11  from the stored data DN 11  in response to the user input operation PW 14 , and causes the storage unit  320  to store in the storage block BS 11  the source data DS 11  obtained from the stored data DN 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  340  in a second data preparation phase UP 2  being after the first data transmission phase UT 1  receives a user input operation PW 15  performed by the user  910 . Therefore, the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ), in the second data preparation phase UP 2  in response to the user input operation PW 15  associated with the user  910  and the input unit  340 , changes the first application data DA 11 , stored in the first storage space SS 11 , into a fourth application data DA 14 . For example, the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) optionally changes a data content of the first electronic data DE 11  stored in the first storage space SS 11  to form the fourth application data DA 14  in response to the user input operation PW 15 . 
     The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ), in response to the user input operation PW 15 , optionally further changes a logical-value content of the first effective logical value VE 11 , stored in the first storage space SS 11 , to form the fourth application data DA 14 . The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ), in response to the user input operation PW 15 , optionally further changes an identifier-set content of the first communication target identifier set WT 1 , stored in the first storage space SS 11 , to form the fourth application data DA 24 . 
     In some embodiments, under a condition that the first application data DA 11  stored in the first storage space SS 11  is changed into the fourth application data DA 14 , the input unit  340  receives a user input operation PW 16  performed by the user  910 . The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) receives a third effective request signal QU 2  in response to the user input operation PW 16  associated with the user  910  and the input unit  340 , and causes the electronic device  300  to enter a second data transmission phase UT 2  being after the second data preparation phase UP 2  in response to the third effective request signal QU 2 . For example, the third effective request signal QU 2  is a third interrupt request signal. 
     The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) accesses the fourth application data DA 14 , stored in the first storage space SS 11 , in the second data transmission phase UT 2  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  to obtain the fourth application data DA 14  from the storage unit  320 , and uses the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  to perform a fifth data transmission TD 5  based on the obtained fourth application data DA 14 . For example, the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) causes the electronic device  300  to enter the second data preparation phase UP 2  in response to a fourth effective request signal QR 2 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  56   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8518  of the communication system  851  shown in  FIG.  48   . Please additionally refer to  FIGS.  48 ,  49 ,  51 ,  53 ,  54  and  55   . The implementation structure  8518  includes the electronic device  300  and the user  910 . The electronic device  300  includes the processing unit  310 , the storage unit  320  and the display unit  330 . The display unit  330  includes the first display area KD 11  associated with the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and a second display area KD 12  associated with the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     For example, the first display area KD 11  includes a first display border ND 11  being dependent on a first plurality of display reference locations PF 11 , PF 12 , PF 13  and PF 14 , and has a first display area value VA 11  being proportional to the first specific data capacity value VC 11 . The second display area KD 12  includes a second display border ND 12  being dependent on a second plurality of display reference locations PF 21 , PF 22 , PF 23  and PF 24 , and has a second display area value VA 12  being proportional to the second specific data capacity value VC 12 . 
     The first and the second display areas KD 11  and KD 12  are different, and are respectively represented by the first display coordinate data DP 11  and a second display coordinate data DP 12 . The first and the second display coordinate data DP 11  and DP 12  are respectively associated with the first and the second communication protocol identifiers HP 1  and HP 2 . For example, the first display coordinate data DP 11  includes a first plurality of screen reference coordinates configured to respectively represent the first plurality of display reference locations PF 11 , PF 12 , PF 13  and PF 14 , and is dependent on the first display area value VA 11 . The second display coordinate data DP 12  includes a second plurality of screen reference coordinates configured to respectively represent the second plurality of display reference locations PF 21 , PF 22 , PF 23  and PF 24 , and is dependent on the second display area value VA 12 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) accesses the first specific data capacity value VC 11 , stored in the storage area KS 1 , based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , stored in the storage area KS 1 , to obtain the first specific data capacity value VC 11 , and determines or determines beforehand the first display coordinate data DP 11  based on the obtained first specific data capacity value VC 11 . Therefore, the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) obtains the first display coordinate data DP 11  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , stores the first display coordinate data DP 11  in the storage area KS 1  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , and accesses the first display coordinate data DP 11  stored in the storage area KS 1  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1 . 
     The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) accesses the second specific data capacity value VC 12 , stored in the storage area KS 1  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , stored in the storage area KS 1 , to obtain the second specific data capacity value VC 12 , and determines or determines beforehand the second display coordinate data DP 12  based on the obtained second specific data capacity value VC 12 . Therefore, the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) obtains the second display coordinate data DP 12  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , stores the second display coordinate data DP 12  in the storage area KS 1  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , and accesses the second display coordinate data DP 12  stored in the storage area KS 1  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2 . 
     The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) obtains the first display coordinate data DP 11  based on the first communication protocol identifier HP 1  stored in the storage area KS 1 , and causes the display unit  330  based on the obtained first display coordinate data DP 11  to display on the first display area KD 11  the first electronic data DE 11 , a first source target identification information MS 11  representing the first source target identifier HS 11 , and the first communication target identification information MH 11  representing the first communication target identifier HT 11 . For example, under a condition that the processor  312  receives the first effective request signal QR 1 , the processor  312  causes the display unit  330  to display the first electronic data DE 11 , the first source target identification information MS 11  and the first communication target identification information MH 11  on the first display area KD 11  based on the obtained first display coordinate data DP 11 . For example, the first source target identification information MS 11  is the same as or different from the first source target identifier HS 11 . For example, the first communication target identification information MH 11  is the same as or different from the first communication target identifier HT 11 . 
     The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) obtains the second display coordinate data DP 12  based on the second communication protocol identifier HP 2  stored in the storage area KS 1 , and causes the display unit  330  based on the obtained second display coordinate data DP 12  to display on the second display area KD 12  the second electronic data DE 21 , a second source target identification information MS 21  representing the second source target identifier HS 21 , and the second communication target identification information MH 21  representing the second communication target identifier HT 21 . For example, under a condition that the processor  312  receives the first effective request signal QR 1 , the processor  312  causes the display unit  330  to display the second electronic data DE 21 , the second source target identification information MS 21  and the second communication target identification information MH 21  on the second display area KD 12  based on the obtained second display coordinate data DP 12 . For example, the second source target identification information MS 21  is the same as or different from the second source target identifier HS 21 . For example, the second communication target identification information MH 21  is the same as or different from the second communication target identifier HT 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the first storage space SS 11  further includes a fourth storage block BS 14  configured to contain the first variable target identifier set WV 1 . For example, the fourth storage block BS 14  is different from the second storage block BS 12 , and has a sixth data capacity CD 16  represented by a sixth specific data capacity value VC 16 . The second storage space SS 12  further includes a fifth storage block BS 15  configured to contain the second variable target identifier set WV 2 . For example, the fifth storage block BS 15  is different from the third storage block BS 13 , and has a seventh data capacity CD 17  represented by a seventh specific data capacity value VC 17 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) replaces the first specific data capacity value VC 11  stored in the storage area KS 1  with an eighth specific data capacity value VC 18  being different from the first specific data capacity value VC 11  to change the first storage space SS 11  from the first data capacity CD 11  into an eighth data capacity CD 18  represented by the eighth specific data capacity value VC 18 , and thereby changes at least one of a data capacity of the second storage block BS 12  and a data capacity of the fourth storage block BS 14 . The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) replaces the first display coordinate data DP 11  stored in the storage area KS 1  with a third display coordinate data DP 13  being different from the first display coordinate data DP 11  to change the first display area KD 11  from the first display border ND 11  into a third display border ND 13  represented by the third display coordinate data DP 13 . For example, the third display coordinate data DP 13  is determined based on the sixth specific data capacity value VC 16 . 
     The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) replaces the second specific data capacity value VC 12  stored in the storage area KS 1  with a ninth specific data capacity value VC 19  being different from the second specific data capacity value VC 12  to change the second storage space SS 12  from the second data capacity CD 12  into a ninth data capacity CD 19  represented by the ninth specific data capacity value VC 19 , and thereby changes at least one of a data capacity of the third storage block BS 13  and a data capacity of the fifth storage block BS 15 . The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) replaces the second display coordinate data DP 12  stored in the storage area KS 1  with a fourth display coordinate data DP 14  being different from the second display coordinate data DP 12  to change the second display area KD 12  from the second display border ND 12  into a fourth display border ND 14  represented by the fourth display coordinate data DP 14 . For example, the fourth display coordinate data DP 14  is determined based on the seventh specific data capacity value VC 17 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  57   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  8519  of the communication system  851  shown in  FIG.  48   . As shown in  FIG.  57   , the implementation structure  8519  includes the electronic device  300 , the first communication target  511  and the second communication target  521 . The electronic device  300  includes the processing unit  310 , the storage unit  320  coupled to the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ), the input unit  340  coupled to the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ), and the display unit  330  coupled to the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ). Each of the storage unit  320 , the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  is controlled by the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ). 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  300  includes a first electricity application target BU 81 , a second electricity application target BU 91 , an electricity application target BX 51 , an electricity application target BX 61  and an electricity application target BY 21 , each of which is coupled to the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ). The first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , and the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 21  are respectively located at a spatial location EU 81 , a spatial location EU 91 , a spatial location EX 51 , a spatial location EX 61  and a spatial location EY 21 . For example, one of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes the electricity application target BU 81 . One of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes the electricity application target BU 91 . One of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes the electricity application target BX 51 . One of the input unit  340  and the display unit  330  includes the electricity application target BX 61 . One of the input unit  340  and the display unit  30  includes the electricity application target BY 21 . 
     For example, the spatial locations EU 81 , EU 91 , EX 51 , EX 61  and EY 21  are different. For example, two selected from a group consisting of the spatial locations EU 81 , EU 91 , EX 51 , EX 61  and EY 21  are the same. The first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , and the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 21  respectively have a plurality of electricity application areas, or are respectively formed by the plurality of electricity application areas. 
     The input unit  340  receives the first user input operation PU 81  using the first electricity application target BU 81 , and provides the first effective request signal QR 1  including the first operation request message QN 81  to the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) in response to the first user input operation PU 81 . The input unit  340  receives the second user input operation PU 91  using the second electricity application target BU 91 , and provides the second effective request signal QU 1  including the second operation request message QN 91  to the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) in response to the second user input operation PU 91 . 
     The input unit  340  receives the user input operation PK 11  using the electricity application target BX 51 , and provides an operation request message QK 11  to the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) in response to the user input operation PK 11 . The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) performs the data acquisition operation EF 11  in response to the operation request message QK 11  to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. 
     The input unit  340  receives the user input operation PK 21  using the electricity application target BX 61 , and provides an operation request message QK 21  to the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) in response to the user input operation PK 21 . The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) performs the data acquisition operation EF 21  in response to the operation request message QK 21  to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. The input unit  340  receives the user input operation PW 14  using the electricity application target BY 21 , and provides the first input data DB 11  to the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) in response to the user input operation PW 14 . The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) obtains the source data DS 11  based on the first input data DB 11 . For example, each of the user input operations PK 11  and PK 21  is performed by the user  910 . 
     For example, the input unit  340  includes one selected from a group consisting of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 21 , and any combination thereof. Any of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , and the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 2  is a sensing target, wherein the sensing target includes one selected from a group consisting of a sensing area, a push button and a touch point. 
     The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) causes the electronic device  300  to enter the first data preparation phase UP 1  by means of the first electricity application target BU 81 . The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) causes the electronic device  300  to leave the first data preparation phase UP 1  to enter the first data transmission phase UT 1  by means of the second electricity application target BU 91 . The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) obtains the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored by means of the electricity application target BX 51 . The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) obtains the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored by means of the electricity application target BX 61 . The processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) obtains the first input data DB 11  by means of the electricity application target BY 21 . 
     For example, the display unit  330  includes one selected from a group consisting of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 21 , and any combination thereof. For example, the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) is configured to cause the display unit  330  to display the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91  at the same time or for different times. For example, the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) is configured to cause the display unit  330  to display the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 21  at the same time or for different times. Any of the first and the second electricity application targets BU 81  and BU 91 , and the electricity application targets BX 51 , BX 61  and BY 21  is a display target, wherein the display target includes one selected from a group consisting of a display area, an icon and a display action item. 
     The first electricity application target BU 81  is associated with at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the stored first communication target identifier HT 11 , the stored second communication target identifier HT 21 , the first, the second, the third, the fourth and the fifth memory addresses AM 11 , AM 12 , AM 13 , AM 14  and AM 15 , the stored target identifier set identifier HG 11  and the stored target identifier set identifier HG 21 . The second electricity application target BU 91  is associated with at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored protocol identifier group identifier HY 81 , the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the first memory address AM 11  and the second memory address AM 12 . 
     The electricity application target BX 51  is associated with at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored first communication protocol identifier HP 1 , the first memory address AM 11  and the application memory address AE 11 . The electricity application target BX 61  is associated with at least one selected from a group consisting of the stored second communication protocol identifier HP 2 , the second memory address AM 12  and the application memory address AE 21 . The electricity application target BY 21  is associated with the first memory address AM 11  and the second memory address AM 12 , and is used to obtain the first input data DB 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) is configured to cause the display unit  330  to display a selection tool TK 11 . The first user input operation PU 81  uses or selects the first electricity application target BU 81  displayed by the display unit  330  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  340  to provide the first operation request message QN 81  to the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ). The second user input operation PU 91  uses or selects the second electricity application target BU 91  displayed by the display unit  330  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the input unit  340  to provide the second operation request message QN 91  to the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ). 
     The user input operation PK 11  uses the electricity application target BX 51  displayed by the display unit  330  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) to obtain the first communication target identifier HT 11  to be stored. The user input operation PK 21  uses the electricity application target BX 61  displayed by the display unit  330  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) to obtain the second communication target identifier HT 21  to be stored. The user input operation PW 14  uses the electricity application target BY 21  displayed by the display unit  330  by means of the selection tool TK 11  to cause the processing unit  310  (or the processor  312 ) to obtain the first input data DB 11 . For example, the selection tool TK 11  is a cursor. 
     In some embodiments, when the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is the email communication protocol, the email communication protocol may be a simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP), and the fourth specific application communication protocol PC 41  may be one of a POP3 email protocol and an internet message access protocol (IMAP). When the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is the short-message service communication protocol, the fourth specific application communication protocol PC 41  may be the short-message service communication protocol. When the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is the instant-messaging communication protocol, the instant-messaging communication protocol may be one of an instant messaging and presence protocol (IMPP) and an extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), and the fourth specific application communication protocol PC 41  may be one of the instant messaging and presence protocol (IMPP) and the extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP). When the first specific application communication protocol PC 11  is the multimedia-message service communication protocol, the multimedia-message service communication protocol may be a MM1 multimedia-message service protocol, and the fourth specific application communication protocol PC 41  may be the MM1 multimedia-message service protocol. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  58   , which is a schematic diagram showing a communication system  951  according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. The communication system  951  includes an electronic device  300 , a first communication target  521  and a second communication target  511 . The electronic device  300  for signaling the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511  includes a processor  312 , an input unit  340  and a timer  360 . The input unit  340  is coupled to the processor  312 , and is configured to cause the processor  312  to obtain an input data DB 11 . 
     The timer  360  is coupled to the processor  312 , and is configured to be controlled by the processor  312  to cause the processor  312  to receive an interrupt request signal QR 11 . For example, the processor  312  obtains a first electronic data DE 21  and a second electronic data DE 11  being different from the first electronic data DE 21  based on the input data DB 11  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 , causes the first electronic data DE 21  to be sent toward the first communication target  521  based on a first specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and causes the second electronic data DE 11  to be sent toward the second communication target  511  based on a second specific application communication protocol PC 11  being different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  59   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  9511  of the communication system  951  shown in  FIG.  58   . As shown in  FIG.  59   , the implementation structure  9511  includes the electronic device  300 , the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511 . In some embodiments, the processor  312  is configured to perform a time control KT 11  associated with a designated time TH 11  to control the timer  360 . The timer  360  is further configured to cause an integer overflow VH 11  to occur during the designated time TH 11  in response to the time control KT 11 , and causes the processor  312  to receive the interrupt request signal QR 11  in response to the integer overflow VH 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the timer  360  is further configured to be controlled by the processor  312  to sense a variable time TV 12 . The processor  312  is configured to perform a time control KT 12  associated with a designated time TH 12  to control the timer  360 . Under a condition that the timer  360  determines there is a time reach RU 12  at which the variable time TV 12  reaches the designated time TH 12 , the timer  360  causes the processor  312  to receive the interrupt request signal QR 11  in response to the time reach RU 12 . For example, the variable time TV 12  is a clock time. For example, at least one of the first and the second communication targets  521  and  511  is disposed on the outside of the electronic device  300 . 
     In some embodiments, the timer  360  is further configured to be controlled by the processor  312  to sense a variable time length LV 13 . The processor  312  is configured to perform a time control KT 13  associated with a designated time length LT 13  to control the timer  360 . Under a condition that the timer  360  determines there is a time length reach RL 13  at which the variable time length LV 13  reaches the designated time length LT 13 , the timer  360  causes the processor  312  to receive the interrupt request signal QR 11  in response to the time length reach RL 13 . For example, each of the processor  312  and the electronic device  300  is coupled to the first and the second communication targets  521  and  511 . 
     In some embodiments, the processor  312  is coupled to a specific communication target  5 P 1 . For example, the specific communication target  5 A 1  is one of the first and the second communication targets  521  and  511 . The specific communication target  5 P 1  provides a supply voltage VCC 1  to the processor  312 . Under a condition that the processor  312  is powered by the supply voltage VCC 1 , the processor  312  obtains the first electronic data DE 21  and the second electronic data DE 11  based on the input data DB 11  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 , causes the first electronic data DE 21  to be sent toward the first communication target  521  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and causes the second electronic data DE 11  to be sent toward the second communication target  511  based on the second specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     The first specific application communication protocol PC 21  is specified with a first data transmission rate. The second specific application communication protocol PC 11  is specified with a second data transmission rate. The second data transmission rate is different from the first data transmission rate. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  60   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  9512  of the communication system  951  shown in  FIG.  58   . As shown in  FIG.  60   , the implementation structure  9512  includes the electronic device  300 . The electronic device  300  includes the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511 . In some embodiments, the input unit  340  includes a sensing unit  350  coupled to the processor  312 . The sensing unit  350  is configured to sense a variable physical parameter FP 11  to generate a sense signal QQ 11 . The processor  312  is configured to obtain the input data DB 11  including a sensed data DQ 11  from the sense signal QQ 11  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 . The processor  312  is further configured to obtain a current time data DT 11  through the timer  360  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 . The first electronic data DE 21  includes a measured data DM 11  derived from the sensed data DQ 11 . The processor  312  obtains the second electronic data DE 11  based on the first electronic data DE 21  and the current time data DT 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  340  is further configured to provide the input data DB 11  to the processor  312  in response to an input operation PV 11  performed by a user  910 . The electronic device  300  further includes a storage unit  320  storing a data derivation rule RY 11 . The processor  312  is coupled to the storage unit  320 , and is further configured to process the first electronic data DE 21  based on the data derivation rule RY 11  to form the second electronic data DE 11 . The input data DB 11  is associated with an application object  550  coupled to the second communication target  511 . The second electronic data DE 11  is a manufacturing data DJ 11 , and is used by the second communication target  511  to process the application object  550 . For example, the input data DB 11  is associated with at least one of the first and the second communication targets  521  and  511 . 
     For example, the electronic device  300  further includes a timer  361  coupled to the processor  312 . The processor  312  is configured to control the timer  361 , and is configured to obtain the current time data DT 11  through the timer  361  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 . For example, the processor  312  performs a first data derivation using the input data DB 11  to obtain the first electronic data DE 21 , and performs a second data derivation using the input data DB 11  to obtain the second electronic data DE 11 . The second data derivation is different from the first data derivation. 
     For example, the input data DB 11  is associated with a plurality of application objects  250 ,  251 , . . . , and is equal to an object number NU 11  of the plurality of application objects  250 ,  251 , . . . . Each of the plurality of application objects  250 ,  251 , . . . has a functional attribute AT 11  quantified with a predetermined value VJ 11 . The processor  312  is further configured to obtain the predetermined value VJ 11  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 . The processor  312  obtains one of the first and the second electronic data DE 21  and DE 11  based on the input data DB 11  and the obtained predetermined value VJ 11 . 
     For example, the application object  550  is characterized by a physical state SU 11  thereof. The physical state SU 11  is represented by a physical state code CU 11 . The input data DB 11  is equal to the physical state code CU 11 . The second electronic data DE 11  is a control application data, and is used by the second communication target  511  to cause the application object  550  to be in the physical state SU 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the input unit  340  is associated with the variable physical parameter FP 11 . The variable physical parameter FP 11  is characterized by an application state SP 12  thereof. The application state SP 12  is represented by an application state code CP 12 . The processor  312  determines the application state code CP 12  based on the input data DB 11 . The application state SP 12  is associated with a physical phenomenon WP 21  and a physical phenomenon WP 11  being different from the physical phenomenon WP 21 . The physical phenomenon WP 21  is represented by a physical phenomenon data JP 21 . The physical phenomenon WP 11  is represented by a physical phenomenon data JP 11 . For example, the physical phenomenon WP 21  is one selected from a group consisting of an application light, an information display, an optical state and a first physical state. The physical phenomenon WP 11  is one selected from a group consisting of an application sound, an electrical state, a mechanic state and a second physical state. 
     The processor  312  obtains the first electronic data DE 21  and the second electronic data DE 11  based on the application state code CP 12 . For example, the first electronic data DE 21  and the second electronic data DE 11  are the physical phenomenon data JP 21  and the physical phenomenon data JP 11  respectively. The first communication target  521  is configured to form the physical phenomenon WP 21  based on the sent first electronic data DE 21 . The second communication target  511  is configured to form the physical phenomenon WP 11  based on the sent second electronic data DE 11 . 
     For example, the input unit  340  includes a sensing target  280 . The sensing target  180  is coupled to the processor  312 , and includes one of a push button  281  and a functional switch  282 , and has the variable physical parameter FP 11 . The processor  312  is configured to obtain the input data DB 11  by means of the sensing target  180 . For example, the sensing target  180  receives the input operation PV 11  to cause the variable physical parameter FP 11  to be in the application state SP 12 , and thereby causes the processor  312  to obtain the input data DB 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  300  further includes a first communication interface unit  316  coupled to the processor  312 , and a second communication interface unit  315  coupled to the processor  312 . For example, the first communication target  521  is coupled to the first communication interface unit  316 . The second communication target  511  is coupled to the second communication interface unit  315 . The processor  312  is configured to cause the first communication interface unit  316  to send the first electronic data DE 21  toward the first communication target  521  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The processor  312  is further configured to cause the second communication interface unit  315  to send the second electronic data DE 11  toward the second communication target  511  based on the second specific application communication protocol PC 11 . Each of the input unit  340 , the timer  360 , the timer  361 , the storage unit  320 , the first communication interface unit  316  and the second communication interface unit  315  is controlled by the processor  312 . 
     The first communication target  521  is one selected from a group consisting of a first display unit, a first storage device, a first sensor, a first indicator, a first speaker, a first illuminating unit, a first electric motor, a first relay unit, a first light-emitting unit, a first signal transmission unit, a first electrical load unit, a first timing unit, a first electronic tag, a first mobile device, a first functional controller, a first functional driver, a first testing unit, a first manufacturing unit and any combination thereof. The second communication target  511  is one selected from a group consisting of a second display unit, a second storage device, a second sensor, a second indicator, a second speaker, a second illuminating unit, a second electric motor, a second relay unit, a second light-emitting unit, a second signal transmission unit, a second electrical load unit, a second timing unit, a second electronic tag, a second mobile device, a second functional controller, a second functional driver, a second testing unit, a second manufacturing unit and any combination thereof. 
     For example, the first indicator, the first illuminating unit, the second indicator and the second illuminating unit respectively include a first light-emitting diode (LED), a second LED, a third LED and a fourth LED. One of the first and the second timing units is the timer  360 . One of the first and the second timing units is the timer  361 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  300  for signaling the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511  includes a processor  312 , a sensing unit  350  and a timer  360 . The sensing unit  350  is coupled to the processor  312 , and is configured to sense a first variable physical parameter FP 11  to cause the processor  312  to obtain a sensed data DQ 11 . 
     The timer  360  is coupled to the processor  312 , and is configured to be controlled by the processor  312  to cause the processor  312  to receive an interrupt request signal QR 11 . For example, the processor  312  obtains a first electronic data DE 21  and a second electronic data DE 11  being different from the first electronic data DE 21  based on the sensed data DQ 11  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 , causes the first electronic data DE 21  to be sent toward the first communication target  521  based on a first specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and causes the second electronic data DE 11  to be sent toward the second communication target  511  based on a second specific application communication protocol PC 11  being different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  61   , which is a schematic diagram showing a communication system  953  according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. The communication system  953  includes an electronic device  300 , a first communication target  521  and a second communication target  511 . The electronic device  300  for signaling the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511  includes a processor  312 , a sensing unit  350  and a sensing target  180 . The sensing unit  350  is coupled to the processor  312 , and is configured to sense a first variable physical parameter FP 11  to cause the processor  312  to obtain a sensed data DQ 11 . 
     The sensing target  180  is coupled to the processor  312 , and includes one of a push button  181  and a functional switch  182 . For example, the processor  312  is configured to be caused to receive an interrupt request signal QR 11  by means of the sensing target  180 , to obtain a first electronic data DE 21  and a second electronic data DE 11  being different from the first electronic data DE 21  based on the sensed data DQ 11  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 , to cause the first electronic data DE 21  to be sent toward the first communication target  521  based on a first specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and to cause the second electronic data DE 11  to be sent toward the second communication target  511  based on a second specific application communication protocol PC 11  being different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  62   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  9531  of the communication system  953  shown in  FIG.  61   . As shown in  FIG.  61   , the implementation structure  9531  includes the electronic device  300 , the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511 . In some embodiments, the first variable physical parameter FP 11  is formed by means of an application object  250 . The sensing target  180  is configured to receive an input operation PU 81  performed by a user  910  to cause the processor  312  to receive the interrupt request signal QR 11 . The sensing unit  350  and the sensing target  180  are respectively located at different spatial locations KU 50  and KU 80 . For example, at least one of the first and the second communication targets  521  and  511  is disposed on the outside of the electronic device  300 . 
     The sensing unit  350  is a reader, and is configured to sense the first variable physical parameter FP 11  to generate a sense signal QQ 11 . The processor  312  is configured to obtain the sensed data DQ 11  being a recognized data DR 11  from the sense signal QQ 11  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 . The electronic device  300  further includes a timer  360  coupled to the processor  312 . The processor  312  is further configured to obtain a current time data DT 11  through the timer  360  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 . The first electronic data DE 21  is an object data DD 11  associated with the application object  250 . The processor  312  is further configured to obtain the second electronic data DE 11  based on the first electronic data DE 21  and the current time data DT 11 . 
     For example, the application object  250  includes an identification medium  2501 . The identification medium  2501  is one of a bar code and an electronic tag. The first variable physical parameter FP 11  is formed by means of the identification medium  2501 . The first variable physical parameter FP 11  belongs to a physical parameter type. For example, the physical parameter type is the same as or different from a time type. 
     In some embodiments, the first variable physical parameter FP 11  is formed by means of an application object  250 , and is associated with a second variable physical parameter FR 11 . The sensing unit  350  is further configured to sense the first variable physical parameter FP 11  to generate a sense signal QQ 11 . The processor  312  is further configured to obtain the sensed data DQ 11  from the sense signal QQ 11  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 . 
     The second communication target  511  has the second variable physical parameter FR 11 . For example, the second variable physical parameter FR 11  is characterized based on a target state SR 11  thereof. The first electronic data DE 21  is a measured data DM 11 . The processor  312  is further configured to obtain the second electronic data DE 11  associated with the target state SR 11  based on the first electronic data DE 21 . The second electronic data DE 11  is a control application data DW 11 , and is used by the second communication target  511  to cause the second variable physical parameter FR 11  to be in the target state SR 11 . 
     For example, the variable physical parameter FR 11  is one selected from a group consisting of a variable electrical parameter, a variable mechanic parameter, a variable optical parameter, a variable magnetic parameter, a variable real time, a variable real temperature, a variable color temperature, a variable electrical voltage, a variable electrical current, a variable electrical power, a variable electrical resistance, a variable electrical capacitance, a variable electrical inductance, a variable frequency, a clock time, a variable time length, a variable luminance, a variable luminous intensity, a variable application image, a variable application sound, a variable sound volume, a variable flow rate, a variable amplitude, a variable spatial location, a variable displacement, a variable sequence position, a variable angle, a variable spatial length, a variable distance, a variable translational velocity, a variable angular velocity, a variable acceleration, a variable force, a variable pressure, a variable mechanical power and any combination thereof. The control application data DW 11  includes a target state code CJ 11  representing the target state SR 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter FP 11  is characterized by an application state SP 12  thereof. The application state SP 12  is represented by an application state code CP 12 . The processor  312  determines the application state code CP 12  based on the sensed data DQ 11 . The application state SP 12  is associated with a physical phenomenon WP 21  and a physical phenomenon WP 11  being different from the physical phenomenon WP 21 . The physical phenomenon WP 21  is represented by a physical phenomenon data JP 21 . The physical phenomenon WP 11  is represented by a physical phenomenon data JP 11 . 
     The processor  312  obtains the first electronic data DE 21  and the second electronic data DE 11  based on the application state code CP 12 . For example, the first electronic data DE 21  and the second electronic data DE 11  are the physical phenomenon data JP 21  and the physical phenomenon data JP 11  respectively. The first communication target  521  is configured to form the physical phenomenon WP 21  based on the sent first electronic data DE 21 . The second communication target  511  is configured to form the physical phenomenon WP 11  based on the sent second electronic data DE 11 . For example, the sensing unit  350  has the variable physical parameter FP 11 . For example, an environment area of the electronic device  300  has the variable physical parameter FP 11 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  63   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  9532  of the communication system  953  shown in  FIG.  61   . As shown in  FIG.  63   , the implementation structure  9532  includes the electronic device  300 . The electronic device  300  includes the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511 . In some embodiments, the electronic device  300  further includes a storage unit  320  configured to store a data derivation rule RY 11 . The processor  312  is coupled to the storage unit  320 , and is further configured to process the first electronic data DE 21  based on the data derivation rule RY 11  to form the second electronic data DE 11 . The first variable physical parameter FP 11  is associated with an application object  550  coupled to the second communication target  511 . The second electronic data DE 11  is a manufacturing data DJ 11 , and is used by the second communication target  511  to process the application object  550 . 
     For example, the processor  312  performs a first data derivation using the sensed data DQ 11  to obtain the first electronic data DE 21 , and performs a second data derivation using the sensed data DQ 11  to obtain the second electronic data DE 11 . The second data derivation is different from the first data derivation. The electronic device  300  is used by the user  910 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  300  further includes a first communication interface unit  316  coupled to the processor  312 , and a second communication interface unit  315  coupled to the processor  312 . For example, the first communication target  521  is coupled to the first communication interface unit  316 . The second communication target  511  is coupled to the second communication interface unit  315 . The processor  312  is further configured to cause the first communication interface unit  316  to send the first electronic data DE 21  toward the first communication target  521  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The processor  312  is further configured to cause the second communication interface unit  315  to send the second electronic data DE 11  toward the second communication target  511  based on the second specific application communication protocol PC 11 . Each of the sensing unit  350 , the storage unit  320 , the first communication interface unit  316  and the second communication interface unit  315  is controlled by the processor  312 . 
     For example, the processor  312  is configured to cause the first communication interface unit  316  to transmit a functional signal QG 21  toward the first communication target  521  based on the obtained first electronic data DE 21  and the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The functional signal QG 21  carries the obtained first electronic data DE 21 . The processor  312  is configured to cause the second communication interface unit  315  to transmit a functional signal QG 11  toward the second communication target  511  based on the obtained second electronic data DE 11  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The functional signal QG 11  carries the obtained second electronic data DE 11 . 
     The first communication target  521  is one selected from a group consisting of a first display unit, a first storage device, a first sensor, a first indicator, a first speaker, a first illuminating unit, a first electric motor, a first relay unit, a first light-emitting unit, a first signal transmission unit, a first electrical load unit, a first timing unit, a first electronic tag, a first mobile device, a first functional controller, a first functional driver, a first testing unit, a first manufacturing unit and any combination thereof. The second communication target  511  is one selected from a group consisting of a second display unit, a second storage device, a second sensor, a second indicator, a second speaker, a second illuminating unit, a second electric motor, a second relay unit, a second light-emitting unit, a second signal transmission unit, a second electrical load unit, a second timing unit, a second electronic tag, a second mobile device, a second functional controller, a second functional driver, a second testing unit, a second manufacturing unit and any combination thereof. For example, one of the first and the second sensors is the sensing unit  350 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  64   , which is a schematic diagram showing a communication system  955  according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. The communication system  955  includes an electronic device  300 , a first communication target  521  and a second communication target  511 . The electronic device  300  for signaling the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511  includes a processor  312 , a sensing unit  350  and a first communication interface unit  314 . The sensing unit  350  is coupled to the processor  312 , and senses a variable physical parameter FP 11  to cause the processor to obtain a sensed data DQ 11 . 
     The first communication interface unit  314  is coupled to the processor  312 , receives a specific request message QM 1 , and causes the processor  312  to receive an interrupt request signal QR 11  in response to receiving the specific request message QM 1 . For example, the processor  312  obtains a first electronic data DE 21  and a second electronic data DE 11  being different from the first electronic data DE 21  based on the sensed data DQ 11  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 , causes the first electronic data DE 21  to be sent toward the first communication target  521  based on a first specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and causes the second electronic data DE 11  to be sent toward the second communication target  511  based on a second specific application communication protocol PC 11  being different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  65   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  9551  of the communication system  955  shown in  FIG.  64   . As shown in  FIG.  65   , the implementation structure  9551  includes the electronic device  300 . The electronic device  300  includes the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511 . In some embodiments, the specific request message QM 1  includes a specific control instruction QM 11 . The processor  312  causes the electronic device  300  to enter a data preparation phase UP 1  based on the specific control instruction QM 11 . The sensing unit  350  is configured to sense the first variable physical parameter FP 11  to generate a sense signal QQ 11 . The processor  312  is configured to obtain the sensed data DQ 11  from the sense signal QQ 11  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     The first electronic data DE 21  is a measured data DM 11 . The first communication interface unit  314  is coupled to the first communication target  521 . The processor  312  causes the first communication interface unit  714  to send the electronic data DE 21  toward the first communication target  521  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The variable physical parameter FP 11  is characterized based on a target state SP 11  thereof. The communication interface unit  314  receives a control signal QF 11  from the first communication target  521 . For example, the control signal QF 11  is generated based on the sent electronic data DE 21 , and serves to indicate the target state SP 11 . The processor  312  causes the variable physical parameter FP 11  to be in the target state SP 11  in response to the control signal QF 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  300  further includes a second communication interface unit  316  coupled to the processor  312 , and a third communication interface unit  315  coupled to the processor  312 . For example, the first communication target  521  is coupled to the second communication interface unit  316 . The second communication target  511  is coupled to the third communication interface unit  315 . One of the second and the third communication interface units  316  and  315  is the first communication interface unit  314 . The processor  312  is further configured to cause the second communication interface unit  316  to send the first electronic data DE 21  toward the first communication target  521  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The processor  312  is further configured to cause the third communication interface unit  315  to send the second electronic data DE 11  toward the second communication target  511  based on the second specific application communication protocol PC 11 . Each of the sensing unit  350 , the first communication interface unit  314 , the second communication interface unit  316  and the third communication interface unit  315  is controlled by the processor  312 . 
     The first communication target  521  is one selected from a group consisting of a first display unit, a first storage device, a first sensor, a first indicator, a first speaker, a first illuminating unit, a first electric motor, a first functional controller, a first relay unit, a first light-emitting unit, a first signal transmission unit, a first electrical load unit, a first timing unit, a first electronic tag, a first mobile device, a first functional driver, a first testing unit, a first manufacturing unit and any combination thereof. The second communication target  511  is one selected from a group consisting of a second display unit, a second storage device, a second sensor, a second indicator, a second speaker, a second illuminating unit, a second electric motor, a second relay unit, a second light-emitting unit, a second signal transmission unit, a second electrical load unit, a second timing unit, a second electronic tag, a second mobile device, a second functional controller, a second functional driver, a second testing unit, a second manufacturing unit and any combination thereof. For example, one of the first and the second sensors is the sensing unit  350 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  66   , which is a schematic diagram showing a communication system  901  according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. The communication system  901  includes an electronic device  700 , a first communication target  521  and a second communication target  511 . The electronic device  700  for signaling the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511  includes a processor  712 , a sensing unit  750  and a timer  760 . The sensing unit  750  is coupled to the processor  712 , and is configured to sense a variable physical parameter FP 21  to generate a sense signal QQ 21 . 
     The timer  760  is coupled to the processor  712 , and is configured to be controlled by the processor  712  to cause the processor  712  to receive an interrupt request signal QR 11 . For example, the processor  712  is configured to obtain a sensed data DQ 21  from the sense signal QQ 21  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 , to determine an electronic data DE 61  being different from the sensed data DQ 21  based on the sensed data DQ 21 , to cause the electronic data DE 61  to be sent toward the first communication target  521  based on a first specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and to cause the electronic data DE 61  to be sent toward the second communication target  511  based on a second specific application communication protocol PC 11  being different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  67   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  9011  of the communication system  901  shown in  FIG.  66   . As shown in  FIG.  67   , the implementation structure  9011  includes the electronic device  700 , the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511 . In some embodiments, the processor  712  is further configured to perform a time control KT 21  associated with a designated time TH 21  to control the timer  760 . The timer  760  is configured to cause an integer overflow VH 21  to occur during the designated time TH 21  in response to the time control KT 21 , and to cause the processor  712  to receive the interrupt request signal QR 11  in response to the integer overflow VH 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the timer  760  is further configured to be controlled by the processor  712  to sense a variable time TV 22 . The processor  712  is further configured to perform a time control KT 22  associated with a designated time TH 22  to control the timer  760 . Under a condition that the timer  760  determines there is a time reach RU 22  at which the variable time TV 22  reaches the designated time TH 22 , the timer  760  causes the processor  712  to receive the interrupt request signal QR 11  in response to the time reach RU 22 . For example, the variable time TV 22  is a clock time. For example, at least one of the first and the second communication targets  521  and  511  is disposed on the outside of the electronic device  700 . 
     In some embodiments, the timer  760  is further configured to be controlled by the processor  712  to sense a variable time length LV 23 . The processor  712  is further configured to perform a time control KT 23  associated with a designated time length LT 23  to control the timer  760 . Under a condition that the timer  760  determines there is a time length reach RL 23  at which the variable time length LV 23  reaches the designated time length LT 23 , the timer  760  causes the processor  712  to receive the interrupt request signal QR 11  in response to the time length reach RL 23 . For example, each of the processor  712  and the electronic device  700  is coupled to the first and the second communication targets  521  and  511 . 
     In some embodiments, the processor  712  is coupled to a specific communication target  5 P 1 . For example, the specific communication target  5 A 1  is one of the first and the second communication targets  521  and  511 . The specific communication target  5 P 1  provides a supply voltage VCC 1  to the processor  712 . Under a condition that the processor  712  is powered by the supply voltage VCC 1 , the processor  712  is configured to obtain the sensed data DQ 21  from the sense signal QQ 21  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 , to determine the electronic data DE 61  based on the sensed data DQ 21 , to cause the electronic data DE 61  to be sent toward the first communication target  521  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and to cause the electronic data DE 61  to be sent toward the second communication target  511  based on the second specific application communication protocol PC 11 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  68   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  9012  of the communication system  901  shown in  FIG.  66   . As shown in  FIG.  68   , the implementation structure  9012  includes the electronic device  700 . The electronic device  700  includes the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511 . In some embodiments, the sensing unit  750  is a reader. The sensed data DQ 21  is a recognized data DR 21 . The processor  712  is further configured to obtain a current time data DT 21  through the timer  760  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 . The processor  712  is further configured to determine the electronic data DE 61  based on the sensed data DQ 21  and the current time data DT 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter FP 21  is formed by means of an application object  250 . The electronic data DE 61  is a recognized data DR 22  used to recognize the application object  250 . For example, the application object  250  includes an identification medium  2501 . The identification medium  2501  is one of a bar code and an electronic tag. The first variable physical parameter FP 21  is formed by means of the identification medium  2501 . For example, the electronic device  700  further includes a timer  761  coupled to the processor  712 . The processor  712  is configured to control the timer  761 , and is configured to obtain the current time data DT 21  through the timer  761  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 . 
     In some embodiments, the variable physical parameter FP 21  is associated with an application object  550  coupled to a specific communication target  5 A 1 . For example, the specific communication target  5 A 1  is one of the first and the second communication targets  521  and  511 . The electronic data DE 61  is a manufacturing data DJ 21 , and is used by the specific communication target  5 A 1  to process the application object  550 . For example, the processor  712  performs a data derivation using the sensed data DQ 21  to obtain the electronic data DE 61 . The specific communication target  5 A 1  is the specific communication target  5 P 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  700  further includes a first communication interface unit  716  coupled to the processor  712 , and a second communication interface unit  715  coupled to the processor  712 . For example, the first communication target  521  is coupled to the first communication interface unit  716 , and the second communication target  511  is coupled to the second communication interface unit  715 . The processor  712  is further configured to cause the first communication interface unit  716  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  521  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The processor  712  is further configured to cause the second communication interface unit  715  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  511  based on the second specific application communication protocol PC 11 . Each of the sensing unit  750 , the timer  760 , the timer  761 , the first communication interface unit  716  and the second communication interface unit  715  is controlled by the processor  712 . 
     For example, the processor  712  is configured to cause the first communication interface unit  716  to transmit a functional signal QG 61  toward the first communication target  521  based on the determined electronic data DE 61  and the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The functional signal QG 61  carries the determined electronic data DE 61 . The processor  712  is configured to cause the second communication interface unit  715  to transmit a functional signal QG 51  toward the second communication target  511  based on the determined electronic data DE 61  and the second specific application communication protocol PC 11 . The functional signal QG 11  carries the determined second electronic data DE 61 . 
     The first communication target  521  is one selected from a group consisting of a first display unit, a first storage device, a first sensor, a first indicator, a first speaker, a first illuminating unit, a first electric motor, a first relay unit, a first light-emitting unit, a first signal transmission unit, a first electrical load unit, a first timing unit, a first electronic tag, a first mobile device, a first functional controller, a first functional driver, a first testing unit, a first manufacturing unit and any combination thereof. The second communication target  511  is one selected from a group consisting of a second display unit, a second storage device, a second sensor, a second indicator, a second speaker, a second illuminating unit, a second electric motor, a second relay unit, a second light-emitting unit, a second signal transmission unit, a second electrical load unit, a second timing unit, a second electronic tag, a second mobile device, a second functional controller, a second functional driver, a second testing unit, a second manufacturing unit and any combination thereof. For example, one of the first and the second sensors is the sensing unit  750 . 
     For example, the first indicator, the first illuminating unit, the second indicator and the second illuminating unit respectively include a first light-emitting diode (LED), a second LED, a third LED and a fourth LED. One of the first and the second timing units is the timer  760 . One of the first and the second timing units is the timer  761 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  69   , which is a schematic diagram showing a communication system  903  according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. The communication system  903  includes an electronic device  700 , a first communication target  521  and a second communication target  511 . The electronic device  700  for signaling the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511  includes a processor  712 , a sensing unit  750  and a sensing target  180 . The sensing unit  750  is coupled to the processor  712 , and is configured to sense a variable physical parameter FP 21  to generate a sense signal QQ 21 . 
     The sensing target  180  is coupled to the processor  712 , and includes one of a push button  181  and a functional switch  182 . For example, the processor  712  is configured to be caused to receive an interrupt request signal QR 11  by means of the sensing target  180 , to obtain a sensed data DQ 21  from the sense signal QQ 21  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 , to determine an electronic data DE 61  being different from the sensed data DQ 21  based on the sensed data DQ 21 , to cause the electronic data DE 61  to be sent toward the first communication target  521  based on a first specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and to cause the electronic data DE 61  to be sent toward the second communication target  511  based on a second specific application communication protocol PC 11  being different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  70   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  9031  of the communication system  903  shown in  FIG.  69   . As shown in  FIG.  70   , the implementation structure  9031  includes the electronic device  700 . The electronic device  700  includes the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511 . In some embodiments, the sensing target  180  is configured to receive an input operation PU 81  performed by a user  910  to cause the processor  712  to receive the interrupt request signal QR 11 . The sensing unit  750  and the sensing target  180  are respectively located at different spatial locations KU 51  and KU 80 . For example, the sensing unit  750  has the variable physical parameter FP 21 . For example, an environment area of the electronic device  700  has the variable physical parameter FP 21 . The electronic device  700  is used by the user  910 . 
     The electronic data DE 61  is a measured data DM 61 . The electronic device  700  further includes a communication interface unit  714  coupled to the processor  712 . The processor  712  causes the communication interface unit  714  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward a specific communication target  5 A 1  based on one of the first and the second specific application communication protocols PC 21  and PC 11 . For example, the specific communication target  5 A 1  is one of the first and the second communication targets  521  and  511 . The variable physical parameter FP 21  is characterized based on a target state SP 21  thereof. The communication interface unit  714  receives a control signal QF 21  from the specific communication target  5 A. For example, the control signal QF 21  is generated based on the sent electronic data DE 61 , and serves to indicate the target state SP 21 . The processor  712  causes the variable physical parameter FP 21  to be in the target state SP 21  in response to the control signal QF 21 . 
     In some embodiments, the sensing unit  750  is a reader. The sensed data DQ 21  is a recognized data DR 21 . The electronic device  700  further includes a timer  760  coupled to the processor  712 . The processor  712  is further configured to obtain a current time data DT 21  through the timer  760  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 . The processor  712  is further configured to determine the electronic data DE 61  based on the sensed data DQ 21  and the current time data DT 21 . 
     The variable physical parameter FP 21  belongs to a physical parameter type. For example, the physical parameter type is the same as or different from a time type. For example, the processor  712  performs a data derivation using the sensed data DQ 21  to obtain the electronic data DE 61 . For example, at least one of the first and the second communication targets  521  and  511  is disposed on the outside of the electronic device  700 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  71   , which is a schematic diagram showing a communication system  905  according to various embodiments of the present disclosure. The communication system  905  includes an electronic device  700 , a first communication target  521  and a second communication target  511 . The electronic device  700  for signaling the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511  includes a processor  712 , a sensing unit  750  and a first communication interface unit  714 . The sensing unit  750  is coupled to the processor  712 , and is configured to sense a variable physical parameter FP 21  to generate a sense signal QQ 21 . 
     The first communication interface unit  714  is coupled to the processor  712 , receives a specific request message QM 1 , and causes the processor  712  to receive an interrupt request signal QR 11  in response to receiving the specific request message QM 1 . For example, the processor  712  is configured to obtain a sensed data DQ 21  from the sense signal QQ 21  in response to the interrupt request signal QR 11 , to determine an electronic data DE 61  being different from the sensed data DQ 21  based on the sensed data DQ 21 , to cause the electronic data DE 61  to be sent toward the first communication target  521  based on a first specific application communication protocol PC 21 , and to cause the electronic data DE 61  to be sent toward the second communication target  511  based on a second specific application communication protocol PC 11  being different from the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  72   , which is a schematic diagram showing an implementation structure  9051  of the communication system  905  shown in  FIG.  71   . As shown in  FIG.  72   , the implementation structure  9051  includes the electronic device  700 . The electronic device  700  includes the first communication target  521  and the second communication target  511 . In some embodiments, the specific request message QM 1  includes a specific control instruction QM 11 . The processor  72  causes the electronic device  700  to enter a data preparation phase UP 1  based on the specific control instruction QM 11 . The processor  312  is configured to obtain the sensed data DQ 21  from the sense signal QQ 21  in the data preparation phase UP 1 . 
     In some embodiments, the electronic device  700  further includes a first communication interface unit  716  coupled to the processor  712 , and a second communication interface unit  715  coupled to the processor  712 . For example, the first communication target  521  is coupled to the first communication interface unit  716 . The second communication target  511  is coupled to the second communication interface unit  715 . One of the second and the third communication interface units  716  and  715  is the first communication interface unit  714 . The processor  712  is further configured to cause the second communication interface unit  716  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the first communication target  521  based on the first specific application communication protocol PC 21 . The processor  712  is further configured to cause the third communication interface unit  715  to send the electronic data DE 61  toward the second communication target  511  based on the second specific application communication protocol PC 11 . Each of the sensing unit  750 , the first communication interface unit  714 , the second communication interface unit  716  and the third communication interface unit  715  is controlled by the processor  712 . 
     The first communication target  521  is one selected from a group consisting of a first display unit, a first storage device, a first sensor, a first indicator, a first speaker, a first illuminating unit, a first electric motor, a first relay unit, a first light-emitting unit, a first signal transmission unit, a first electrical load unit, a first timing unit, a first electronic tag, a first mobile device, a first functional controller, a first functional driver, a first testing unit, a first manufacturing unit and any combination thereof. The second communication target  511  is one selected from a group consisting of a second display unit, a second storage device, a second sensor, a second indicator, a second speaker, a second illuminating unit, a second electric motor, a second relay unit, a second light-emitting unit, a second signal transmission unit, a second electrical load unit, a second timing unit, a second electronic tag, a second mobile device, a second functional controller, a second functional driver, a second testing unit, a second manufacturing unit and any combination thereof. For example, one of the first and the second sensors is the sensing unit  750 . 
     While the disclosure has been described in terms of what is presently considered to be the most practical and preferred embodiments, it is to be understood that the disclosure need not be limited to the disclosed embodiments. On the contrary, it is intended to cover various modifications and similar arrangements included within the spirit and scope of the appended claims, which are to be accorded with the broadest interpretation so as to encompass all such modifications and similar structures.